z/OS V1R6.0 ISPF User™s Guide Vol I

Interactive System Productivity Facility (ISPF)
User’s Guide Volume I
z/OS Version 1 Release 6.0
SC34-4822-03
Interactive System Productivity Facility (ISPF)
User’s Guide Volume I
z/OS Version 1 Release 6.0
SC34-4822-03
Note
Before using this document, read the general information under “Notices” on page 213.
Fourth Edition (September 2004)
This edition applies to ISPF for Version 1 Release 6.0 of the licensed program z/OS (program number 5694-A01)
and to all subsequent releases and modifications until otherwise indicated in new editions.
Order publications by phone or fax. IBM Software Manufacturing Solutions takes publication orders between 8:30
a.m. and 7:00 p.m. eastern standard time (EST). The phone number is (800) 879-2755. The fax number is (800)
284-4721.
You can also order publications through your IBM representative or the IBM branch office serving your locality.
Publications are not stocked at the address below.
A form for comments appears at the back of this publication. If the form has been removed, and you have
ISPF-specific comments, address your comments to:
IBM Corporation
Department J87/D325
555 Bailey Avenue
San Jose, CA 95141-1003
U.S.A.
Internet: [email protected]
If you would like a reply, be sure to include your name, address, telephone number, e-mail address, or FAX
number.
Make sure to include the following in your comment or note:
Title and order number of this document
Page number or topic related to your comment
The ISPF development team maintains a site on the World Wide Web. The URL for the site is:
http://www.ibm.com/software/awdtools/ispf/
© Copyright International Business Machines Corporation 1980, 2004. All rights reserved.
US Government Users Restricted Rights – Use, duplication or disclosure restricted by GSA ADP Schedule Contract
with IBM Corp.
Contents
Figures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vii
Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ix
Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xi
About This Document . . . .
Who Should Use This Document
What Is In This Document? . .
Using LookAt to look up message
. . . . . . . xi
. . . . . . . xi
. . . . . . . xi
explanations . . xii
Summary of Changes . . . . . . . . xv
ISPF Product and Library changes . . . .
ISPF Dialog Manager component changes .
Dialog Tag Language (DTL) changes . .
ISPF PDF Component changes . . . . .
ISPF SCLM Component changes . . . .
ISPF Client/Server Component changes .
ISPF Migration Considerations . . . .
.
.
.
.
. xv
. xv
. . . xvi
. . . xvi
. . . xvi
. . . xvii
. . . xvii
What’s in the z/OS V1R6.0 ISPF
library? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xix
z/OS V1R6.0 ISPF .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. xix
Part 1. Introduction to ISPF . . . . . 1
Chapter 1. Overview of ISPF . . . . . . 3
ISPF Components . . . . . . . . . . .
ISPF Functions . . . . . . . . . . . .
View, Browse, Edit, Edit Macros, and Models
Dialog Services . . . . . . . . . .
Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dialog Test, Foreground, and Batch . . . .
TSO Commands, CLISTs, and REXX EXECs .
Software Configuration and Library Manager
(SCLM) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Other IBM Program Development Products .
Online Tutorial . . . . . . . . . .
Supported Data Types . . . . . . . . .
Member Name Conventions . . . . . .
Running ISPF . . . . . . . . . . . .
Starting ISPF . . . . . . . . . . .
The Primary Option Menu panel . . . .
User Profiles . . . . . . . . . . .
Getting Help . . . . . . . . . . .
Ending an ISPF Function or ISPF . . . .
Chapter 2. The ISPF User Interface
Some Terms You Should Know .
Understanding ISPF Panels . .
Panel Format . . . . . .
Panel Types . . . . . .
Option Selection . . . . .
Action Bars . . . . . .
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1980, 2004
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
3
3
4
4
4
5
5
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 5
. 5
. 5
. 5
. 6
. 7
. 7
. 8
. 10
. 11
. 11
. . 13
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
13
14
14
15
16
17
Point-and-Shoot Text Fields . . . . . . . .
Function Keys . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selection Fields . . . . . . . . . . . .
Entering Commands in ISPF . . . . . . . . .
Types of Commands . . . . . . . . . .
National Language Support . . . . . . . .
ISPF Command Syntax Notation . . . . . .
Command Nesting . . . . . . . . . . .
Running in GUI mode . . . . . . . . . . .
Starting a GUI Session . . . . . . . . . .
What GUI Mode Looks Like . . . . . . . .
Switching Between GUI Mode and 3270 Mode .
Special characters or symbols . . . . . . .
ISPF GUI Support of TSO Line Mode Output and
Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bi-directional Language Support . . . . . .
Ending a GUI Session . . . . . . . . . .
Closing the ISPF Client/Server Workstation
Agent Component . . . . . . . . . . .
Splitting the Screen Horizontally or Vertically . . .
The SPLIT Command . . . . . . . . . .
The SWAP Command . . . . . . . . . .
The SWITCH Command . . . . . . . . .
3290 Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . .
20
20
21
21
22
23
23
25
25
26
28
37
37
39
42
44
44
44
45
45
48
49
Chapter 3. Using Personal Data Set
Lists and Library Lists . . . . . . . . 51
Personal List Modes . . . . . . . . . .
Personal Data Set Lists . . . . . . . . .
Personal Library Lists . . . . . . . . .
Reference Data Set List . . . . . . . .
Reference Library List . . . . . . . . .
How to Get a List of Your Personal Lists . .
How to Create a Personal List . . . . . .
Retrieving Data From Personal Lists . . . .
Using Personal Lists to Create Customized
DSLIST Displays. . . . . . . . . . .
Personal Data Set List Panel . . . . . . .
Personal Data Set Lists Panel . . . . . .
Shared Personal Lists . . . . . . . . . .
Name Retrieval with the NRETRIEV command .
SCLM Considerations for NRETRIEV . . . .
Command Interface (Fast Path) to the Personal List
Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Function Keys with Personal Lists . . .
Example of an ISPF Panel That Uses a Referral List
Example of an ISPF Panel That Enables NRETRIEV
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
52
53
54
54
54
55
55
56
.
.
.
.
.
.
56
57
60
62
63
64
. 65
. 66
66
69
Chapter 4. Using Commands, Function
Keys, and Light Pen or Cursor
Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
ISPF System Commands . . . .
Using the RETRIEVE, RETF, and
Commands . . . . . . .
Using the RETURN Command .
. . .
RETP
. . .
. . .
.
.
. 72
.
.
.
.
. 86
. 89
iii
Using the Jump Function . . . . . . . . . 90
Using the Scrolling Commands . . . . . . . 91
Using the EXPAND Command . . . . . . . 92
Using Command Tables to Define Commands . . 93
SELECT Action Commands Temporarily Invoke a
New Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Assigning Command Aliases . . . . . . . 96
Overriding System Commands . . . . . . . 97
Passing Commands to a Dialog Function . . . 98
Specifying Command Actions Dynamically . . . 99
Using a Function Key . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Defining Function Key Values . . . . . . . 101
Changing the Format of the Function Key Area 101
Saving Function Key Definitions . . . . . . 104
Using the Light Pen and Cursor-Select Key . . 104
How Program Access (PA) Keys Affect ISPF
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
AUTOTYPE - Automatic Data Set Name and
Member Name Completion . . . . . . . . . 106
How to Use AUTOTYPE . . . . . . . . 107
Rules for Specifying the ’Other Data Set Name’
Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Rules for Library Fields - Project, Group, Type,
Member . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Cursor Position Sensitivity . . . . . . . . 108
Restrictions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Enabling Applications to Use AUTOTYPE . . . 108
Chapter 5. Libraries and Data Sets . . 111
Naming ISPF Libraries and Data Sets . . . . .
ISPF Library Names . . . . . . . . . .
Other Partitioned or Sequential Data Set Names
Volume Serials . . . . . . . . . . . .
Library Concatenation . . . . . . . . . .
Concatenation during Editing . . . . . . .
Concatenation during Language Processing . .
Using Member Selection Lists . . . . . . . .
Displaying Member Lists . . . . . . . .
Ending Member Lists . . . . . . . . . .
ISPF Member Statistics . . . . . . . . .
Load Module Library Member Statistics . . .
Member Selection List Commands . . . . .
Member List Positioning . . . . . . . .
Data Set Passwords . . . . . . . . . . .
Format Definitions . . . . . . . . . . .
Mixed Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Partitioned Data Set Extended (PDSE) . . . . .
Packed Data Sets . . . . . . . . . . . .
List and Log Data Sets . . . . . . . . . .
List Data Set. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Log Data Set . . . . . . . . . . . .
Processing the Log and List Data Sets . . . .
How to Specify Log and List Data Set
Processing Options . . . . . . . . . .
Processing the Log and List Data Sets During an
ISPF Session . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Log and List Data Set Processing at the End of a
Session . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Set Processing Options . . . . . . .
Foreground and Batch Output Listings . . . . .
Other Temporary Data Sets . . . . . . . . .
iv
z/OS V1R6.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol I
111
111
112
113
114
115
115
116
117
118
118
123
124
133
134
134
135
135
136
136
136
137
137
137
Job Statement Information . . .
Running a Sample ISPF Session .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 143
. 143
Chapter 6. Getting Ready to Run on
MVS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Setting Up ISPF Libraries . . . . . . . .
Allocating Required ISPF Libraries . . . . .
Allocating Optional Table and File Tailoring ISPF
Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Allocating Optional Image ISPF Library . . .
Allocating CLIST, REXX, and Program Libraries
Allocating DBCS Libraries . . . . . . . .
Selecting the National Language for ISPF Sessions
. 149
. 149
. 152
. 152
153
. 153
154
Part 2. Appendixes . . . . . . . . 155
Appendix A. Installing the
Client/Server Component . . . . . . 157
Installation Considerations for the Client/Server
component . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Assumptions . . . . . . . . . . .
Required Hardware and Software . . . .
Configuration Parameters . . . . . . .
Downloading the Workstation Agent . . . .
File Transfer Protocol (FTP) Download . . .
Manual Download . . . . . . . . .
Running the Installation Program . . . . .
The Workstation Agent Window . . . . . .
The System Register Panel . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
157
157
158
158
158
159
162
163
164
166
Appendix B. Configuring
Communications for the ISPF
Client/Server . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Configuring TCP/IP connections .
TCP/IP Requirements Fast Path
TCP/IP Requirements Detail .
TCP/IP additional tips . . .
Configuring APPC connections .
APPC Requirements Fast Path .
APPC Requirements Detail . .
APPC additional tips . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
169
169
169
172
175
175
175
177
Appendix C. Listing Formats . . . . . 179
Source and Index Listings . . . . . .
Source Listings . . . . . . . . .
Index Listings . . . . . . . . .
ISPF Log Listings . . . . . . . . .
Member List Listings . . . . . . . .
Member List Listings for Source Libraries
Member List Listings for Load Libraries
Formats for Member List Listings . .
Data Set List Listings . . . . . . . .
Format for Data Set List Listings . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
179
179
180
183
183
183
184
185
185
186
137
139
140
142
142
Appendix D. APL and TEXT Character
Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Appendix E. Abbreviations for
Commands and Other Values . . . . 189
Command Abbreviations . . . . . .
Field Value Abbreviations . . . . . .
Keyword/Operand, Scroll Amount, and
Programming Language Abbreviations . .
Scroll Amount Abbreviations . . . .
Programming Language Abbreviations .
.
.
.
.
. 189
. 189
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 189
. 190
. 190
Appendix F. Allocation Data Sets . . . 191
SYSIN Data Set . . .
SYSLIB Data Set . .
SYSPRINT Data Set .
SYSTERM Data Set .
SYSLIN Data Set . .
SYSPUNCH Data Set .
SYSUT1 Data Set . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
191
191
191
192
192
192
192
SYSUT2—SYSUT7 Data Sets
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 192
Appendix G. ISRDDN Diagnostic
Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
The Current Data Set Allocations List .
Using Commands on the Displayed List
Allocation List Primary Commands .
Allocation List Line Commands . .
Browsing Storage . . . . . . . .
Defining Named Storage Locations . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
193
197
197
204
206
211
Notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Programming Interface Information .
Trademarks . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 214
. 215
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Contents
v
vi
z/OS V1R6.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol I
Figures
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
33.
34.
35.
36.
37.
ISPF Primary Option Menu (ISR@PRIM) with
license information . . . . . . . . . . 8
ISPF Primary Option Menu (ISR@PRIM) . . . 8
Panel Format . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Primary Option Menu showing key features
16
Panel with an Action Bar Pull-Down Menu
18
An Unavailable Choice on a Pull-Down
19
Pop-Up Selected from an Action Bar
Pull-Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
The Workstation Agent window. . . . . . 26
The Initiate Workstation Connection Panel
27
WSA Connection Panel. . . . . . . . . 27
ISPF Primary Option Menu Displayed in
Personal Communications . . . . . . . . 28
ISPF Primary Option Menu Displayed Using
ISPF Workstation Agent . . . . . . . . 29
ISPF Dialog Test Display Panel Displayed on a
3270 Emulator . . . . . . . . . . . 34
ISPF Dialog Test Display Panel Displayed
Using ISPF Workstation Agent. . . . . . . 35
A Pull-Down Menu with an Unavailable
Choice Displayed on a 3270 Emulator . . . . 36
A Pull-Down Menu with an Unavailable
Choice Displayed Using ISPF Workstation
Agent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
ISPF/TSO GUI Window . . . . . . . . 39
ISPF/TSO GUI Window with Pull-Down
Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
ISPF Task List . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Splitting the 3290 Screen . . . . . . . . 50
RefList Pull-Down Menu . . . . . . . . 52
RefMode Pull-Down Menu . . . . . . . 53
Personal Data Set List Panel (ISRPDSNL)
57
Personal Data Set Lists Panel (ISRPLTAB)
60
Defining Function Keys to Issue Referral List
Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Example Panel Definition Using a Referral List 67
Example Panel Definition Enabling NRETRIEV 69
Tailor Function Key Definition Display Panel
(ISPOPFA) . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Use of Light Pen Attribute . . . . . . . 105
Hierarchy of ISPF Libraries . . . . . . . 115
Member List Commands Pop-Up Window
(ISRCMLEP) . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Member List Display (ISRUDMM) . . . . 119
Member List Display cont. (ISRUDMM)
119
Member List Color Change Utility Panel
(ISRMLCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Member List Sort Field View Panel (ISRMLIS) 121
Load Module Library Display (ISRUDMM)
123
Library Utility before Print, Rename, and
Delete (ISRUDMM) . . . . . . . . . 132
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1980, 2004
38.
39.
40.
41.
42.
43.
44.
45.
46.
47.
48.
49.
50.
51.
52.
53.
54.
55.
56.
57.
58.
59.
60.
61.
62.
63.
64.
65.
66.
67.
68.
69.
70.
71.
72.
73.
74.
75.
Library Utility after Print, Rename, and
Delete (ISRUDMM) . . . . . . . . .
Log Data Set Defaults Panel (ISPLLP01)
List Data Set Defaults Panel (ISPLLP02)
Specify Disposition of Log and List Data Sets
Panel (ISPPFT03) . . . . . . . . . .
Local Print Command Edit Panel (ISPCHPLP)
ISPF Client/Server Installation Notice
(ISPWSD02) . . . . . . . . . . . .
Second Client/Server Component Download
Panel (ISPWSD04) . . . . . . . . . .
ISPF Client/Server Component Install
Program Panel (ISPWSD07) . . . . . . .
Client/Server Component Download Panel
(ISPWSD05) . . . . . . . . . . . .
Workstation Agent Install Program . . . .
The Workstation Agent window . . . . .
System Register Panel . . . . . . . . .
Add System Pop-up Dialog . . . . . . .
Add User Pop-up Dialog . . . . . . .
Sample Source Listing . . . . . . . .
Sample Index Listing - Managed Source
Library. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sample Index Listing - Managed Load
Library. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sample ISPF Log Listing . . . . . . . .
Sample Member List Listing for a Source
Library. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sample Member List Listing for a Load
Library. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sample Data Set List Listing . . . . . .
Internal Character Representations for APL
Keyboards . . . . . . . . . . . .
Internal Character Representations for Text
Keyboards . . . . . . . . . . . .
Current Data Set Allocations List panel
Data Set Attributes in ISRDDN . . . . .
Additional DD Information . . . . . . .
Additional DD Information . . . . . . .
Current Data Set Allocations List in LONG
Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Results of the MEMBER Command . . . .
The Duplicates List Display . . . . . . .
Pseudo-DD Name Read Confirmation Panel
The CSVQUERY Results Panel . . . . . .
The System ENQ Status List Panel . . . .
Storage Viewed in FORMAT Mode . . . .
CHAIN Storage Format . . . . . . . .
ARRAY Storage Format . . . . . . . .
ARRAYP Storage Format . . . . . . . .
Sample ISRDDN Named Storage File
132
138
138
140
141
160
161
162
162
163
164
166
166
167
180
181
182
183
184
184
186
187
188
194
195
196
196
198
199
201
0
202
204
208
209
210
211
211
vii
viii
z/OS V1R6.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol I
Tables
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Entry Methods and Command Types . . .
Characteristics of the Line Command Field
ISPF System Commands . . . . . . .
Function Key Arrangement . . . . . .
Member Selection List Differences . . . .
Sort Fields for Source Libraries. . . . .
Sort Fields for Load Libraries . . . . .
Examples of search strings . . . . . .
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1980, 2004
. 21
24
. 72
. 100
. 116
. 128
. 129
. 129
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
Required Partitioned Data Sets . . . . . .
LRECL Limits during ISPF Initialization
Table and File-Tailoring Data Sets . . . . .
Image Data Set . . . . . . . . . . .
Format of Source Library Member List Listing
Format of Load Library Member List Listing
Format of Data Set List Listing . . . . . .
149
150
152
152
185
185
186
ix
x
z/OS V1R6.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol I
Preface
This document provides reference and usage information for programmers who
develop applications with ISPF. It also provides conceptual and functional
descriptions of ISPF.
About This Document
This document contains two parts. The first part provides introductory information
about using ISPF:
v How to exploit the ISPF user interface
v An overview of ISPF
v How to use referral lists
v A description of ISPF commands
v How to use libraries and data sets
v How to prepare to run on MVS.
The second part contains the appendixes and provides:
v Information you need before you install the ISPF Client/Server component
workstation interface
v APL and TEXT character conversion information
v Lists of abbreviations for commands, field values, keywords/operands, scroll
amounts, and programming languages
v Descriptions of allocation data sets
v Descriptions and examples of the output listing formats.
Information about using ISPF Options is contained in the ISPF User’s Guide Volume
II.
Who Should Use This Document
This document is for application programmers using ISPF. Users should be familiar
with coding CLISTs, REXX EXECs, or programs in the MVS environment.
What Is In This Document?
Chapter 1, “Overview of ISPF,” describes ISPF uses and the functions provided by
the ISPF licensed program.
Chapter 2, “The ISPF User Interface,” provides an overview of the ISPF user
interface. This chapter also describes the Graphical User Interface (GUI); that is,
how ISPF runs on a workstation. Information is provided on:
v Panel formats and features
v Action bars
v Commands
v The ISPF Workstation Agent (which provides the GUI interface)
v The Primary Option Menu panel
v Splitting the screen
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1980, 2004
xi
Chapter 3, “Using Personal Data Set Lists and Library Lists,” describes the four
types of referral lists, which are used to retrieve a stored data set or library to the
currently displayed panel:
v Reference data set list
v Reference library list
v Personal data set list
v Personal library list.
Chapter 4, “Using Commands, Function Keys, and Light Pen or Cursor Selection,”
describes ISPF system commands, the function keys and their default assignments,
and the light pen and cursor select facilities.
Chapter 5, “Libraries and Data Sets,” describes how to allocate, create, and use
libraries and data sets.
Chapter 6, “Getting Ready to Run on MVS,” helps you prepare to use ISPF
data-element libraries.
Appendix A, “Installing the Client/Server Component,” provides information that
you need to know before you begin to install the ISPF Client/Server component
workstation software.
Appendix B, “Configuring Communications for the ISPF Client/Server” provides
information that you need for configuring your communications protocols so you
can use the ISPF Client/Server.
Appendix C, “Listing Formats,” describes and displays the kinds of listings you
can produce using ISPF. The sample listings shown are for illustration purposes
only. They are not intended to be exact replicas because printouts of ISPF listings
vary according to the kind of printer you are using.
Appendix D, “APL and TEXT Character Conversion,” describes how APL and
TEXT characters are converted by ISPF for internal storage.
Appendix E, “Abbreviations for Commands and Other Values,” lists commands,
field values, keywords/operands, and scroll amounts that can be abbreviated.
Appendix F, “Allocation Data Sets,” provides information on ALLOC commands
that ISPF issues based on ISPF libraries, data set names, list IDs, options, and
additional input libraries.
Appendix G, “ISRDDN Diagnostic Utility,” provides information about ISRDDN, a
program shipped with ISPF as a service aid.
Using LookAt to look up message explanations
LookAt is an online facility that lets you look up explanations for most of the
IBM® messages you encounter, as well as for some system abends and codes.
Using LookAt to find information is faster than a conventional search because in
most cases LookAt goes directly to the message explanation.
You can use LookAt from the following locations to find IBM message
explanations for z/OS® elements and features, z/VM®, VSE/ESA™, and Clusters
for AIX® and Linux:
v The Internet. You can access IBM message explanations directly from the LookAt
Web site at http://www.ibm.com/eserver/zseries/zos/bkserv/lookat/.
xii
z/OS V1R6.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol I
v Your z/OS TSO/E host system. You can install code on your z/OS or z/OS.e
systems to access IBM message explanations, using LookAt from a TSO/E
command line (for example, TSO/E prompt, ISPF, or z/OS UNIX® System
Services running OMVS).
v Your Microsoft® Windows® workstation. You can install code to access IBM
message explanations on the z/OS Collection (SK3T-4269), using LookAt from a
Microsoft Windows command prompt (also known as the DOS command line).
v Your wireless handheld device. You can use the LookAt Mobile Edition with a
handheld device that has wireless access and an Internet browser (for example,
Internet Explorer for Pocket PCs, Blazer, or Eudora for Palm OS, or Opera for
Linux handheld devices). Link to the LookAt Mobile Edition from the LookAt
Web site.
You can obtain code to install LookAt on your host system or Microsoft Windows
workstation from a disk on your z/OS Collection (SK3T-4269), or from the LookAt
Web site (click Download, and select the platform, release, collection, and location
that suit your needs). More information is available in the LOOKAT.ME files
available during the download process.
Preface
xiii
xiv
z/OS V1R6.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol I
Summary of Changes
z/OS V1R6.0 ISPF contains the following changes and enhancements:
v ISPF Product and Library changes
v ISPF Dialog Manager component changes (including DTL changes)
v ISPF PDF Component changes
v ISPF SCLM Component changes
v ISPF Client/Server Component changes
ISPF Product and Library changes
Changes to the ZENVIR variable. Characters 1 through 8 contain the product name
and sequence number, in the format ISPF x.y, where x.y indicates the version
number and release. Note that the x.y value is not necessarily the same as the
operating system version. For example, a value of ″ISPF 5.6″ represents ISPF for
z/OS Version 1 Release 6.0.
The ZOS390RL variable contains the level of the z/OS release running on your
system.
The ZISPFOS system variable contains the level of ISPF that is running as part of
the operating system release on your system. This might or might not match
ZOS390RL. For this release of ISPF, the variable contains ISPF for z/OS 01.06.00.
ISPF Dialog Manager component changes
The DM component of ISPF includes the following new functions and
enhancements:
v The new *REXX panel definition statement allows the inclusion of Rexx code
within a panel’s )INIT, )REINIT, or )PROC sections to perform arithmetic,
verification, transformation, translation, and formatting of dialog variables.
v Enhancements to ISPF File Tailoring:
– Added support for continuation of control statements.
– Increased maximum imbed levels from 3 to 15.
– Increased maximum select levels from 8 to 32.
– Increased the maximum number of parameters on a control statement from 31
to 63.
– Eliminated exclusive SPFEDIT enqueue on a skeleton member when
processing a skeleton.
– Improved skeleton processing by reading skeleton records into storage.
– Added support for the )DO ... )ENDDO control statements.
– Added support for the )IF ... THEN ... )ELSE control statements.
– Added )ITERATE and )LEAVE control words for use within )DO ... )ENDDO
loops.
– Added the )NOP control word, which can be used with a null )IF or )ELSE
statement.
– Added TBSCAN support to the )DOT control word.
v The restriction that Language Environment-enabled programming languages can
not be used for ISPF exits has been partially removed. Exits can now be written
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1980, 2004
xv
in languages that use the LE run-time environment, as long as all the dialogs
and service routines are LE-conforming. A mixture of LE-conforming main
dialog code and service routine code is not supported.
ISPF Configuration Utility changes:
v Added support for zero block size for dynamic allocation of the ISPLIST,
ISPLOG, ISPCTLx, ISPLSTx, and ISPWRKx data sets.
v Added support for specifying primary and secondary space for the ISPCTL0 and
ISPLSTx data sets.
v New keywords control what happens when an explicit member list request is
made for an empty PDS/E:
DISPLAY_EMPTY_MEMBER_LIST
DISPLAY_EMPTY_MEMBER_LIST_PATTERN
DISPLAY_EMPTY_MEMBER_LIST_FUNCTION
RESET_EMPTY_MEMBER_LIST_OPTIONS
Dialog Tag Language (DTL) changes
There are no changes to Dialog Tag Language (DTL) for this release.
ISPF PDF Component changes
The ISPF PDF component contains the following new functions and enhancements:
v The TBQUERY service has been enhanced to return information about TBSORT
and the last TBSARG issued against a table.
v The new QTABOPEN service allows an ISPF dialog to obtain a list of currently
open ISPF tables. The TBSTATS or TBQUERY service can then be used to obtain
more detailed information about each table.
v A new Edit primary command, COLS, displays a non-scrolling columns line in
Edit or View.
v A new Edit primary command and edit macro command, HIDE, removes the
excluded lines messages from the display. RESET HIDE restores the excluded
lines messages.
v The CUT Edit primary command and edit macro commands now support two
new flags: X specifies to cut only excluded lines to the clipboard. NX specifies to
cut only nonexcluded lines.
v The MODEL edit macro command now issues RC=4 if the model exceeds the
right hand margin of the data being edited.
v The VOLUME edit macro command is changed to permit return of the volume
serial where the original data set is stored.
v The CURSOR edit assignment statement has been changed as follows: if the
cursor is in the command area, the cursor value is column 0 of the first data line
on the panel.
v When saving a member list to a dataset using the SAVE primary command, the
new keyword LONG formats all dates in yyyy/mm/dd format for the member.
v Documentation has been added for the OVOLUME parameter on the LMQUERY
service.
ISPF SCLM Component changes
The ISPF SCLM component contains the following new functions and
enhancements:
xvi
z/OS V1R6.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol I
v For each of the FLMCMD services a new panel has been added, providing the
ability to select a service from a menu and then enter the service parameters in
an ISPF interface panel. These panels can also be called directly, by entering the
FLMCMD service command without parameters.
v The new Unit of Work utility allows you to use an ARCHDEF member as a
member list from which you can use the standard SCLM functions such as
select, edit, build, view build map, and promote. You can add your own
customized line commands to work with the Unit of Work member List.
v The new SCLM Explorer utility provides the ability to select any architecture
definition or part member and then navigate up or down the hierarchy of
related ARCHDEFs or parts.
ISPF Client/Server Component changes
The ISPF Client/Server Component enables a panel to be displayed unchanged
(except for panels with graphic areas) at a workstation using the native display
function of the operating system of the workstation. ISPF documents call this
″running in GUI mode.″
There are no changes to the ISPF Client/Server for this release.
ISPF Migration Considerations
If you are migrating to z/OS V1R6.0 from an earlier release of z/OS or from
OS/390 V2R10.0, no migration actions are needed. If you are migrating to z/OS
V1R6.0 from an earlier release of OS/390, follow the migration actions for OS/390
V2R10.0.
When migrating from one version of ISPF to another, you must reassemble and
relink the SCLM project definition.
Note
This book contains terminology, maintenance, and editorial changes. Technical
changes or additions to the text and illustrations are indicated by a vertical
line to the left of the change.
Starting with z/OS V1R2, you may notice changes in the style and structure
of some content in this book—for example, headings that use uppercase for
the first letter of initial words only, and procedures that have a different look
and format. The changes are ongoing improvements to the consistency and
retrievability of information in our books.
Summary of Changes
xvii
xviii
z/OS V1R6.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol I
What’s in the z/OS V1R6.0 ISPF library?
You can order the ISPF books using the numbers provided below.
z/OS V1R6.0 ISPF
Title
Order Number
z/OS V1R6.0 ISPF Dialog Tag Language Guide and Reference
SC34-4824–03
z/OS V1R6.0 ISPF Planning and Customizing
GC34-4814–03
z/OS V1R6.0 ISPF User’s Guide Volume I
SC34-4822–03
z/OS V1R6.0 ISPF User’s Guide Volume II
SC34-4823–03
z/OS V1R6.0 ISPF Services Guide
SC34-4819–03
z/OS V1R6.0 ISPF Dialog Developer’s Guide and Reference
SC34-4821–03
z/OS V1R6.0 ISPF Reference Summary
SC34-4816–03
z/OS V1R6.0 ISPF Edit and Edit Macros
SC34-4820–03
z/OS V1R6.0 ISPF Messages and Codes
SC34-4815–03
z/OS V1R6.0 ISPF Software Configuration and Library Manager Project
Manager’s and Developer’s Guide
SC34-4817–03
z/OS V1R6.0 ISPF Software Configuration and Library Manager Reference
SC34-4818–03
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1980, 2004
xix
xx
z/OS V1R6.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol I
Part 1. Introduction to ISPF
Chapter 1. Overview of ISPF . . . . . .
ISPF Components . . . . . . . . . . .
ISPF Functions . . . . . . . . . . . .
View, Browse, Edit, Edit Macros, and Models
Dialog Services . . . . . . . . . .
Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dialog Test, Foreground, and Batch . . . .
TSO Commands, CLISTs, and REXX EXECs .
Software Configuration and Library Manager
(SCLM) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Other IBM Program Development Products .
Online Tutorial . . . . . . . . . .
Supported Data Types . . . . . . . . .
Member Name Conventions . . . . . .
Running ISPF . . . . . . . . . . . .
Starting ISPF . . . . . . . . . . .
The Primary Option Menu panel . . . .
ISPF Primary Options . . . . . . .
Primary Option Menu Action Bar Choices
User Profiles . . . . . . . . . . .
Getting Help . . . . . . . . . . .
Ending an ISPF Function or ISPF . . . .
Exit Option (X) . . . . . . . . .
Jump Function . . . . . . . . .
. . 3
. . 3
. . 3
. . 4
. . 4
. . 4
. . 5
. . 5
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 5
. 5
. 5
. 5
. 6
. 7
. 7
. 8
. 9
. 10
. 10
. 11
. 11
. 12
. 12
Chapter 2. The ISPF User Interface . . . . . .
Some Terms You Should Know . . . . . . . .
Understanding ISPF Panels . . . . . . . . .
Panel Format . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Panel Types . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Entry Panels . . . . . . . . . .
Option Selection . . . . . . . . . . . .
Action Bars . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to Navigate in ISPF without Using
Action Bars . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to Navigate in ISPF Using the Action Bar
Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Point-and-Shoot Text Fields . . . . . . . .
Function Keys . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selection Fields . . . . . . . . . . . .
Entering Commands in ISPF . . . . . . . . .
Types of Commands . . . . . . . . . .
TSO Commands, CLISTs, and REXX EXECs
DM Component Commands . . . . . . .
PDF Component Primary and Line
Commands . . . . . . . . . . . .
National Language Support . . . . . . . .
ISPF Command Syntax Notation . . . . . .
Stacking Commands . . . . . . . . .
Dual Command Processing . . . . . . .
Line Command Fields . . . . . . . . .
PDF Component Line Commands . . . . .
Command Nesting . . . . . . . . . . .
Running in GUI mode . . . . . . . . . . .
Starting a GUI Session . . . . . . . . . .
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1980, 2004
13
13
14
14
15
15
16
16
17
17
17
20
20
21
21
22
22
22
23
23
23
24
24
24
25
25
25
26
What GUI Mode Looks Like . . . . . . . .
Sample Screens . . . . . . . . . . .
Switching Between GUI Mode and 3270 Mode .
Special characters or symbols . . . . . . .
ISPF GUI Support of TSO Line Mode Output and
Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Restrictions for the TSO GUI Line Mode
Support . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bi-directional Language Support . . . . . .
Shortcut Keys . . . . . . . . . . .
Modifications to Arabic OS/2 . . . . . .
Bi-directional File Transfer Limitations . . .
Ending a GUI Session . . . . . . . . . .
Closing the ISPF Client/Server Workstation
Agent Component . . . . . . . . . . .
Splitting the Screen Horizontally or Vertically . . .
The SPLIT Command . . . . . . . . . .
The SWAP Command . . . . . . . . . .
The SWITCH Command . . . . . . . . .
Rules for Splitting and Swapping 3270 and
GUI Screens . . . . . . . . . . . .
SWITCH Command Restrictions . . . . .
3290 Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 3. Using Personal Data Set Lists and
Library Lists. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Personal List Modes . . . . . . . . . . .
Personal Data Set Lists . . . . . . . . . .
Personal Library Lists . . . . . . . . . .
Reference Data Set List . . . . . . . . .
Reference Library List . . . . . . . . . .
How to Get a List of Your Personal Lists . . .
How to Create a Personal List . . . . . . .
Retrieving Data From Personal Lists . . . . .
Using Personal Lists to Create Customized
DSLIST Displays. . . . . . . . . . . .
Personal Data Set List Panel . . . . . . . .
Personal Data Set List Panel Action Bar
Choices . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Personal Data Set List Panel Fields . . . .
Personal Data Set Lists Panel . . . . . . .
Personal Data Set Lists Panel Action Bar
Choices . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Personal Data Set Lists Panel Fields . . . .
Shared Personal Lists . . . . . . . . . . .
Name Retrieval with the NRETRIEV command . .
SCLM Considerations for NRETRIEV . . . . .
SCLM Restrictions . . . . . . . . . .
Stack Management for SCLM . . . . . .
Command Interface (Fast Path) to the Personal List
Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Function Keys with Personal Lists . . . .
Example of an ISPF Panel That Uses a Referral List
Example of an ISPF Panel That Enables NRETRIEV
28
33
37
37
39
40
42
42
43
43
44
44
44
45
45
48
48
48
49
51
52
53
54
54
54
55
55
56
56
57
57
59
60
60
61
62
63
64
64
64
65
66
66
69
1
Chapter 4. Using Commands, Function Keys,
and Light Pen or Cursor Selection . . . . . . 71
ISPF System Commands . . . . . . . . . . 72
Using the RETRIEVE, RETF, and RETP
Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
RETRIEVE Command . . . . . . . . . 86
RETF Command . . . . . . . . . . . 88
RETP Command . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Using the RETURN Command . . . . . . . 89
Using the Jump Function . . . . . . . . . 90
Using the Scrolling Commands . . . . . . . 91
Using the EXPAND Command . . . . . . . 92
Using Command Tables to Define Commands . . 93
Command Table Format . . . . . . . . 93
Customizing the ISPCMDS Command Table
94
SELECT Action Commands Temporarily Invoke a
New Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Assigning Command Aliases . . . . . . . 96
Overriding System Commands . . . . . . . 97
Passing Commands to a Dialog Function . . . 98
Specifying Command Actions Dynamically . . . 99
Using a Function Key . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Defining Function Key Values . . . . . . . 101
Changing the Format of the Function Key Area 101
Saving Function Key Definitions . . . . . . 104
Using the Light Pen and Cursor-Select Key . . 104
How Program Access (PA) Keys Affect ISPF
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
AUTOTYPE - Automatic Data Set Name and
Member Name Completion . . . . . . . . . 106
How to Use AUTOTYPE . . . . . . . . 107
Rules for Specifying the ’Other Data Set Name’
Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Rules for Library Fields - Project, Group, Type,
Member . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Cursor Position Sensitivity . . . . . . . . 108
Restrictions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Enabling Applications to Use AUTOTYPE . . . 108
Chapter 5. Libraries and Data Sets . . . . .
Naming ISPF Libraries and Data Sets . . . . .
ISPF Library Names . . . . . . . . . .
Standard ISPF Naming Conventions . . . .
Other Partitioned or Sequential Data Set Names
Volume Serials . . . . . . . . . . . .
Library Concatenation . . . . . . . . . .
Concatenation during Editing . . . . . . .
Concatenation during Language Processing . .
Using Member Selection Lists . . . . . . . .
Displaying Member Lists . . . . . . . .
Ending Member Lists . . . . . . . . . .
ISPF Member Statistics . . . . . . . . .
Member List Display Panel Action Bar . . .
Member List Display Panel Fields . . . .
Load Module Library Member Statistics . . .
Member Selection List Commands . . . . .
Primary Commands . . . . . . . . .
Line Commands . . . . . . . . . .
Updating a Member List . . . . . . .
Member List Positioning . . . . . . . .
Data Set Passwords . . . . . . . . . . .
2
z/OS V1R6.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol I
111
111
111
111
112
113
114
115
115
116
117
118
118
119
122
123
124
125
130
132
133
134
Format Definitions . . . . . . . . . . .
Mixed Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Partitioned Data Set Extended (PDSE) . . . . .
Packed Data Sets . . . . . . . . . . . .
List and Log Data Sets . . . . . . . . . .
List Data Set. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Log Data Set . . . . . . . . . . . .
Processing the Log and List Data Sets . . . .
How to Specify Log and List Data Set
Processing Options . . . . . . . . . .
Processing the Log and List Data Sets During an
ISPF Session . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Conditions for Using the LOG and LIST
Commands . . . . . . . . . . . .
Log and List Data Set Processing at the End of a
Session . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Set Processing Options . . . . . . .
Editing the PRINTDS Command . . . . .
Foreground and Batch Output Listings . . . . .
Other Temporary Data Sets . . . . . . . . .
Job Statement Information . . . . . . . . .
Running a Sample ISPF Session . . . . . . .
134
135
135
136
136
136
137
137
Chapter 6. Getting Ready to Run on MVS . . .
Setting Up ISPF Libraries . . . . . . . . .
Allocating Required ISPF Libraries . . . . . .
Allocating Optional Table and File Tailoring ISPF
Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Allocating Optional Image ISPF Library . . . .
Allocating CLIST, REXX, and Program Libraries
Allocating DBCS Libraries . . . . . . . . .
Selecting the National Language for ISPF Sessions
149
149
149
137
137
139
139
140
141
142
142
143
143
152
152
153
153
154
Chapter 1. Overview of ISPF
ISPF is a multifaceted development tool set for the z/OS operating system. Since
1975, MVS programmers have used ISPF for host-based application development
productivity. ISPF forms the basis of many TSO and CMS applications and
provides extensive programmer-oriented facilities as well.
ISPF Components
ISPF helps programmers develop interactive applications called dialogs. Dialogs are
interactive because ISPF uses them to communicate with terminal users through a
series of panels while the users do application development tasks.
ISPF panels:
v Provide access to ISPF functions (menus)
v Request information (data entry panels)
v Provide information (scrollable data displays).
These are the main components of ISPF:
v Dialog Manager (DM): The Dialog Manager provides services to dialogs and end
users. These include display, variable services, input and output, user and
application profiles, table management, system interface services, dialog testing
and debugging aids, and other services.
v Program Development Facility (PDF): The Program Development Facility
provides services to assist the dialog or application developer. These include the
edit and browse functions, data set and catalog utilities, TSO or CMS command
interfaces, and data set search and compare functions.
v Software Configuration Library Manager (SCLM): The Software Configuration
and Library Manager facility provides library management capabilities such as
Versioning, Auditing, and Promotion. It also provides configuration management
capabilities to track how all of the pieces of an application fit together - not just
source, but objects, loads, test cases, documentation and other items. The Build
function tracks and invokes the necessary compilers, assemblers and linkage
editors.
v Client/Server component: The Client/Server component allows the users of ISPF
applications to use a workstation running OS/2®, Windows, or UNIX to display
the panels of an ISPF application. It does this using the Graphical User Interface
of the workstation. Because of this, there is no requirement to change your
existing ISPF applications to run in a GUI environment.
The following sections describe the functions provided by the ISPF licensed
program.
ISPF Functions
ISPF can be used in the following ways:
v Managers can use ISPF Edit, SCRIPT/VS, and the Hardcopy utility or another
print utility provided by their installation to prepare memos.
v Data processing administrators and system programmers can use ISPF to:
– Monitor and control program libraries
– Communicate with MVS through TSO commands, CLISTs, or REXX EXECs.
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1980, 2004
3
ISPF Functions
v Programmers can use ISPF to develop a batch, interactive, or any other type of
program and its documentation.
v Terminal users can call dialogs that use Dialog Manager (DM) component and
Program Development Facility (PDF) component dialog services to do the work
of the application.
The View, Browse, and Edit functions, a wide range of utilities, foreground and
batch compilers, program library control, and other facilities are available to help
you develop ISPF dialogs.
View, Browse, Edit, Edit Macros, and Models
The View, Browse, and Edit functions allow you to look at the contents of a dialog.
While editing a dialog, you can change it by adding or deleting lines, typing over
the existing source code, or copying lines from another dialog to the one being
edited.
To enhance the existing Edit function, you can write edit macros. Edit macros
allow you to combine several often-used functions so that you do not have to call
each function separately. You can write initial edit macros that are automatically
run when the Edit option is selected. Other uses for edit macros include:
v Overriding Edit commands
v Calling DM and PDF component dialog services
v Accessing cursor position and data location.
Also, ISPF provides online models that you can insert into the dialog. A model is an
example of a service call, panel format, table format, or message that contains the
proper syntax and all the available parameters for the programming language
being used. Since these models are online, they can be called directly into the
member being edited.
Refer to ISPF Edit and Edit Macros for more information.
Dialog Services
The PDF component provides View, Browse, Edit, and library access services that
can be combined in a dialog with any of the ISPF services. The library access
services carry out functions involving members of a programming library. These
functions include adding, finding, and deleting members, and displaying member
lists.
The PDF component includes a separate edit model of each service call for each
programming language ISPF supports: CLIST, COBOL, EXEC, FORTRAN, PL/I,
Pascal, C, and REXX. See ISPF Services Guide for complete information about the
PDF component dialog services.
Note: For information about library access services that apply to the Software
Configuration and Library Manager (SCLM), refer to the ISPF Software
Configuration and Library Manager (SCLM) Developer’s and Project Manager’s
Guide.
Utilities
ISPF provides a wide range of utilities. Utilities enable you to:
v Display and print library and data set member lists
v Reset statistics for ISPF library members
v Define commands to be used with specific dialogs
4
z/OS V1R6.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol I
ISPF Functions
v Compare data sets and search for strings of data
v Move, copy, and print library and data set members.
Dialog Test, Foreground, and Batch
ISPF provides special facilities for testing dialogs. The Dialog Test option allows
testing of individual dialog elements and complete dialogs.
After a program has been developed, you can either assemble it or compile and
link it using either the Foreground or Batch option. The Foreground option allows
you to watch the program being compiled. The Batch option frees the terminal,
which helps when you compile a long program. If errors occur, you can use the
debugging capabilities of the Dialog Test facility to correct them.
TSO Commands, CLISTs, and REXX EXECs
While using ISPF, you can call TSO commands, CLISTs, or REXX EXECs by:
v Prefixing a command with TSO and entering it from any command line
v Selecting the Command option and entering the TSO command, CLIST, or REXX
EXEC on the panel
v Entering a TSO command, CLIST, or REXX EXEC in the Line Command field on
a data set list display or a member list display.
Software Configuration and Library Manager (SCLM)
To help you maintain different levels or versions of a library member, ISPF
includes the Software Configuration and Library Manager (SCLM). SCLM is a tool
that helps you develop complex software applications. Throughout the
development cycle, SCLM automatically controls, maintains, and tracks all of the
software components of the application. And you can lock the version being edited
in a private library and then promote it. Refer to ISPF Software Configuration and
Library Manager (SCLM) Developer’s and Project Manager’s Guide for more
information.
Other IBM Program Development Products
You might want to call another IBM program development product while using
ISPF. The IBM Products option allows you to call the Tivoli Information
Management, COBOL Structuring Facility, and Screen Definition Facility licensed
programs without leaving ISPF.
Online Tutorial
Learning to use ISPF is made easier by the online help and tutorial facilities, which
are available while using ISPF.
For example, if you need help filling in the data requested by an ISPF utility, you
can use the tutorial to help you understand the data entry requirements for that
utility.
Supported Data Types
ISPF supports partitioned (PDS), sequential (SEQ), and partitioned extended
(PDSE) data sets. These data sets can be used in any of the ISPF options, such as
Edit and Browse. ISPF does not support the following:
v VSAM data sets (except for creating, obtaining data set information, and
deleting).
Chapter 1. Overview of ISPF
5
Supported Data Types
Note: VSAM data sets are supported for Edit, Browse, and View if the ISPF
Configuration table has been customized to enable the support.
v Record format variable block spanned (VBS) data sets
v Direct access data sets
Tape data sets
Multivolume data sets for the ISRLEMX program, SCLM, and File Tailoring
Generation data group (GDG) base data sets
Deletion of data sets allocated with an esoteric device type
Member aliases
PDSEs as the ISPF control file
Unmovable data sets under the ISPF Move/Copy utility (option 3.3) or using the
LMMOVE or LMCOPY service
v Data sets allocated with the BUFNO parameter (ISPF handles its own buffering)
v Browse for packed multivolume data sets.
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
ISPF requires exclusive enqueues on data sets for many of its functions. If a data
set is allocated as SHAREd to a user and then is operated on by one of these
functions, the allocation will be converted to OLD by MVS dynamic allocation.
This allocation of OLD may remain after ISPF frees its enqueue. This is a
restriction of the MVS operating system.
Member Name Conventions
ISPF allows you to create member names that follow this ISPF naming convention:
1st character
Alphabetic or special (@ # $)
2nd–8th characters
Alphabetic, numeric, or special (@ # $)
Note: Special characters are as defined in the U.S. English code page (037):
@ (X’7C’), # (X’7B’), $ (X’5B’)
All member names created within ISPF are converted to uppercase. If you create
members outside of ISPF that do not meet these conventions, they are displayed in
ISPF member lists and can be selected from those lists. These member names can
also be specified for the Browse service with the exception of member names
containing lowercase alphabetics. (ISPF converts the member name to uppercase
before searching for the member and therefore cannot process a lowercase
member.) Member names not meeting the ISPF naming convention are not
supported for the other ISPF services.
Note: ISPF does not support using option M (member list) from a data set list and
then selecting E to edit a member whose name contains lowercase letters.
ISPF uses the Edit service in this case, and its services do not support
lowercase member names.
6
z/OS V1R6.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol I
Running ISPF
Running ISPF
As an interactive dialog, ISPF communicates with you through panels and
messages. Ordinarily, the first panel you see when you enter the ISPF command is
the ISPF Primary Option Menu, shown in Figure 1 on page 8. Panels display data,
selection lists, and data-entry fields, such as a data set name or an ISPF command.
ISPF responds interactively to the information or command you enter by
displaying another panel, displaying a message, or carrying out a command. For
more information about how panels and messages are displayed, see
“Understanding ISPF Panels” on page 14.
One helpful aspect of your interaction with ISPF is the online tutorial. If you need
information about using the online tutorial, see the section on the ISPF Tutorial
Panels in ISPF Dialog Developer’s Guide and Reference.
Starting ISPF
To start ISPF:
1. Log on to TSO.
2. When the READY prompt appears, type ISPF or PDF and press Enter.
If your installation has established an alias for ISPF, such as SPF, you can enter
that instead.
The ISPF and PDF commands are aliases of ISPF module ISRPCP. When you run
ISRPCP or one of its aliases with no parameters, ISPF is started through this
command:
ISPSTART PANEL(default_primary_panel) NEWAPPL(ISR)
The default primary panel is usually ISR@PRIM, the ISPF Primary Option Menu
(see Figure 1 on page 8).
You can specify any of the ISPSTART parameters when invoking ISPF, PDF, or
ISRPCP. However, if you do this you must ensure that you specify all the
parameters that ISPSTART needs to run your application in the correct
environment. This is because only those parameters you specify are passed to
ISPSTART. For example, if you specify:
ISPF NEWAPPL(ABC)
ISPF is invoked with this command:
ISPSTART NEWAPPL(ABC)
Note that in this case ISPF does not pass PANEL(ISR@PRIM), part of its normal
default string, to ISPSTART. Because the ISPSTART command generated does not
contain a PANEL(...), PGM(...) or CMD(...) keyword, there is no primary panel to
display.
For information about the syntax and options for ISPSTART, including the rules for
specifying or overriding the default primary panel, refer to the ISPF Dialog
Developer’s Guide and Reference.
Chapter 1. Overview of ISPF
7
Running ISPF
The Primary Option Menu panel
Figure 1 shows the first panel, the ISPF Primary Option Menu, with the license
information.
Menu Utilities Compilers Options Status Help
──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
ISPF Primary Option Menu
0 Settings
Terminal and user parameters
User ID . : USERID
1 View
Display source data or listings
Time. . . : 11:38
2 Edit
Create or change source data
Terminal. : 3278
3 Utilities
Perform utility functions
Screen. . : 1
4 Foreground
Interactive language processing
Language. : ENGLISH
5 Batch
Submit job for language processing
Appl ID . : ISR
6 Command
Enter TSO or Workstation commands
TSO logon : ISPF
7 Dialog Test Perform dialog testing
TSO prefix: USERID
9 IBM Products IBM program development products
System ID : MVS8
┌──────────────────────────────────────────────┐ r
MVS acct. : IBMGSA
│ Licensed Materials - Property of IBM
│
Release . : ISPF 5.5
│ 5694-A01 (C) Copyright IBM Corp. 1980, 2003. │
│
All rights reserved.
│ s
│ US Government Users Restricted Rights │
│ Use, duplication or disclosure restricted
│
│ by GSA ADP Schedule Contract with IBM Corp. │
└──────────────────────────────────────────────┘
Option ===>
F1=Help
F2=Split
F3=Exit
F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap
F10=Actions F12=Cancel
Figure 1. ISPF Primary Option Menu (ISR@PRIM) with license information
Press the Enter key to dismiss the license information. The full Primary Option
Menu is displayed.
Menu Utilities Compilers Options Status Help
──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
ISPF Primary Option Menu
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
9
10
11
Settings
View
Edit
Utilities
Foreground
Batch
Command
Dialog Test
IBM Products
SCLM
Workplace
Terminal and user parameters
Display source data or listings
Create or change source data
Perform utility functions
Interactive language processing
Submit job for language processing
Enter TSO or Workstation commands
Perform dialog testing
IBM program development products
SW Configuration Library Manager
ISPF Object/Action Workplace
User ID . :
Time. . . :
Terminal. :
Screen. . :
Language. :
Appl ID . :
TSO logon :
TSO prefix:
System ID :
MVS acct. :
Release . :
USERID
11:49
3278
1
ENGLISH
ISR
ISPF
USERID
MVS8
IBMGSA
ISPF 5.5
Enter X to Terminate using Log/List defaults
Option ===>
F1=Help
F2=Split
F10=Actions F12=Cancel
F3=Exit
F7=Backward F8=Forward
Figure 2. ISPF Primary Option Menu (ISR@PRIM)
8
z/OS V1R6.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol I
F9=Swap
Running ISPF
ISPF Primary Options
When you select one of these options, ISPF displays the selected panel. These
options are described in detail in the ISPF User’s Guide Volume II. Brief descriptions
follow:
Option Description
0
Settings displays and changes selected ISPF parameters, such as terminal
characteristics and function keys. See the Settings (Option 0) chapter of
the ISPF User’s Guide Volume II for more information.
1
View displays data using the View or Browse function. You can use View
or Browse to look at (but not change) large data sets such as compiler
listings. You can scroll the data up, down, left, or right. If you are using
Browse, a FIND command, entered on the command line, allows you to
search the data for a character string. If you are using View, you can use
all the commands and macros available to you in the Edit function. See the
View (Option 1) chapter of the ISPF User’s Guide Volume II for more
information.
2
Edit allows you to create or change source data such as program code and
documentation using the ISPF full-screen editor. You can scroll the data up,
down, left, or right. You can change the data by using Edit line commands,
which are entered directly on a line number, and primary commands, which
are entered on the command line. See the Edit (Option 2) chapter of the
ISPF User’s Guide Volume II, and refer to ISPF Edit and Edit Macros for more
information.
3
Utilities perform library and data set maintenance tasks, such as moving
or copying library or data set members, displaying or printing data set
names and volume table of contents (VTOC) information, comparing data
sets, and searching for strings of data. See the Utilities (Option 3) chapter
of the ISPF User’s Guide Volume II for more information.
4
Foreground calls IBM language processing programs in the foreground.
See the Foreground (Option 4) chapter of the ISPF User’s Guide Volume II
for more information.
5
Batch calls IBM language processing programs as batch jobs. ISPF
generates Job Control Language (JCL) based on information you enter and
submits the job for processing. See the Batch (Option 5) chapter of the ISPF
User’s Guide Volume II for more information.
6
Command calls TSO commands, CLISTs, or REXX EXECs under ISPF. See
the Command (Option 6) chapter of the ISPF User’s Guide Volume II for
more information.
7
Dialog Test tests individual ISPF dialog components, such as panels,
messages, and dialog functions (programs, commands, menus). See the
Dialog Test (Option 7) chapter of the ISPF User’s Guide Volume II for more
information.
9
IBM Products allows you to select other installed IBM program
development products on your system. Products supported are:
v Tivoli Information Management
v COBOL Structuring Facility foreground dialog (COBOL/SF)
v Screen Definition Facility II (SDF II) licensed program
v Screen Definition Facility II-P (SDF II-P) licensed program.
See the IBM Products (Option 9) chapter of the ISPF User’s Guide Volume II
for more information.
Chapter 1. Overview of ISPF
9
Running ISPF
10
SCLM controls, maintains, and tracks all of the software components of an
application. See the SCLM (Option 10) chapter of the ISPF User’s Guide
Volume II, and refer to ISPF Software Configuration and Library Manager
(SCLM) Developer’s and Project Manager’s Guide for more information.
11
Workplace gives you access to the ISPF Workplace, which combines many
of the ISPF functions onto one object-action panel. See the ISPF
Object/Action Workplace (Option 11) chapter of the ISPF User’s Guide
Volume II for more information.
X
EXIT leaves ISPF using the log and list defaults. You can change these
defaults from the Log/List pull-down on the ISPF Settings panel action
bar.
Primary Option Menu Action Bar Choices
The Primary Option Menu action bar choices function as follows:
Menu This choice is available from most panels within ISPF. It displays many of
the options listed on the Primary Option Menu panel. See the chapter on
the Primary Option Menu in the ISPF User’s Guide Volume II for details on
each choice.
Utilities
This choice is available from most panels within ISPF. It displays the
options listed on the Utility Selection panel (Option 3). See the chapter on
the Primary Option Menu in the ISPF User’s Guide Volume II for details on
each choice.
Compilers
The Compilers pull-down provides access to the foreground and
background compilers listed under options 4 and 5, as well as the ISPPREP
(Preprocessed Panel) utility and the ISPDTLC (Dialog Tag Language
Conversion) utility.
Options
The Options pull-down provides access to many ISPF settings, including
CUA attributes and colors, keylists, and point-and-shoot fields, and the
Dialog Test Application ID pop-up. See the chapter on Settings (Option 0)
in the ISPF User’s Guide Volume II for details on each choice.
Status The Status pull-down enables you to control what is displayed in the
status area of the Primary Option Menu.
Note: The current setting is shown as an unavailable choice. That is, in
non-GUI mode it is colored blue (the default) with an asterisk as the
first digit of the selection number. In GUI mode, the choice is grayed.
See the section about the status area on the Primary Option Menu in the
ISPF User’s Guide Volume II for more information about using these choices
to tailor the status area.
Help
The Help pull-down provides access to the online help and tutorial topics
for the main ISPF options.
User Profiles
ISPF stores information in your user profile. This allows ISPF to insert a value in
panel input fields by using the values you last entered on either the same panel or
a similar type of panel. Sometimes default values are provided if you have not
specified otherwise. Information maintained in your user profile includes:
10
z/OS V1R6.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol I
Running ISPF
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
Project name, group names, and type
Job statement information 1
SYSOUT class for printed output 1
Defaults for list and log allocation and processing
Terminal characteristics and function key definitions
Edit profiles, including mask, tabs, and bounds
Current scroll amount for Browse, Edit, Data Set List, and member lists
1
v Processing options for each of the language processors
v Data set allocation/information parameters.
ISPF maintains this information automatically from one session to another. If you
are a new user, you have to enter certain information the first time. But then, you
simply review the information and make whatever changes you want before
proceeding.
ISPF maintains sets of job statements for:
v JCL for printing the Log and List data sets
v The Hardcopy utility (3.6)
v The Outlist utility (3.8)
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
The SuperC utility (3.12)
The SuperCE utility (3.13)
The Foreground Print Options panel (option 4, excluding SCRIPT/VS)
The Batch option (5)
The SCLM option (10)
SCRIPT/VS draft output (4.9)
SCRIPT/VS final output (4.9)
v Ending ISPF
Thus, you can provide different job statement parameters for each of these
functions. For more information, see “Job Statement Information” on page 143.
Getting Help
The HELP command (F1/13) shows you general information about an ISPF system
command, ISPF option, or panel, or offers more information about a message that
has been displayed in the upper-right corner of the screen.
For short messages, HELP displays a one-line explanation. To get further
information, enter the HELP command a second time for the appropriate section of
the tutorial. Long messages display (by default) in a pop-up window. Enter END
(F3/15) or RETURN (F4/16) to return to the screen that you were viewing when
you entered the HELP command.
Ending an ISPF Function or ISPF
To end an ISPF function without ending ISPF, enter END or RETURN.
1. This information is maintained separately for SCLM.
Chapter 1. Overview of ISPF
11
Running ISPF
Notes:
1. If you are using the Hardcopy utility (option 3.6) or the Batch option (option 5),
entering END or RETURN submits your job for processing. Type CANCEL (or
press F12) to leave the Hardcopy utility without submitting a job.
2. If a SuperC or Search-For member list is displayed, END processes any
members you have selected. Enter CANCEL or RETURN to leave one of these
member lists without processing your selections.
To end ISPF from the ISPF Primary Option Menu, you can use the:
v EXIT command (F3)
v END command
v RETURN command
v Exit option (X).
If the display screen is split, taking one of the actions listed above ends ISPF on
the active logical screen only. Refer to ISPF Dialog Developer’s Guide and Reference
for more information.
Exit Option (X)
The Exit option ends ISPF using any defaults for processing log and list data sets
that you have specified using the Log/List pull-down on the ISPF Settings panel
action bar. If you have not specified any defaults and if a log or list data set has
been generated, the Exit option displays the Specify Disposition of Log and List
Data Sets panel.
Jump Function
If you are not in split-screen mode (see “Splitting the Screen Horizontally or
Vertically” on page 44), you can use the jump function to immediately leave ISPF
from any panel by entering =X. There are two exceptions: If you are using any of
the Dialog Test options (7.1–7.T) or the SCLM options (10.1–10.6), entering =X
returns you to the ISPF Primary Option Menu. If you are at the Dialog Test or
SCLM Primary Option Menu, enter either X or =X to return to the ISPF Primary
Option Menu, then enter X or =X to end ISPF.
12
z/OS V1R6.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol I
Chapter 2. The ISPF User Interface
ISPF provides an interface based on panels and action bars, and exploits many of
the usability features of Common User Access® (CUA®) interfaces. Refer to
Object-Oriented Interface Design: IBM Common User Access Guidelines for additional
information.
Action bars give you an additional way to move around in the product, as well as
the ability to nest commands. Command nesting allows you to suspend an activity
while you perform a new one rather than having to end a function to perform
another function.
This chapter primarily explains the panel structure, the action bar-driven interface
and the use of ISPF’s graphical user interface (GUI).
Some Terms You Should Know
The following terms are used in this document:
action bar
The area at the top of an ISPF panel that contains choices that give you
access to actions available on that panel. When you select an action bar
choice, ISPF displays a pull-down menu.
pull-down menu
A list of numbered choices extending from the selection you made on the
action bar. The action bar selection is highlighted; for example, Utilities in
Figure 5 on page 18 appears highlighted on your screen. You can select an
action either by typing in its number and pressing Enter or by selecting the
action with your cursor. ISPF displays the requested panel. If your choice
contains an ellipsis (...), ISPF displays a pop-up window. When you exit this
panel or pop-up, ISPF closes the pull-down and returns you to the panel
from which you made the initial action bar selection.
ellipsis
Three dots that follow a pull-down choice. When you select a choice that
contains an ellipsis, ISPF displays a pop-up window.
pop-up window
A bordered temporary window that displays over another panel.
modal pop-up window
A type of window that requires you to interact with the panel in the
pop-up before continuing. This includes cancelling the window or
supplying information requested.
modeless pop-up window
A type of window that allows you to interact with the dialog that
produced the pop-up before interacting with the pop-up itself.
point-and-shoot text
Text on a screen that is cursor-sensitive. See “Point-and-Shoot Text Fields”
on page 20 for more information.
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1980, 2004
13
The ISPF User Interface
push button
A rectangle with text inside. Push buttons are used in windows for actions
that occur immediately when the push button is selected (available only
when you are running in GUI mode).
function key
In previous releases of ISPF, a programmed function (PF) key. This is a
change in terminology only.
select
In conjunction with point-and-shoot text fields and action bar choices, this
means moving the cursor to a field and simulating Enter.
mnemonics
Action bar choices can be defined with a underscored letter in the action
bar choice text. In host mode you can access the action bar choice with the
ACTIONS command and parameter ’x’, where ’x’ is the underscored letter
in the action bar choice text. In GUI mode you can use a hot key to access a
choice on the action bar; that is, you can press the ALT key in combination
with the letter that is underscored in the action bar choice text.
Understanding ISPF Panels
A panel is a predefined display image that you see on a display screen. ISPF
formats all panels to fit on a 24-line by 80-character screen. On a 3278 Model 3 or
4, data that you can scroll occupies the full length of the screen (32 or 43 lines). On
a 3278 Model 5, ISPF normally displays information in default mode; that is, 24 lines
by 80 characters, with the same size characters as other models. ″Browse″ and
″Edit″ data that is wider than 80 characters is displayed with the smaller native
mode characters, that is, up to 132 per line. You can use the Settings option (0) to
override the automatic switching of modes.
Panel Format
Figure 3 shows how ISPF formats the first three and last few lines of each display:
Action Bar
───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Title
Short Message
..
.
Long Message
Option ===>
F1=Help
F2=Split
F3=Exit
Scroll ===>
F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap
Figure 3. Panel Format
Note: The Panel display CUA mode field on the ISPF Settings panel determines
where the Command or Option line and long messages are displayed. The
default setting selects Panel display CUA mode, which causes the
Command or Option line to be displayed on the bottom of the panel. The
default setting also selects Long message in pop-up, which causes long
messages to be displayed in a pop-up window directly above the Command
or Option line. To display the command or option line and long messages at
the top of the panel, select option 0, deselect the Panel display CUA mode
field, and deselect the Command line at bottom field. Refer to ISPF Dialog
Developer’s Guide and Reference if you need more information about the Panel
display CUA mode and Command line placement fields.
14
z/OS V1R6.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol I
Understanding ISPF Panels
The fields on Figure 3 on page 14 function as follows:
Action Bar
The action bar provides access to pull-down menus that give you a new
and faster way to move around in the product as well as access to
command stacking. See Figure 5 on page 18 for more information about
using the action bar.
Title
Identifies the function being carried out and, where appropriate, the library
or data set information.
Short Message
Shows:
v Current line for Browse, and column positions for View, Browse, and
Edit.
v Current row position in a table display if the short message area is not
overlaid by a function-requested message.
v Successful completion of a processing function.
v Error conditions (with an audible alarm, if one is installed). Refer to
ISPF Dialog Developer’s Guide and Reference for information about coding
an alarm.
Command/Option
Allows you to enter a command or, on a menu, to enter either a command
or an option.
Scroll Indicates the scroll amount (if scrolling applies). You can type over it to
change it. The valid scroll amounts are 0–9999, PAGE, HALF, MAX, CSR,
and DATA.
Long Message
Displays an explanation of error conditions in a pop-up window when you
enter the HELP command (see “Getting Help” on page 11). On some
displays, data may be overlaid temporarily by a long message.
Function Keys
Displays settings for the function keys. These settings are controlled
through the Function keys pull-down on the action bar on the ISPF
Settings panel.
Panel Types
When using ISPF, you see three basic types of panels:
v Menus (selection panels)
v Data-entry panels
v Scrollable data displays.
Menus
A menu, or selection panel, allows you to type a number or letter in the Option
field and press Enter to select one of the listed items. The number or letter can be
typed in either uppercase or lowercase. Allowable numbers and letters are shown
in high intensity. You can also enter ISPF commands. See Figure 4 on page 16 for
an example of a menu.
Note: If the word BLANK or blank is listed, leave the Option field blank and press
Enter to select that option. Do not type the word blank.
Chapter 2. The ISPF User Interface
15
Understanding ISPF Panels
1 Menu Utilities Compilers Options Status Help
──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
ISPF Primary Option Menu
2
0 Settings
Terminal and user parameters
User ID . : USERID
1 View
Display source data or listings
Time. . . : 13:13
2 Edit
Create or change source data
Terminal. : 3278
3 Utilities
Perform utility functions
Screen. . : 1
4 Foreground
Interactive language processing
Language. : ENGLISH
5 Batch
Submit job for language processing
Appl ID . : ISR
6 Command
Enter TSO or Workstation commands
TSO logon : ISPF
7 Dialog Test Perform dialog testing
TSO prefix: USERID
9 IBM Products IBM program development products
System ID : MVS8
10 SCLM
SW Configuration Library Manager
MVS acct. : IBMGSA
11 Workplace
ISPF Object/Action Workplace
Release . : ISPF 5.5
12 OS/390 System OS/390 system programmer applications
13 OS/390 User OS/390 user applications
14 IBMGSA
IBMGSA Development and Service Apps
P PDF Tools
PDF development tools
S SDSF
Spool Display and Search Facility
Option ===>
3 F1=Help
F2=Split
F10=Actions F12=Cancel
F3=Exit
F7=Backward F8=Forward
F9=Swap
1
Action bar. You can select any of the action bar choices and display a pull-down.
2
Options Menu. The fields in this column are point-and-shoot text fields.
3
Function Key bar. Displays the Function Keys that are active on the current panel.
Figure 4. Primary Option Menu showing key features
Data Entry Panels
A data-entry panel is a panel on which you specify information, such as data set
names, job statement parameters, and language processing options. If you do not
enter a required value or if you enter inconsistent values, ISPF prompts you with a
message.
Some data-entry fields retain their previous values. If so, the next time you use the
panel, you do not have to type them again. Just press Enter. If you do not want
those values, type over them and then press Enter.
The retained values come from your user profile, which ISPF automatically builds
and maintains across sessions. See “User Profiles” on page 10 for more information
about user profiles.
Edit modes and defaults are also maintained in the Edit portion of your user
profile. Refer to ISPF Edit and Edit Macros for more information.
Option Selection
You can select an ISPF option three ways:
v Select a choice from one of the pull-downs on the action bar. See Figure 5 on
page 18 for more information.
v Select one of the point-and-shoot fields. See “Point-and-Shoot Text Fields” on
page 20 for more information.
16
z/OS V1R6.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol I
Understanding ISPF Panels
v Type an option number on the Option line and press Enter.
Many options have a secondary list of options. To bypass the second menu, type
two selections, separating them with a period, on the ISPF Primary Option Menu.
For example, entering 3.1 on the ISPF Primary Option Menu is the same as
entering 3 on the ISPF Primary Option Menu and 1 on the Utility Selection Panel.
An even faster way to select an option is to bypass both the ISPF Primary Option
Menu and the secondary menus. To do this, include your options in the ISPF (or
alias) command. For example:
ISPF 2
To go directly to the Edit option.
ISPF 3.1
To go directly to the Library utility (3.1).
Action Bars
Action bars give you another way to move through ISPF. Most ISPF panels have
action bars at the top; the choices appear on the screen in white by default. Many
panels also have point-and-shoot text fields, which appear in turquoise by default.
The panel shown in Figure 4 on page 16 has both.
How to Navigate in ISPF without Using Action Bars
If you use a non-programmable terminal to access ISPF and you do not want to
take advantage of the command nesting function, you can make selections the
same way you always have; by typing a selection number and pressing Enter.
How to Navigate in ISPF Using the Action Bar Interface
If the cursor is located somewhere on the panel, there are several ways to move it
to the action bar:
v Use the cursor movement keys to manually place the cursor on an action bar
choice.
v Type ACTIONS on the command line and press Enter to move the cursor to the
first action bar choice.
v Press F10 (Actions) or the Home key to move the cursor to the first action bar
choice.
If mnemonics are defined for action bar choices, you can:
– In 3270 mode, on the command line, type ACTIONS and the mnemonic letter
that corresponds to an underscored letter in the action bar choice text. This
results in the display of the pull-down menu for that action bar choice.
– In 3270 mode, on the command line enter the mnemonic letter that
corresponds to an underscored letter in the action bar choice text, and press
the function key assigned to the ACTIONS command. This results in the
display of the pull-down menu for that action bar choice.
– In GUI mode, you can use a hot key to access a choice on an action bar or on
a pull-down menu; that is, you can press the ALT key in combination with
the mnemonic letter that is underscored in the choice text to activate the text.
Use the tab key to move the cursor among the action bar choices. If you are
running in GUI mode (see “Running in GUI mode” on page 25, use the right and
left cursor keys.
Notes:
1. ISPF does not provide a mouse emulator program. This document uses select in
conjunction with point-and-shoot text fields and action bar choices to mean
moving the cursor to a field and simulating Enter.
Chapter 2. The ISPF User Interface
17
Understanding ISPF Panels
Note: Some users program their mouse emulators as follows:
v Mouse button 1 – to position the cursor to the pointer and simulate
Enter
v Mouse button 2 – to simulate F12 (Cancel).
2. If you want the Home key to position the cursor at the first input field on an
ISPF panel, type SETTINGS on any command line and press Enter to display the
ISPF Settings panel. Deselect the Tab to action bar choices option.
3. If you are running in GUI mode, the Home key takes you to the beginning of
the current field.
When you select one of the choices on the action bar, ISPF displays a pull-down
menu. Figure 5 shows the pull-down menu displayed when you select Utilities on
the ISPF Primary Option Menu action bar.
Menu Utilities1 Compilers Options Status Help
───── ┌────────────────────────┐ ─────────────────────────────────────────────
│
1. Library
│ rimary Option Menu
│
2. Data set
│
0 Se │
3. Move/Copy
│ r parameters
User ID . : USERID
1 Vi │
4. Data Set List
│ ata or listings
Time. . . : 11:44
2 Ed │
5. Reset Statistics │ source data
Terminal. : 3278
3 Ut │
6. Hardcopy
│ functions
Screen. . : 1
4 Fo │
7. Download...
│ uage processing
Language. : ENGLISH
5 Ba │
8. Outlist
│ anguage processing
Appl ID . : ISR
6 Co │
9. Commands...
│ kstation commands
TSO logon : ISPF
7 Di │ *0. Reserved
│ esting
TSO prefix: USERID
9 IB │ 11. Format
│ lopment products
System ID : MVS8
10 SC │ 12. SuperC
│ Library Manager
MVS acct. : IBMGSA
11 Wo │ 13. SuperCE
│ on Workplace
Release . : ISPF 5.5
12 OS │ 14. Search-For
│ ogrammer applications
13 OS │ 15. Search-ForE
│ ications
14 IB └────────────────────────┘ nt and Service Apps
P PDF Tools
PDF development tools
S SDSF
Spool Display and Search Facility
Option ===>
F1=Help
F2=Split
F10=Actions F12=Cancel
1
F3=Exit
F7=Backward F8=Forward
F9=Swap
The selected action bar choice is highlighted.
Figure 5. Panel with an Action Bar Pull-Down Menu
To select a choice from the Utilities pull-down menu, type its number in the entry
field (underlined) and press Enter or select the choice. To cancel a pull-down menu
without making a selection, press F12 (Cancel). For example, if you select choice
9, ISPF displays the Command Table Utility pop-up, as shown in Figure 7 on page
19.
Note: If a choice displays in blue (the default) with an asterisk as the first digit of
the selection number (if you are running in GUI mode, the choice will be
grayed), the choice is unavailable for one of the following reasons:
v Recursive entry is not permitted here
v The choice is the current state; for example, the Status is currently set to
Session in Figure 6 on page 19.
18
z/OS V1R6.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol I
Understanding ISPF Panels
Menu Utilities Compilers Options Status Help
──────────────────────────────────── ┌────────────────────────────┐ ──────────
ISPF Prim │
*. Session
│
│
2. Function keys
│
0 Settings
Terminal and user p │
3. Calendar
│ USERID
1 View
Display source data │
4. User status
│ 15:09
2 Edit
Create or change so │
5. User point and shoot │ 3278
3 Utilities
Perform utility fun │
6. None
│ 1
4 Foreground
Interactive languag └────────────────────────────┘ ENGLISH
5 Batch
Submit job for language processing
Appl ID . : ISR
6 Command
Enter TSO or Workstation commands
TSO logon : ISPF
7 Dialog Test Perform dialog testing
TSO prefix: USERID
9 IBM Products IBM program development products
System ID : ISD1
10 SCLM
SW Configuration Library Manager
MVS acct. : IBMGSA
11 Workplace
ISPF Object/Action Workplace
Release . : ISPF 5.5
12 OS/390 System OS/390 system programmer applications
13 OS/390 User OS/390 user applications
14 IBMGSA
IBMGSA Development and Service Apps
P PDF Tools
PDF development tools
S SDSF
Spool Display and Search Facility
Option ===>
F1=Help
F2=Split
F10=Actions F12=Cancel
F3=Exit
F7=Backward F8=Forward
F9=Swap
Figure 6. An Unavailable Choice on a Pull-Down
If you entered a command on the command line before selecting an action bar
choice, the command is processed, and the pull-down menu is never displayed.
The CANCEL, END, and RETURN commands are exceptions. These three
commands are not processed and the cursor is repositioned to the first input field
in the panel body. If there is no input field, the cursor is repositioned under the
action bar area. If you are running in GUI mode and select an action bar choice,
any existingcommand on the command line is ignored.
Menu Utilities Compilers Options Status Help
─ ┌─────────────────────────────── Commands ────────────────────────────────┐
│
Command Table Utility
│
│
│
0 │ Specifications
Command table search order
│
1 │ Application ID . . ISR
Application table . : ISR
│
2 │ Enter "/" to select option
User table 1 . . . . : USER
│
3 │
Show description field
User table 2 . . . . :
│
4 │
User table 3 . . . . :
│
5 │
Site table 1 . . . . : SITE
│
6 │
Site table 2 . . . . :
│
7 │
Site table 3 . . . . :
│
9 │
System table . . . . : ISP
│
1 │
│
1 │ If no application ID is specified, the current application ID will be │
1 │ used. The name of the command table to be processed is formed by
│
1 │ prefixing the application id to the string ’CMDS’. For example:
│
1 │ Application ID . . TST results in a command table name of ’TSTCMDS’. │
P │
│
S │ Command ===>
│
│ F1=Help
F2=Split
F3=Exit
F7=Backward F8=Forward
│
O │ F9=Swap
F12=Cancel
│
└─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘
F10=Actions F12=Cancel
Figure 7. Pop-Up Selected from an Action Bar Pull-Down
Chapter 2. The ISPF User Interface
19
Understanding ISPF Panels
Point-and-Shoot Text Fields
Point-and-shoot text fields are cursor-sensitive; if you select a field, the action
described in that field is performed. For example, if you select Option 0, Settings,
in Figure 4 on page 16, ISPF displays the ISPF Settings panel.
Note: If you have entered a command on the command line, this command is
processed before any point-and-shoot command unless you are running in
GUI mode.
The cursor-sensitive portion of a field often extends past the field name. Until you
are familiar with this new feature of ISPF, you might want to display these fields
in reverse video (use the PSCOLOR command to set Highlight to REVERSE).
Note: You can use the Tab key to position the cursor to point-and-shoot fields by
selecting the “Tab to point-and-shoot fields” option on the ISPF Settings
panel (Option 0).
Function Keys
ISPF uses CUA-compliant definitions for function keys F1–F12 (except inside the
Edit function). F13–F24 are the same as in ISPF Version 3. By default you see the
CUA definitions because your “Primary range” field is set to 1 (Lower - 1 to 12).
To use non-CUA-compliant keys, select the “Tailor function key display” choice
from the Function keys pull-down on the ISPF Settings (option 0) panel action bar.
On the Tailor Function Key Definition Display panel, specify 2 (Upper - 13 to 24)
in the “Primary range” field.
The following function keys help you navigate in ISPF:
F1
Help. Displays Help information. If you press F1 (and it is set to Help)
after ISPF displays a short message, a long message displays in a pop-up
window.
F2
Split. Divides the screen into two logical screens separated by a horizontal
line or changes the location of the horizontal line.
Note: If you are running in GUI mode, each logical screen displays in a
separate window.
20
F3
Exit (from a pull-down). Exits the panel underneath a pull-down.
F3
End. Ends the current function.
F7
Backward. Moves the screen up the scroll amount.
F8
Forward. Moves the screen down the scroll amount.
F9
Swap. Moves the cursor to where it was previously positioned on the
other logical screen of a split-screen pair.
F10
Actions. Moves the cursor to the action bar. If you press F10 a second time,
the cursor moves to the command line.
F12
Cancel. Issues the Cancel command. Use this command to remove a
pull-down menu if you do not want to make a selection. F12 also moves
the cursor from the action bar to the Option ==> field on the ISPF Primary
Option Menu. See ISPF Dialog Developer’s Guide and Reference for
cursor-positioning rules.
z/OS V1R6.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol I
Understanding ISPF Panels
F16
Return. Returns you to the ISPF Primary Option Menu or to the display
from which you entered a nested dialog. RETURN is an ISPF system
command.
Selection Fields
z/OS V1R6.0 ISPF uses the following CUA-compliant conventions for selection
fields:
A single period (.)
Member lists that use a single period in the selection field recognize only a
single selection. For example, within the Edit function you see this on your
screen:
│EDIT
USER1.PRIVATE.TEST
ROW 00001 of
│ Name
VV MM Created Changed Size Init Mod
│ . MEM1
01.00 94/05/12 94/07/22 40
0
0
│ . MEM2
01.00 94/05/12 94/07/22 30
0
0
00002
ID
USER1
KEENE
│
│
│
│
You can select only one member to edit.
A single underscore (_)
Selection fields marked by a single underscore prompt you to use a slash
(/) to select the choice. You may use any nonblank character. For example,
the “Panel display CUA mode” field on the ISPF Settings panel has a
single underscore for the selection field:
Options
Enter "/" to select option
_ Command line at bottom
_ Panel display CUA mode
_ Long message in pop-up
Note: In GUI mode, this type of selection field displays as a check box;
that is, a square box with associated text that represents a choice.
When you select a choice, the check box is filled to indicate that the
choice is in effect. You can clear the check box by selecting the
choice again.
An underscored field (____)
Member lists or text fields that use underscores in the selection field
recognize multiple selections. For example, from the Display Data Set List
Option panel, you may select multiple members for print, rename, delete,
edit, browse, or view processing.
Entering Commands in ISPF
ISPF provides flexibility by accepting various types of commands and having
many methods for entering them. Table 1 provides an overview of the entry
methods and commands available.
Table 1. Entry Methods and Command Types
Entry Methods
TSO Cmds,
PDF
CLISTs, and
DM
Primary
PDF Line
WS
REXX EXECs Commands Commands Commands Commands
ISPF Command Shell
(option 6)
X
X
Option field
X
X
Command field
X
X
X (1)
X
X (1)
Chapter 2. The ISPF User Interface
21
Entering Commands in ISPF
Table 1. Entry Methods and Command Types (continued)
Entry Methods
TSO Cmds,
PDF
CLISTs, and
DM
Primary
PDF Line
WS
REXX EXECs Commands Commands Commands Commands
Line Command fields
(1–6 characters)
Line Command fields
(9 characters)
X
X
X
Note: (1) Available when prefixed by ″WS″
For example, to use the TSO ALLOCATE command, you could enter:
Command ===> TSO ALLOCATE
Also, CLIST names and REXX EXEC names can be preceded by a percent (%)
symbol, as in:
Option ===> TSO %CLIST
This symbol informs TSO that the command is a CLIST or REXX EXEC, not a TSO
command.
You can also use two command entry methods not shown in the table: the PA keys
and the function keys. PA1 (ATTENTION) and PA2 (RESHOW) are hardware keys
that you cannot redefine. You can use function keys to enter all commands.
Types of Commands
Three types of commands operate at three levels:
v TSO commands, CLISTs, and REXX EXECs
You invoke high-level commands through the MVS/TSO operating system.
These include TSO commands, CLISTs, REXX EXECs, and the commands
assigned to the PA1 and PA2 keys.
v DM component commands
You call middle-level commands through the DM component of ISPF.
v PDF component primary and line commands
You call low-level commands through the PDF component of ISPF.
TSO Commands, CLISTs, and REXX EXECs
ISPF gives you access to the MVS/TSO operating system by letting you enter TSO
commands, CLISTs, and REXX EXECs from within ISPF. TSO Extensions Command
Language Reference and MVS/XA TSO Extensions Command Language Reference
contain descriptions of all TSO commands.
You can enter most TSO commands, CLISTs, and REXX EXECs from all three panel
types: data entry; menu; and scrollable data display. However, some TSO
commands, such as LOGON and LOGOFF, can cause unwanted results when you
enter them from ISPF. This is also true of CLISTs and REXX EXECs that contain
these TSO commands. The rules for entering TSO Commands, CLISTs and REXX
EXECS are described in the Command (Option 6) chapter of the ISPF User’s Guide
Volume II.
DM Component Commands
DM component commands are valid from all three types of panels. However, the
validity of some commands depends on the type of panel displayed or the type of
22
z/OS V1R6.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol I
Entering Commands in ISPF
terminal you use. For example, the scroll commands—UP, DOWN, LEFT, and
RIGHT—are valid only on scrollable data displays, and the SPLITV command is
valid only on a 3290 display terminal.
For a description of the ISPF commands, default function key settings, and the PA1
and PA2 keys, see “ISPF System Commands” on page 72.
PDF Component Primary and Line Commands
These commands are valid only when you call them within the PDF component.
Exceptions are the primary and line commands for Edit (option 2), which are
defined in ISPF Edit and Edit Macros, and those for SCLM (option 10), which are
defined in ISPF Software Configuration and Library Manager (SCLM) Developer’s and
Project Manager’s Guide. The ISPF primary option that you are using determines
which commands are valid. For example, the CAPS primary command is valid
only when using the Edit option.
For information about which commands are valid for a particular option, see the
relevant chapter in the ISPF User’s Guide Volume II, that describes the option.
PDF component primary commands can affect a complete data set or PDS member,
but the line commands can affect only one or more specified lines within a data set
(unless you specify all the lines in the data set). For example, the Edit COPY
command can copy a complete data set, whereas the C or CC Edit line command
can copy only lines or blocks of lines within a data set.
National Language Support
National Language Support (NLS) gives countries the option of translating
commands and keywords so that users can enter them in the country’s national
language. In addition, panels, messages, and literal modules are shipped with the
product. The supported languages are German, Swiss-German, and Japanese.
When national language support is enabled, users can be required to enter certain
keywords in the national language and not in English.
When the Danish, French, Korean, Traditional Chinese, Simplified Chinese,
Spanish, Brazilian-Portuguese, or Italian session language is specified, its respective
literal module is used. However, the ISPF product panels and messages are
displayed in English.
ISPF Command Syntax Notation
The notation conventions for ISPF command syntax follow.
v Uppercase commands and their uppercase parameters show required entry.
v Lowercase parameters show variables (substitute your values for them).
v Brackets([]) show optional parameters (required parameters do not have
brackets).
v An OR (|) symbol shows two or more parameters you must select from.
v Stacked parameters show two or more parameters you can select from.
v Braces ({}) with stacked parameters show that you must select one.
v Underscores show defaults.
Chapter 2. The ISPF User Interface
23
National Language Support
Stacking Commands
To enter more than one command, you can stack them by typing a special
delimiter between them. The default delimiter is a semicolon. Use the Settings
option (0) to change the delimiter. For example, to stack two Edit CHANGE
commands, use:
Command ===> CHANGE ALL ABC XYZ;CHANGE ALL PQR GHIJK
The system variable for the delimiter is ZDEL. Refer to Appendix E in the ISPF
Dialog Developer’s Guide and Reference for more information about ZDEL.
Dual Command Processing
You can enter information on a command or option line in combination with
pressing a related function key. The command is called first. For example, typing 4
on the command line and pressing F7 (UP command) is the same as typing UP 4
on the command line and pressing Enter.
If the command you type is unrelated to the command assigned to a function key
you press, ISPF passes the entry to the function in control, which either processes
or ignores the entry. For example, if the Edit function is in control, ISPF may
display an error message. However, if the Tutorial is in control, the command is
ignored. ISPF processes any stacked valid commands.
Line Command Fields
Line command fields can take many forms. Some have headings, some do not.
Most are blank, but some contain single quotation marks or sequence numbers. For
some, you type one character; for others, you type up to nine characters (even
typing over data set names). Table 2 shows the functions that provide the line
command fields.
Table 2. Characteristics of the Line Command Field
Functions Providing Line Command
Fields
Heading
Displayed
Characters
Allowed
Initial
Contents
Member Selection List
None
1–9
Blank
Edit (option 2)
None
6
Quotes or
numbers
Command
9
Blank
Command Table utility (option 3.9)
None
4
Quotes
Format Specification utility (option 3.11)
None
1
Blank
Line Cmd
1
Quotes
None
4
Quotes
Data Set List utility (option 3.4)
SCRIPT/VS (option 4.9)
Dialog Test (option 7):
Variables (option 7.3)
Tables (option 7.4)
Traces (option 7.7)
Breakpoints (option 7.8)
The line command field for member selection lists is blank and has no heading.
This includes typical member lists, which have a 1-character line command field,
and the member list displayed when you use option M of the Data Set List utility,
which has a 9-character line command field.
Quotes appear when you create a new data set or member, or when you insert one
or more lines. Sequence numbers appear if you have NUMBER ON in your Edit
profile.
24
z/OS V1R6.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol I
National Language Support
Data set lists with 9-character line command fields allow you to type over data set
names, thus extending the length of the fields to allow you to type long TSO
commands, CLIST names, and REXX EXEC names. For information about entering
TSO commands, CLISTs, and REXX EXECs in a line command field, see the Data
Set List Utility (Option 3.4) chapter of the ISPF User’s Guide Volume II. Also, the
rules for entering TSO Commands, CLISTs and REXX EXECS from within ISPF are
described in the Command (Option 6) chapter of the ISPF User’s Guide Volume II.
PDF Component Line Commands
Most PDF component line commands use only one letter, such as S, for selecting a
member from a member list. Others, such as many of the Edit line commands, use
more than one letter and sometimes allow you to add a number so the command
affects more than one line. For example, the UC line command plus the number 3,
as in UC3, converts three lines to uppercase.
Another type of line command is the block line command, which affects the block
of lines between and including the lines on which the commands are entered. For
example, the UCC line command, when entered beside two different lines,
converts all lines between and including the two commands to uppercase.
Command Nesting
You can use the action bars to suspend an activity while you perform a new one.
For example, if you are editing a data set and want to allocate another data set,
select the Data set choice from the Utilities pull-down on the Edit panel action bar.
ISPF suspends your edit session and displays the Data Set Utility panel. When you
have allocated the new data set and ended the function, ISPF returns you directly
to your edit session.
By contrast, if you used the jump function (=3.2), ISPF would end your edit
session before displaying the Data Set Utility.
Running in GUI mode
In addition to the standard interface seen in terminals and terminal emulators,
ISPF can be run from a workstation using the display functions of your
workstation operating system. In the ISPF library this is called running in GUI
mode.
The ability to run in GUI mode is provided via the ISPF Client/Server component,
also known as the ISPF Workstation Agent (WSA). The WSA is an application that
runs on your local workstation and maintains a connection between the
workstation and the ISPF host. The WSA also allows you to edit host data on your
workstation and workstation data on the host. In the ISPF library this is called
distributed editing. For more information about distributed editing, see the
’Download Data Set to Workstation Utility (Option 3.7)’ section of the ISPF User’s
Guide Volume II.
The ISPF WSA is supported on the following platforms:
v OS/2
v Microsoft Windows
v AIX
v HP-UX
v Solaris
Chapter 2. The ISPF User Interface
25
Running in GUI mode
Starting a GUI Session
Before you can start a GUI session, you must have performed the following
actions:
v Successful installation and initialization of TCP/IP or APPC.
’Appendix B: Configuring Communications for the ISPF Client/Server’, in the
ISPF User’s Guide Volume I, contains procedures that will help you to test
whether you have satisfied this requirement.
v Successful installation of the ISPF Workstation Agent component.
See ’Appendix A: Installing the Client/Server component’, in the ISPF User’s
Guide Volume I for additional information.
v Initialization of the ISPF WSA component.
To initialize the WSA:
– If you have created a shortcut on your desktop that automatically launches
the WSA, double-click the icon.
If you do not have a shortcut icon:
1. Go to a command line in your operating system (Windows or Unix).
2. Change to the directory that contains your WSA executable file.
3. Enter WSA.
The Workstation Agent window is displayed on your workstation.
Figure 8. The Workstation Agent window
This window represents the executing ISPF C/S workstation program. For
more information about this window, see “The Workstation Agent Window”
on page 164 . You can minimize this window but you cannot close it while
ISPF is running in GUI mode.
Note: If you do not close the WSA window after you end an ISPF C/S
session, you will not have to repeat this step to start another ISPF C/S
session; that is, as long as the ISPF C/S component has been started,
you can start a workstation session.
To start a GUI session:
1. Display the Initiate Workstation Connection panel, using any of the following
methods:
v From the Primary Option Menu panel, select Option 0 (Settings), select
Workstation from the Action Bar, then enter 1 (Workstation Connection).
v From other panels, select Menu from the Action Bar, enter 1 (Settings), then
select Workstation from the Action Bar and enter 1 (Workstation Connection).
v On the Command line in any panel, enter the WSCON command.
26
z/OS V1R6.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol I
Running in GUI mode
┌───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐
─ │
Initiate Workstation Connection
│ ──
│
More:
+ │
│ / Save values in system profile? (/=Yes)
│
0 │
│
1 │ Workstation Connection
GUI Network Protocol
│
2 │ 1 1. With GUI display
1 1. TCP/IP
│
3 │
2. Without GUI display
2. APPC
│
4 │
3. Use ISPDTPRF file
│
5 │
│
6 │ GUI Title
│
7 │ ISPF Client/Server
│
9 │ TCP/IP Address
│
1 │ 9.190.173.227
│
1 │ APPC Address
│ 5
1 │
│
1 │
│
1 │
│
P │ Host Codepage . . .
Host Character Set . . .
│
S │
│
│ Command ===>
│
O │ F1=Help
F2=Split
F3=Exit
F7=Backward F8=Forward │
│ F9=Swap
F12=Cancel
│
F └───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘
Figure 9. The Initiate Workstation Connection Panel
2. If necessary, type 1 in the Workstation Connection field. The remaining fields in
this panel usually contain values saved when the WSA was installed and
configured. For more information about the Workstation Connection panel, see
the Settings (Option 0) chapter of the ISPF User’s Guide Volume II.
3. Press Enter. The Incoming Connection dialog box is displayed.
Figure 10. WSA Connection Panel
4. Click Yes to accept the connection. The panel that was active in ISPF before you
opened the Workstation Connection panel is now displayed in the GUI dialog
box.
Chapter 2. The ISPF User Interface
27
Running in GUI mode
What GUI Mode Looks Like
This section describes changes that you see when you run ISPF in GUI mode.
Figures 11 through 16 show the differences between ISPF panels displayed on a
3270 emulator and a GUI display. Emulator screens shown are from the Personal
Communications Workstation Program. The GUI display panels are shown as they
would be displayed on a workstation running Windows 2000.
Figure 11 shows the ISPF Primary Option Menu in 3270 mode within Personal
Communications.
Figure 11. ISPF Primary Option Menu Displayed in Personal Communications
Figure 12 on page 29 shows this panel displayed on a workstation using ISPF
WSA.
28
z/OS V1R6.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol I
Running in GUI mode
Figure 12. ISPF Primary Option Menu Displayed Using ISPF Workstation Agent
Action Bars and Pull-Down Menus
Action bars are responsive entities at the workstation; that is, pull-down
menus display without issuing an interrupt to the host so you can browse
the action bars quickly and easily. If you have entered a command on the
command line, this command is ignored when you select a pull-down
choice.
Title Bars
Various types of data can be displayed in the title bar. What data appears
in the title bar depends on which of the following values ISPF finds data in
first:
v The value defined in the application dialog variable ZWINTTL is used if
the panel is displayed in a pop-up.
v The value defined in the application dialog variable ZAPPTTL.
v The value specified in the title variable on the TITLE parameter of the
ISPSTART command.
v The value specified in the title variable on the TITLE parameter of the
WSCON service.
v The value specified in the GUI Title field on the Initiate GUI Session
panel available from option 0.
v Your user ID.
Chapter 2. The ISPF User Interface
29
Running in GUI mode
If PANELID is set to On, the panel ID displays in front of the window title
(or your user ID, if no window title is defined) rather than on the first line
of the panel.
Push Buttons
Function keys display as push buttons if FKA or PFSHOW is set to On.
You can determine whether the F= prefix is shown on the push button by
specifying PREFIX or NOPREFIX on the FKA command. Point-and-shoot
output and text fields display as push buttons.
Note: If you entered a command on the command line, this command is
ignored when you push a point-and-shoot push button.
Point-and-shoot input fields are cursor-selectable.
Cursor Movement
The up and down cursor keys move the cursor vertically through a group
of input fields, point-and-shoot fields, and pull-down choices. Use the right
and left cursor keys to move through the choices on an action bar.
You can group pushbuttons and checkbox fields together by using Cursor
Groups. If you choose to use Cursor Groups in an application, the cursor
up and cursor down keys move the focus through each of the fields within
a group, and the TAB key moves the focus out of the group.
You can also set Radio buttons in an application. When the focus is within
a radio button group, the up and down keys move the focus and the
selection through the radio button choices.
Messages
Long and short messages are displayed as they are in non-GUI mode. If
the message would appear in a pop-up window, it will be displayed in a
message box. The message box will have CANCEL and HELP push
buttons as well as the appropriate CUA-defined icon:
v An i in a circle (the international symbol for information) signifies an
informational message.
v An exclamation point (!) signifies a warning message.
v A red circle with a diagonal line across it signifies an error message.
Note: You can force long messages into pop-ups using ISPF option 0.
Mnemonics
You can use a hot key to access a choice on an action bar or on a pull-down
menu; that is, you can press the ALT key in combination with the letter
that is underscored in the choice to activate the choice.
Check Boxes
A selection field that is marked by a single underscore on the host displays
as a check box (that is, a square box with associated text that represents a
choice) if the attribute for the entry field has CKBOX(ON) and it is a valid
check box field.
When you select a choice, some operating systems make a character (e.g.
U) appear in the check box to indicate that the choice is in effect. You can
clear the check box by selecting the choice again. Some operating systems
(AIX and HP-UX) treat the check box as a pushbutton.
List Boxes
A control that enables you to display scrollable lists of choices in boxes.
You can select a choice by tabbing to the desired choice and pressing Enter,
or by positioning the mouse pointer on the desired choice. A single click
30
z/OS V1R6.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol I
Running in GUI mode
selects the choice, a double click selects the choice and processes an Enter
action. The vertical scroll bar of the list box enables you to scroll through
the choices. The horizontal scroll bar enables you to scroll horizontally
through the choices.
Drop-down Lists
A variation of a list box. A drop-down list only displays one item until you
take action to display the other choices. You can select a choice by tabbing
to the desired choice and pressing Enter, or by positioning the mouse
pointer on the desired choice. A single click selects the choice, a double
click selects the choice and processes an Enter action. The vertical scroll bar
of the drop-down list enables you to scroll through the choices.
Combination Boxes
A combination box combines the functions of an entry field with a
drop-down list. It has an entry field and contains a list of choices to select
from to complete the entry field. The list of choices is hidden until you
take action to display it.
You can also type text directly into the entry field. The text does not have
to match one of the list choices.
The width of the combination box is the width of the input field.
Separator bars
You can provide visual distinction between two adjacent areas within a
pull-down menu by coding a separator bar between the two areas.
Accelerators
You can use an accelerator to invoke an application-defined function from
a pull-down menu. An accelerator is a key or combination of keys that you
define.
Radio buttons
A radio button is a control that shows a fixed set of mutually exclusive
choices, one of which is usually chosen.
To select a radio button, you can use your mouse pointing device to press
the desired button. You can also use the TAB key to move the focus of
your session to the currently selected radio button group, then use the
cursor keys to move to the desired choice within the group. If the focus is
on a radio button choice, the TAB key moves the focus to the next field or
group of fields following the first radio button choice. After one of the
radio buttons is selected, you cannot blank it back out. Some applications
handle this situation by using a radio button choice of NONE.
Unavailable Choices
Radio button, checkbox, and push button choices can display as
unavailable choices. The unavailable choice is colored gray and audible
feedback occurs if you try to select it.
Function Keys
Function keys display as push buttons.
Panel Display CUA Mode
When you are running in GUI mode, the “Panel display CUA mode”
option on the ISPF Settings panel is set to On.
Enter Key
An Enter key appears as a push button, by default, on all panels. You can
control the display of this key from the GUI Settings panel (option 0).
Chapter 2. The ISPF User Interface
31
Running in GUI mode
Color, Intensity, and Highlighting
The Global GUI Color Change Utility allows you to map host colors to
workstation colors. For more information, see the section on the Global
GUI Color Change Utility in the Settings (Option 0) chapter of the ISPF
User’s Guide Volume II. Character-level color, intensity, and highlighting are
not supported; field-level intensity and highlighting are not supported.
Split Screen
When you split a screen, the new screen is displayed as a new physical
window that is added to the window list. Each modeless window is
single-threaded to MVS. SPLIT without parameters always acts as SPLIT
NEW in GUI mode. Splitting a screen after the maximum number of
screens is reached acts as a SWAP command. If you have only two split
screens, SWAP simply toggles between the two. If you have more than two
split screens, SWAP displays the Swap List.
PRINT Command
The PRINT, PRINT-HI, PRINTL, PRINTLHI, and PRINTG commands are
not available in GUI mode.
WINDOW Command
The WINDOW command is not available in GUI mode.
WS Command
The WS command modelessly invokes the command you specify to
provide a seamless interface between host and workstation applications.
For example, this command opens a modeless window and invokes the
workstation editor on the file named “myfile”:
WS e.exe myfile
APL/TEXT Character Sets
The ZGE variable is set to Off when you are running in GUI mode. Any
character defined with the GE(ON) attribute displays as a blank.
Graphic Areas
Graphic areas are not supported. When a GRINIT statement is
encountered, you receive a message that panels with graphics cannot be
displayed. You may choose to continue. When a panel with graphics is
encountered, a pop-up is displayed that allows you to specify that the
panel be displayed on the host emulator session or on the workstation
without the graphic.
Notes:
1. If you are in split screen mode, the graphic area panel cannot be
displayed on the host session.
2. If you specified GUISCRD or GUISCRW values on the ISPSTART
invocation that are different from the actual host screen size, GDDM®
cannot be initialized, and the GRINIT service ends with a return code
of 20.
Input Fields
See “Sample Screens” on page 33 for more information about how input
fields are displayed in GUI mode.
Note: Blank fields and trailing blanks are displayed as nulls in GUI mode
in order to avoid the need to delete blank characters when replace
mode is not available.
Fonts
32
All GUI displays use the font that you specify in the Font option on the
z/OS V1R6.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol I
Running in GUI mode
Workstation Agent window. If the GUI display of your panels does not
appear as you expect, try using a monospace font.
Codepages and Character sets
Users invoking ISPF GUI from a terminal or emulator that does not
support code pages (indicated in the terminal query response) should
specify code page and character set parameter values if values other than
English are preferred when translating host data to workstation data.
Use the CODEPAGE and CHARSET parameters of the ISPSTART
command, and the Host Codepage and Host Character Set fields on the
ISPF Settings Initiate Workstation Connection panel, to set your chosen
values. Refer to appendix on Extended Code Page Support in the ISPF
Dialog Developer’s Guide and Reference for code page and character set
values supported by ISPF.
Images
ISPF supports image files in the graphic interchange format (GIF) when
running in GUI mode.
ISPF ships sample files in the sample library SISPSAMP. The panel
ISR@PRIM uses three of the images (ISPFGIFL, ISPFGIFS, and ISPEXIT).
To use images, store the image files on the host in a partitioned data set
and allocate this image data set to ddname ISPILIB before invoking ISPF.
For more information about allocating this image library see “Allocating
Optional Image ISPF Library” on page 152.
Sample Screens
Note the following about GUI panels:
v Input fields appear as input boxes.
v If an input field wraps multiple lines on a 3270, the field scrolls horizontally in
the GUI input box. Blank lines are displayed for those lines of the input field
that would have wrapped on a 3270 display.
v For a panel not displayed in a pop-up window, only the amount of panel
necessary to display the information is used; that is, ISPF does not generate
useless blank space at the bottom of the panel. ISPF does display blank space
coded into the panel.
v ISPF maintains the original window size on a pop-up window. If the panel
exceeds the width or depth of the physical display, scroll bars are automatically
added to allow you to view the hidden portions of the screen.
Chapter 2. The ISPF User Interface
33
Running in GUI mode
Figure 13 shows the ISPF Dialog Test Display Panel displayed on a 3270 emulator.
Figure 13. ISPF Dialog Test Display Panel Displayed on a 3270 Emulator
34
z/OS V1R6.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol I
Running in GUI mode
Figure 14 shows this panel displayed on a programmable workstation using ISPF
WSA.
Figure 14. ISPF Dialog Test Display Panel Displayed Using ISPF Workstation Agent.
Chapter 2. The ISPF User Interface
35
Running in GUI mode
Figure 15 shows a pull-down with an unavailable choice (Session) displayed on a
3270 emulator.
Figure 15. A Pull-Down Menu with an Unavailable Choice Displayed on a 3270 Emulator
36
z/OS V1R6.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol I
Running in GUI mode
Figure 16 shows this panel displayed on a programmable workstation using ISPF
WSA.
Figure 16. A Pull-Down Menu with an Unavailable Choice Displayed Using ISPF Workstation
Agent
Switching Between GUI Mode and 3270 Mode
You can switch logical screens back and forth between GUI mode and 3270 mode
by issuing the SWITCH 3270 or SWITCH GUI commands. See “The SWITCH
Command” on page 48 for more information.
Special characters or symbols
This topic describes techniques that can be used to display special characters or
symbols while running ISPF in GUI mode. Although some are similar, the
techniques are platform specific. In each case, the text refers to a number
(sometimes in hexadecimal form) which is the codepoint of the character or symbol
within the current (in use) code page. Note that the codepoint for a symbol may
have different values depending on the code page being used. For example, the
codepoint for the host ’not’ sign (¬) on OS/2 (using either code page 437 or 850) is
decimal 170. On Windows, the codepoint for the host ’not’ sign (using ANSI code
page 1252) is 172.
Windows
Use Microsoft’s Character Map program to find the special character that
you want to insert into your document or entry field. The Character Map
program is available from the Start menu under the Accessories folder.
Chapter 2. The ISPF User Interface
37
Running in GUI mode
After you have found the special character, select it by clicking with your
mouse. Notice that the key sequence used to generate the character
displays in the lower right portion of the window. You can use this key
sequence in an entry field or GUI editor to display the character.
Alternatively, you can use the Character Map program to copy the
character to the clipboard, then paste it into your document.
When entering a character using its key sequence, remember that you must
use the numeric keypad. For example, the key sequence for the host ’not’
sign (¬) is ALT+0172. To enter this key sequence, press and hold the ALT
key, then press the numbers 0172 on the keypad, then release the ALT key.
Note that the leading zero is important and must be specified in order to
display the character using the current (in use) character set. Without the
leading zero, the OEM (or DOS) character set is used. Also note that within
an entry field, some key sequences only work if NumLock is ON.
Refer to the Microsoft online help for the Character Map program for more
information about using the program.
OS/2
OS/2 does not have a character map program like Microsoft Windows.
However, you can still enter a key sequence to generate a special character
or symbol. For example, the key sequence for the host ’not’ sign (¬) is
ALT+170. To enter this key sequence, press and hold the ALT key, then
press the numbers 170 on the keypad, then release the ALT key. Note that
within an entry field, some key sequences only work if NumLock is ON.
UNIX (AIX)
On AIX you can enter a key sequence to generate a special character or
symbol. The technique described for OS/2 works for AIX. Use ALT+172
instead of ALT+170.
UNIX (SOLARIS and HP)
SOLARIS and HP do not support this transformation technique. Instead,
you can remap the keyboard. Remapping the keyboard works on all UNIX
systems (AIX, SOLARIS, and HP). The following example shows how to
remap shift 6 to be the host ’not’ sign (¬).
1. Execute the following command:
/usr/openwin/bin/xmodmap -pke > output.file
This will dump the current mapping into the file named output.file.
2. Edit output.file and replace keycode 42 = 6 asciicircum with keycode
42 = 6 0XAC (AC is the ASCII equivalent of the not symbol)
3. Execute /usr/openwin/bin/xmodmap output.file.
Once the keycode you are going to change is known, the change can also
be made by executing the following command: /usr/openwin/bin/xmodmap
-e ’keycode 42 = 6 0XAC’ (the single quotes are required).
Note: The remap only affects new windows created after the command is
run. Any existing windows will not honor the change. Also note that
the change is only for the life of the current session. You might want
to put the commands into some kind of startup that executes when
you start a session. For more information about xmodmap, check the
online documentation on your system.
38
z/OS V1R6.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol I
Running in GUI mode
ISPF GUI Support of TSO Line Mode Output and Input
When running ISPF in GUI mode, users connected by TCP/IP on a z/OS UNIX
system, and all users connected by APPC, have the option to display all
non-fullscreen TSO data in an ISPF/TSO GUI window. This window is scrollable
and it contains an input field for entering required user responses. The data in the
window can be selected and copied to a file of your choice.
This support enables you to minimize the emulator window from which you
logged on without missing any messages that might appear in the emulator
window.
Figure 17 shows the ISPF/TSO GUI window.
Figure 17. ISPF/TSO GUI Window
The ISPF/TSO window has one item on its action bar: Edit. Clicking on this option
causes a pull-down menu to appear.
Figure 18. ISPF/TSO GUI Window with Pull-Down Menu
The options on the menu are as follows:
Copy
Enables you to copy the lines of the window that you have
marked. You designate a line to copy by clicking on it in the
window.
Chapter 2. The ISPF User Interface
39
Running in GUI mode
Select All
Mark all of the lines in the window for further action. The
ISPF/TSO window is scrollable, and can contain 30,000 bytes of
data in Windows, and 60,000 bytes of data in the other supported
environments.
Deselect All
Unmark all lines in the TSO window.
Clear
Erase everything in the ISPF/TSO window.
The ISPF/TSO Window title contains the system name of the host system that you
logged on to and your User ID. The system name is the SYSNAME value defined
by your system programmer in the IEASYSxx member of SYS1.PARMLIB. For ISPF
to display the line mode data in this ISPF/TSO Window, you must log on to TSO
using a logon procedure that invokes the alternate entry point IKJEFT1I. In
addition, for users running TCP/IP communications, your system programmer
must update the ISPF Configuration table, changing the value of the
USE_MVS_OPEN_EDITION_SOCKETS keyword to YES, and rebuilding the
configuration table load module. For more details on installation requirements for
TSO line mode support, refer your system programmer to ISPF Planning and
Customizing.
When you make a connection to the workstation to run ISPF in GUI mode, an
additional connection is made for the ISPF/TSO Window. The window is created
on your workstation when the first TSO message needs to be displayed. All
messages are appended to this scrollable window until you end your ISPF session.
At that time, the ISPF/TSO Window is closed and all TSO data from that point on
is displayed on the 3270 emulator session.
Note: You cannot close the ISPF/TSO Window during the ISPF GUI session.
When running ISPF in GUI mode, if TSO input is required from the user, the
ISPF/TSO Window is displayed in the foreground and the input field is enabled
for you to enter your data.
Note: A maximum of 256 characters can be entered in this input field. When input
is not being requested, the input field is disabled.
The ISPF/TSO window has a maximum capacity of approximately 32000 bytes of
data in a Windows environment, and 60000 bytes of data in all other
ISPF-supported operating environments. After these limits are reached, a message
is displayed informing you that the ISPF/TSO window will be cleared before
appending the next line of data. This gives you a chance to use the data in the
window. Using the options under the Edit menu item, you can select lines from the
window, copy them, and paste them to any file of your choice. After you respond
OK to the informational message, the window is cleared and any following TSO
data is appended from the top of the window.
Restrictions for the TSO GUI Line Mode Support
Applications issuing TGETs must ensure that their TGET buffer is large enough for
the user’s response. The maximum allowable response is 256 characters. Normally,
exceeding this limit results in a return code of 12 or 28 being returned. With the
TSO GUI line mode support, a zero (0) return code is returned, and only the
amount of data that fits in the supplied buffer is returned.
Users running in a Session Manager environment in the 3270 session will see any
cross memory messages that appeared in the ISPF/TSO Window displayed again
in the session manager screen after the ISPF GUI session ends.
40
z/OS V1R6.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol I
Running in GUI mode
Fullscreen TSO Data: Fullscreen TPUTs will continue to be displayed in the 3270
emulator session. Required input to satisfy a fullscreen TGET must be entered in
the 3270 emulator session. For example, if the user from ISPF GUI mode invokes
SDSF through its fullscreen TPUT interface (that is, the user enters TSO SDSF from
an ISPF command line) the SDSF screens are displayed in the 3270 emulator
screen.
However, if the user invokes SDSF through the ISPF interface ISPEXEC SELECT
PANEL(ZSDSFOP2) NEWAPPL(ISF) then the SDSF screens are displayed in the ISPF
GUI mode window just like any other ISPF panel.
Users running fullscreen applications like RMFMON, CSP, and OMVS from an
ISPF GUI session with GUI TSO line mode support should first suspend the
ISPF/TSO Window. This forces all fullscreen and line mode data to appear in the
3270 screen until the completion of the fullscreen application. The ISPF/TSO
Window should be resumed at the completion of the fullscreen application
processing.
You can query the current status of the ISPF/TSO Window using the CONTROL
TSOGUI QUERY service. You can suspend and resume the window using one of the
following methods:
1. ISPF Service
CONTROL TSOGUI QUERY|OFF|ON
QUERY
Calls for the current status of the ISPF/TSO window. One of the
following return codes is shown:
v 0 — Either the user is not running ISPF GUI with TSO line mode
support or TSOGUI is off. All TSO input and output is directed to
the 3270 session.
v 1 — All TSO line mode output displays in the ISPF/TSO window
and line mode input must be entered into the ISPF/TSO window’s
input field.
OFF
Specifies that the ISPF/TSO window is suspended and all fullscreen
and line mode data appears in the 3270 window until CONTROL
TSOGUI ON is issued.
ON
Specifies that the ISPF/TSO window is resumed and all TSO line mode
output and input is directed to the ISPF/TSO window.
Notes:
a. If you do not run ISPF GUI with TSO line mode support, issuing a
CONTROL TSOGUI results in no operation being performed (NOP).
b. CONTROL TSOGUI defaults to ON during ISPF GUI session initialization.
Example CLIST:
PROC 0
ISPEXEC CONTROL TSOGUI QUERY
SET &TSOGUIST= &LASTCC
IF (&TSOGUIST = 1) THEN +
DO
ISPEXEC CONTROL TSOGUI OFF
END
ISPEXEC SELECT CMD (OMVS)
IF (&TSOGUIST = 1) THEN +
DO
ISPEXEC CONTROL TSOGUI ON
END
Chapter 2. The ISPF User Interface
41
Running in GUI mode
2. ISPF command — TSOGUI
The TSOGUI command is found in the ISPF command table as:
SELECT PGM(ISPISM) PARM(TSOGUI,&ZPARM)
From any ISPF command line you can enter TSOGUI OFF or TSOGUI ON to
achieve your desired results.
Bi-directional Language Support
The ISPF workstation agent supports two bi-directional (bidi) languages: Arabic
and Hebrew. This enablement of the workstation agent is supported on the
following operating systems:
v OS/2
v Windows 2000.
Shortcut Keys
With bi-directional versions of the OS/2 and Windows operating systems, support
for special key sequences called shortcut, or “hot”, keys, is provided to control
bi-directional behavior within an application. For example, within an entry field on
OS/2 you can press the keys Alt and Numlock to perform a field reverse.
The ISPF workstation agent supports these existing hot key combinations
whenever possible. However, the workstation agent does provide some new or
modified hot key combinations. The new or modified hot keys follow.
Note: The abbreviations “LtR” and “RtL” refer to the orientation of a field or
application. LtR means Left to Right orientation. RtL means Right to Left
orientation.
Screen Reverse (Alt+Enter): The term “screen reverse” is a remnant of ISPF’s
native 3270 support. Within an OS/2 or Windows application, this hot key
combination reverses the application window, not the whole desktop screen. On
both the OS/2 and the Windows operating systems, Alt+Enter is used to toggle the
orientation of the screen.
Note: On an Arabic 102 keyboard, the Enter key is called New Line.
Auto Reverse (Alt+Numpad5): This key combination is used to automatically
reverse the orientation of specific entry fields. On both OS/2 and Windows
operating systems, use Alt+Numpad5 to toggle between Auto Reverse ON and
Auto Reverse OFF.
When Auto Reverse is ON, all numeric only entry fields switch to LtR orientation,
and alphanumeric entry fields switch to RtL orientation.
When Auto Reverse is OFF, all entry fields have the same orientation as the
application screen.
Field Reverse (Ctrl+Left/RightShift): This combination works on Windows only,
and has been modified from its normal Windows processing.
On the Windows operating system, the key combination Ctrl+Left/RightShift
performs a field reverse. The effect of this is to change the keyboard language so
that it matches the new typing direction. In a standard Windows application, this
keyboard language change is global to the whole application window.
42
z/OS V1R6.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol I
Running in GUI mode
On a native 3270 display, the keyboard language change (resulting from a field
reverse) affects only the target field, not the whole screen.
The ISPF workstation agent follows the behavior of a native 3270 display when
this key combination is used on Windows.
Modifications to Arabic OS/2
These changes are applicable only to the Arabic OS/2 version of the ISPF
Workstation Agent. The following menu items, because their effect is global to all
open ISPF application windows, have been added to the System Menu.
Note: The abbreviations “LtR” and “RtL” refer to the orientation of a field or
application. LtR means Left to Right orientation. RtL means Right to Left
orientation.
Symmetric swapping: Select this menu item to toggle Symmetric swapping ON
or OFF. The default condition is OFF. When symmetric swapping is ON, a check
mark appears beside the menu item.
Symmetric swapping determines whether directional (symmetric) characters are
automatically swapped within text segments when they are displayed RtL. For
example:
Storage buffer: (1)Hello
Display:
olleH)1( -Visual, RtL text without symmetric swapping
Display:
olleH(1) -Visual, RtL text with symmetric swapping
Numeric swapping: Select this menu item to toggle Numeric swapping ON or
OFF. The default condition is OFF. When numeric swapping is ON, a check mark
appears beside the menu item.
Numeric swapping affects how host numerals are displayed on the workstation. If
numeric swapping is ON, host numbers that are in Hindi are displayed in Arabic.
Likewise, host numbers that are in Arabic are displayed in Hindi on the
workstation.
Numeric display: Numeric display is a cascaded menu with three choices: Arabic
numerals, Hindi numerals, and Passthru numerals. A check mark appears next to
the menu item that has been chosen. The default choice is Arabic numerals.
Numeric display enables you to choose how numbers are displayed, either in
Arabic form or Hindi form. Passthru is a special choice that prevents the operating
system from performing any numeral conversions.
Note: If numeric swapping is ON, the numeric display is automatically set to
Passthru numerals. Any previous setting is retained in the workstation agent
INI file. When numeric swapping is turned OFF, the original numeric
display setting is automatically restored.
Bi-directional File Transfer Limitations
Data files that contain all LtR text are not affected by the limitations described in
this section. Neither is the workstation build function.
The ISPF Workstation Agent does not perform any transformations on the contents
of files that are transferred to or from the host in text mode. The implications of
this depend on how the files are edited on the workstation. If your host files
contain Arabic or Hebrew text, consider the following points before editing them
on the workstation:
Chapter 2. The ISPF User Interface
43
Running in GUI mode
v Host data is stored in Visual form. If you download a file to the workstation and
edit it with an editor that expects the file contents to be in implicit form, the file
can become corrupted.
v For Arabic OS/2, consider the following scenarios using the OS/2 System
Editor:
1. if the file editing is done in two steps (first download the file, then edit the
file), and the editor is customized for Visual shaped data, then there is no
problem.
2. if the file download and editor invocation are done in one step (such as
when using the Workstation Edit feature of ISPF), then there is a problem.
The editor will, by default, work in Implicit base shapes. This is not
compatible with the host.
v On Arabic Windows, the contents of a data file can become corrupted if the file
is downloaded to the workstation then uploaded back to the host. This is
because the host Arabic code page (420) supports shaped characters, while the
Windows Arabic code page (1256) does not. Therefore, it is possible to lose
shaping during the file transfer process.
Attention: If your host files contain Arabic or Hebrew text, do not edit them in
GUI mode. Instead, edit these files on the host using the ISPF editor in its non-GUI
mode.
Ending a GUI Session
You can end a GUI session in one of the following ways:
v Terminate the ISPF session.
v Issue the WSDISCON command. See the WSDISCON entry of Table 3 on page
72 for more information.
v Invoke the WSDISCON dialog service. Refer to the ISPF Services Guide for more
information.
After invocation of WSDISCON, the GUI screen continues to display back in the
3270 emulator session.
Closing the ISPF Client/Server Workstation Agent Component
If the ISPF WSA component window is closed while ISPF is running in GUI mode,
ISPF issues a 989 abend on the host, unless the “3270 mode after losing
workstation connection” field is selected on the GUI Settings panel. If this field is
selected, the GUI session continues in your 3270 emulator session.
If the GUI session has been ended and the Client/Server WSA component is no
longer needed, the Workstation Agent window can be closed.
Splitting the Screen Horizontally or Vertically
While using a dialog, you can use the SPLIT command to partition the display into
two or more logical screens. The logical screens are treated as though they are
independent ISPF sessions.
The maximum number of screens available to you depends on the value of the
MAXIMUM_NUMBER_OF_SPLIT_SCREENS keyword in the ISPF Configuration
table. ISPF ships with a default figure of 8. Support for up to 32 split screens is
available for all terminal types except the 3290.
44
z/OS V1R6.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol I
Splitting the Screen
Note: If you are running in GUI mode, when you split a screen, the new screen is
displayed as a new physical window. If you want, representations of every
screen can be displayed at once. Although a 3270 screen can only display
two screens at one time, there can be other screens (up to 32) that are not
visible. You can select which logical screen to display by using the SWAP
LIST command to display a list of logical screens.
The SPLIT Command
You enter split-screen mode by using the SPLIT command. You also use this
command to reposition the horizontal line that separates the two logical screens on
a 3270 display. On a 3270 display the location of the cursor identifies the active
logical screen. On a 3270 display, the horizontal divider line that separates the
logical screens is not considered part of either logical screen. If the cursor is placed
on this horizontal divider line and a function key is pressed, the result is the same
as if the ENTER key was pressed and the cursor is positioned on the active logical
screen’s command line. Because ISPF runs in both host and GUI modes, the SPLIT
command behaves differently in each.
SPLIT command without parameters, in 3270 mode:
If only one screen is currently being used, the physical display is divided into two
logical screens with a divider at the cursor. If two or more screens exist, the
divider line is moved, but no new screen is started.
SPLIT command without parameters, in GUI mode:
A new logical screen is added each time the command is given, until the
maximum number is reached. After the limit is reached, a message appears when
the command is issued again.
SPLIT NEW command, in 3270 mode:
A new logical screen is added each time the command is given, until the
maximum number is reached. After the limit is reached, a message appears when
the command is issued again. Each new logical screen is added below the cursor,
where the split line appears. If two or more screens already exist, the new one
replaces the screen in which the SPLIT command was not entered.
SPLIT NEW command, in GUI mode:
This command behaves the same as the SPLIT command without parameters.
End split-screen mode by ending the application on all but one logical screen. The
remaining logical screen is then expanded to the full size of the display screen.
The SWAP Command
Although you can alternately use any logical screen, only one of the logical screens
is considered active at a time. The location of the cursor identifies the active screen.
You make a screen active by using the SWAP command and its parameters to
choose the desired screen.
The parameters on the SWAP command–LIST, PREV, NEXT, screen_name, and
n–control which screens you see displayed.
SWAP command without parameters in 3270 mode:
Chapter 2. The ISPF User Interface
45
Splitting the Screen
If only one screen exists, this command has no effect. If more than one screen
exists, this command moves the cursor between the two logical screens that are
displayed.
SWAP command without parameters in GUI mode:
If only two screens are present, the cursor moves to the one that it is not currently
on. If more than two screens exist, this command defaults to the SWAP LIST
command and causes the ISPF task list to display in a pop-up window. See “SWAP
LIST command in GUI mode” for more information.
SWAP PREV|NEXT|screen_name|n commands in both modes:
Entering SWAP PREV changes the focus (for GUI mode) or display (for 3270
mode) to the next lower screen number from the one where the command is
entered. Repeatedly issuing the same command causes each lower-numbered
screen to display until screen number 1 is reached, then the counter wraps back to
screen number 32 (or your installation’s maximum number).
Entering SWAP NEXT changes the focus (for GUI mode) or display (for 3270
mode) to the next higher screen number from the one where the command is
entered. Repeatedly issuing the same command causes each higher-numbered
screen to display until screen number 32 (or your maximum) is reached, then the
counter wraps back to screen number 1.
Entering SWAP screen_name changes the focus (for GUI mode) or display (for 3270
mode) to the screen named screen_name if it is active.
Entering SWAP n changes the focus (for GUI mode) or display (for 3270 mode) to
the screen numbered n (ZSCREEN variable) if it is active.
SWAP LIST command in 3270 mode:
This command displays the ISPF Task List, from which you can select which screen
to display. The screen you select replaces the screen on which you entered the
command.
SWAP LIST command in GUI mode:
This command displays the ISPF Task List (Figure 19), from which you can select
which screen to focus on.
46
z/OS V1R6.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol I
Splitting the Screen
Figure 19. ISPF Task List
All of the fields on the ISPF Task List panel are point-and-shoot fields. The results
when choosing one are as follows:
Start a new screen
Starts a new logical ISPF screen.
Start a new application
This field is used in conjunction with the Application Name field. If you
choose ″Start a new application″ you must enter an application name in
the ″Application Name″ field.
Application Name
The name of an application you want to start by choosing the
″Start new application″ field on the ISPF Task List panel. This
application is started in a new logical screen. ISPF invokes the
application through the ISPF START command, so any application
name and parameters that are valid for the START command are
valid in the Application Name input field. If you need more space
to enter the application name and parameters, press the Expand PF
key to display a pop-up window that contains a longer input field.
For example, if a user types ″keylist″ in the Application Name
input field and presses Enter, the ISPF KEYLIST application is
invoked in a new logical screen.
Select a screen from the list of active sessions
Provides a list of active sessions for you to choose from.
Chapter 2. The ISPF User Interface
47
Splitting the Screen
The SWITCH Command
In addition to using the swap command to change the focus of your session from
one screen to another, if you are running the ISPF Client/Server you can use the
SWITCH command to change the way the screen is displayed, either GUI mode or
3270 mode.
From any GUI screen you can enter the command SWITCH 3270. The GUI screen
disappears and the screen is then displayed fullscreen on your 3270 display. The
3270 screen is now operational. If you had been in split screen mode, the
remaining GUI screens remain in GUI, but are disabled. To swap back and forth
between the GUI and 3270 sessions now, you must use the SWAP commands
(SWAP x, SWAP LIST, and so forth). The SWAP LIST panels ISPSLIST and
ISPTLIST have a field indicating the session type (GUI or 3270).
If you want to switch your 3270 screen back to GUI mode, enter SWITCH GUI on
the command line.
Rules for Splitting and Swapping 3270 and GUI Screens
The rules for splitting and swapping screens when you have combinations of both
3270 and GUI screens are as follows:
v If you have only one 3270 screen and enter split, the new logical screen is
displayed in GUI mode.
v If you have two or more 3270 screens and enter split from one of them, the next
3270 screen is displayed fullscreen, but no new screen is started.
v If you enter split from a GUI screen, a new GUI screen is started (until the
maximum number is reached).
v If you enter split new from either a GUI or 3270 screen, the new logical screen is
displayed in GUI mode.
v If you have one 3270 screen and one GUI screen, then entering swap from either
of these screens causes a swap to the other.
v If you have two GUI screens and one 3270 screen, swap from one of the GUI
screens swaps you to the other GUI screen. Swap from the 3270 screen does
nothing.
v If you have one GUI screen and two 3270 screens, swap from one of the 3270
screens swaps to the other 3270 screen. Swap from the GUI screen does nothing.
v If you have two GUI screens and two 3270 screens, swap from one of the GUI
screens swaps you to the other GUI screen. Swap from one of the 3270 screens
swaps you to the other 3270 screen.
v If you have more than two GUI screens and enter swap from one of them, the
SWAP LIST panel appears.
v If you have more than two 3270 screens and swap from one of them, you swap
to the next 3270 screen.
v Entering SWAP PREV|NEXT|screen_name|n commands in either GUI or 3270
mode swaps as described in “The SWAP Command” on page 45.
v After a GUI screen is enabled, you can swap to other GUI screens using your
mouse pointer.
SWITCH Command Restrictions
At the completion of ISPF command processing, ISPF does not reprocess the panel
from which the command was invoked. The panel is simply relaunched to the
screen without processing, for example, the panel’s )INIT section. Therefore, if
certain constructs are defined within the panel sections based on the ZGUI variable
48
z/OS V1R6.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol I
Splitting the Screen
(nonblank indicating connected in GUI mode), these constructs are not defined
properly until after the Enter key is pressed following the SWITCH invocation.
The following are some known restrictions for the SWITCH command:
v When switching to GUI mode, the first panel displayed in GUI mode cannot
contain group boxes and images that are defined on the panel. After the user
presses the Enter key, causing the panel to be reprocessed, then these constructs
are visible in GUI mode.
v When switching to 3270 mode, the name of any group boxes defined on the
panel that the SWITCH was issued from display on the screen in 3270 mode.
After the user presses the Enter key, causing the panel to be reprocessed, these
group box names disappear and any panel text under these names reappears.
v If a 3270 screen already exists when the SWITCH 3270 command is invoked
from another GUI screen, the screen from which the SWITCH was invoked is
displayed in the full 3270 emulator session without a split line, regardless of the
user’s Always show split line setting. The other 3270 sessions are hidden and
available for display if the appropriate swap command is entered.
v If pop-up windows are displayed in GUI mode when the SWITCH 3270
command is invoked, those pop-up windows are suspended on the 3270 session
and the panels are displayed as fullscreen panels. If new addpops are then
invoked, these new panels are displayed as pop-ups.
v The user cannot switch to 3270 mode when running in batch GUI mode.
v When running in GUI mode, if at least one screen has been switched to 3270
mode, then the user is not allowed to change the screen format in ISPF Settings.
v If you started GUI mode from ISPSTART and specified GUISCRD or GUISCRW
values different than your actual emulator session, then you are not allowed to
switch to 3270 mode.
3290 Terminals
On 3290 terminals, in addition to splitting the screen horizontally, you can use the
SPLITV command to split the screen vertically, for a total of four logical screens. In
the case of the 3290 terminal, four is the maximum number of screens possible.
(The SPLITV function is not active if the data being displayed on a screen is more
than 80 characters wide.) Figure 20 shows the effect of SPLIT and SPLITV, starting
in single-screen mode.
Chapter 2. The ISPF User Interface
49
Splitting the Screen
SPLIT
SPLITV
SPLITV on top
SPLITV on bottom
SPLIT on left
SPLIT on right
SPLITV on bottom
SPLITV on top
SPLIT on right
SPLIT on left
Figure 20. Splitting the 3290 Screen
Notes:
1. ISPF logical screens are separate subtasks that do not share subpool 0 (attached
with SZERO=NO parameter.) Thus, VSAM data sets cannot be accessed from
more than one logical screen.
2. If you are in a VSAM application, perform a split screen operation, then enter
another VSAM application in the second session, you must be sure to end the
second session before you end the first session, or an abend can occur.
3. On 3290 hardware, using the jump function to move from screen to screen
might result in the loss of data that has been typed but not processed. The use
of the 3290 hardware jump is not recommended.
4. In split-screen mode, if you type a command on the command line and swap
screens before pressing Enter, the command is erased.
5. You cannot start ISPF in GUI mode if you are configured to run ISPF in 3290
partition mode.
50
z/OS V1R6.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol I
Chapter 3. Using Personal Data Set Lists and Library Lists
Personal lists are named lists of data sets and ISPF libraries that you can use to
speed up access to frequently used data sets. You can use personal lists to fill in
panel fields quickly and to create data set lists that are built from more than one
level name. Personal data set lists contain data set names and volumes. Personal
library lists contain lists of ISPF library names and concatenations.
ISPF provides four types of personal lists:
Personal data set list
Lists of up to 30 data set names. Each name can include a member name
or a volume name, or both. Personal data set lists can also contain
workstation file names and data set name levels. See “Personal Data Set
Lists” on page 53.
Personal library list
Lists of up to eight ISPF library names or ISPF library concatenations. ISPF
library names contain three qualifiers called project, group, and type.
Personal list entries can optionally contain a member name. See “Personal
Library Lists” on page 54.
Reference data set list
A special kind of personal data set list in which ISPF saves the names of
the most recently used data sets. This list is always named REFLIST. See
“Reference Data Set List” on page 54.
Reference library list
A special kind of personal library in which ISPF saves the names of the
most recently used ISPF libraries. This list is always named REFLIST. See
“Reference Library List” on page 54.
You can have a personal data set list with the same name as a personal library list.
ISPF reserves the name REFLIST as the name of the reference lists, so there is a
personal data set list called REFLIST, and a personal library list called REFLIST.
Reference lists are active lists of data sets and libraries that you have referenced in
your ISPF session. ISPF adds a data set name to the data set reference list when
you enter a data set name in the Other Partitioned or Sequential Data Set Name
field. A library is added to the library reference list when you enter a library in the
ISPF Library field. Only data sets and libraries that are successfully allocated by
ISPF’s ALLOCATE routine are added to the reference lists.
Note: Reference lists can be manipulated just like any other personal list, but ISPF
might dynamically change reference lists when new data sets or libraries are
referenced by ISPF.
Current lists are the most recently opened or the last list to which something was
saved from within the personal list panels. One named data set list, and one
named library list, are the current lists at any time. The current list is used for the
NRETRIEV key, and in the RefList pull-downs. The current list names are shown
in the RefList pull-down choices, and in the lists of personal lists.
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1980, 2004
51
Using Personal Data Set Lists
Menu RefList RefMode Utilities Workstation Help
───── ┌───────────────────────────────────────┐ ──────────────────────────────
│
1. Current Data Set List (TEST)
│
│
2. Current Library List (MYLIST) │
ISPF │
3. List of Personal Data Set Lists │
Pr │
4. List of Personal Library Lists │
Gr └───────────────────────────────────────┘
. . .
Type . . . . SOURCE
Member . . .
(Blank or pattern for member selection list)
Other Partitioned, Sequential or VSAM Data Set:
Data Set Name . . .
Volume Serial . . .
(If not cataloged)
Workstation File:
File Name . . . . .
Initial Macro . .
Profile Name . . .
Format Name . . .
Data Set Password
.
.
.
.
Options
Confirm Cancel/Move/Replace
Browse Mode
View on Workstation
/ Warn on First Data Change
Mixed Mode
.
.
.
.
Command ===>
F1=Help
F3=Exit
F10=Actions F12=Cancel
Figure 21. RefList Pull-Down Menu
Note: The RefList pull-down is unavailable from Utilities options 8, 9, and 13; it
does not offer library list choices from options 4 and 6.
You can use personal lists for data set selection from the View Entry, Edit Entry,
and most of the Utilities panels. You can access lists in two ways:
v From the RefList pull-down menu on the action bar of the View Entry, Edit
Entry, and most Utilities panels, as shown in Figure 21.
v Through the command interface (or fast path) described in “Command Interface
(Fast Path) to the Personal List Function” on page 65.
Personal List Modes
The action taken when you select a data set from a list depends on how you have
the Mode set. All personal lists can be set to either Retrieve or Execute mode from
the RefMode pull-down on the action bar of the View Entry, Edit Entry, and most
Utilities panels, as shown in Figure 22 on page 53. List Retrieve displays in blue
(the default) with an asterisk as the first digit of the selection number (if you are
running in GUI mode, the choice is grayed), which indicates that RefMode is
currently set to Retrieve.
52
z/OS V1R6.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol I
Using Personal Data Set Lists
Menu RefList RefMode Utilities Workstation Help
────────────── ┌─────────────────────┐ ───────────────────────────────────────
│ 1 1. List Execute │ ry Panel
│
*. List Retrieve │
ISPF Library: └─────────────────────┘
Project . . . USERID
Group . . . . TEST
. . .
. . .
. . .
Type . . . . SOURCE
Member . . .
(Blank or pattern for member selection list)
Other Partitioned, Sequential or VSAM Data Set:
Data Set Name . . .
Volume Serial . . .
(If not cataloged)
Workstation File:
File Name . . . . .
Initial Macro . .
Profile Name . . .
Format Name . . .
Data Set Password
.
.
.
.
Options
Confirm Cancel/Move/Replace
Browse Mode
View on Workstation
/ Warn on First Data Change
Mixed Mode
.
.
.
.
Command ===>
F1=Help
F3=Exit
F10=Actions F12=Cancel
Figure 22. RefMode Pull-Down Menu
The RefMode pull-down offers you the following choices:
List Execute
Sets personal data set lists and personal library lists to Execute
mode; that is, when you select an entry from the list, the
information is placed into the ISPF Library or Other Data Set
Name field, and ISPF proceeds as if you also pressed the Enter key.
List Retrieve
Sets personal data set lists and personal library lists to Retrieve
mode; that is, when you select an entry from the list, the
information is placed into the ISPF Library or Other Data Set
Name field, but the simulated pressing of the Enter key is not
performed. This allows you to set other options before you press
Enter.
Personal Data Set Lists
You can build lists of personal data sets that contain up to 30 data set names. You
can have as many lists as you like as long as each has a unique name. Personal
data set lists are a good way to group (by project, for example) those data sets that
you use frequently. You can use personal data set lists to avoid typing in data set
names and to create customized data set lists similar to those using ISPF Option
3.4. To create or use a personal data set list, do one of the following:
v Select the Personal Data Set List choice from the RefList pull-down on the View
Entry, Edit Entry, or Utilities panel action bar
v Enter the REFACTD command from the command line.
v Use the ″Save As″ action when viewing the data set reference list (REFLISTD
command).
The REFACTD command displays the Personal Data Set List panel, as shown in
Figure 23 on page 57. If you have one or more personal data set lists, ISPF displays
Chapter 3. Using Personal Data Set Lists and Library Lists
53
Using Personal Data Set Lists
the current list. If you have no personal data set lists, ISPF displays the reference
list called REFLIST, which is updated by ISPF whenever a new data set is used by
ISPF.
Personal Library Lists
You can build personal library lists of up to eight ISPF libraries. You can have as
many lists as you like as long as each has a unique name. Personal library lists are
a good way to group (by project, for example) those libraries that you use
frequently. To create or use a personal library list, select the Personal Library List
choice from the RefList pull-down on the View Entry, Edit Entry, or Utilities panel
action bar. You can also use the REFOPENL command from any ISPF command
line and use the Save As action to save the reference library list as a personal
library list.
Note: Personal library lists are not available from RefList pull-downs for any
options that do not support library names. For example, the data set list
utility and data set print utilities do not support personal library lists.
Personal library list can be used with the NRETRIEV name retrieve command.
Personal library lists are used, created, and maintained with facilities similar to
those of personal data set lists. Select the library list options from the RefList
pull-downs to access the library list functions. As with personal data set lists, the
list named REFLIST is the reference list that contains the most recently referenced
ISPF libraries and library concatenations.
Reference Data Set List
The Reference Data Set List is a special personal data set list that contains a list of
up to 30 data set names (and the volumes on which they are located) that you
have referenced (that is, entered on panels or called with services) throughout ISPF.
Data set names are also added to the list when ISPF refers to them; for example,
during a MOVE/COPY operation or a DELETE function.
The reference data set list is a personal data set list with the name REFLIST. The
name REFLIST is reserved by ISPF to refer to the reference list, but you can use the
list just like any other list. If you save a personal list under the name REFLIST, the
reference list reflects the names you save into it, but it is still updated when other
data set are referenced by ISPF.
You can turn off the automatic updating of reference lists by using the settings
panel on any personal list, or by using the DSLIST Settings panel of the data set
list facility (ISPF option 3.4).
ISPF does not automatically store workstation file names or data set name levels in
the data set reference list, though you can add them manually.
Reference Library List
The reference library list is a special personal library list named REFLIST that
contains a list of up to 30 library names that you have referenced through panels
or ISPF services. The reference library list is updated by the system when ISPF
uses ISPF libraries. In all other respects, it functions like a regular personal library
list.
54
z/OS V1R6.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol I
Using Personal Data Set Lists
How to Get a List of Your Personal Lists
To see a list of your personal lists, do one of the following:
v Select the List of Personal Data Set Lists or the List of Personal Library Lists
choice from the RefList pull-down on the Edit Entry, View Entry, or Utilities
panel action bar.
v Select the Open List of Lists choice from the File pull-down on the Personal
Data Set List or Personal Library List panel action bar.
v Type MORE on the command line of the Personal Data Set List panel or the
Personal Library List panel.
v Enter the REFOPEND (for data set lists) or REFOPENL (for library lists) on any
ISPF command line.
How to Create a Personal List
There are several ways to create personal lists:
v Type data set names into an empty list.
1. Select the New choice from the File pull-down on the Personal Data Set List
panel action bar or use the NEW primary command to display an empty
temporary list.
2. Type in the data set names.
3. Save the list.
v Use the reference data set list as a starting point.
1. Display the reference data set list by selecting the Reference Data Set List
choice from the RefList pull-down on the View Entry, Edit Entry, or Utilities
panel action bar.
2. If you want to save this entire list as a personal data set list, select the Save
as... choice from the File pull-down on the Reference Data Set List panel
action bar.
3. If you want to save some subset of the reference data set list, see the next
item for more information.
v Use an existing list as a base, edit it, and save it.
1. Display an existing list.
2. Modify this list by typing over data set names or adding new ones. Do not
select any lists.
3. Select the Save choice from the File pull-down on the Personal Data Set List
panel action bar.
Note: Closing the list display (eg. via Exit or End) will Save the list. It is
possible to have a single list open on multiple screens. It is therefore
recommended that a list only be open on one screen if modifications
are to be made. This will prevent the loss of updates when an
unchanged list display is closed after a modified one.
v Use an existing list as a base and save it under another name.
1. Display an existing list.
2. Modify this list by typing over data set names or adding new ones. Do not
select a choice.
3. Select the Save as... choice from the File pull-down on the Personal Data Set
List panel action bar and assign a unique name to this list.
4. ISPF displays the new list.
v Issue the REFADDx command and specify a new list name.
Chapter 3. Using Personal Data Set Lists and Library Lists
55
Using Personal Data Set Lists
– Issuing ’REFADDD NEWLIST’ from the command line creates a new personal
dataset list called NEWLIST. The list will contain the last referenced dataset
name.
– Issuing ’REFADDL NEWLIST’ from the command line creates a new personal
library list called NEWLIST. The list will contain the last referenced library
specification.
Retrieving Data From Personal Lists
You have three choices for retrieving data from personal lists.
v Use the NRETRIEV function key. Assign a function key to the value NRETRIEV.
On panels where NRETRIEV is available (such as edit, view, and some of the
utilities), pressing the NRETRIEV key fills in the library name fields, data set
name field, or workstation name field based on where the cursor is when the
key is pressed. See “Command Interface (Fast Path) to the Personal List
Function” on page 65 for more information.
v Use the RefList pull-down on the View Entry, Edit Entry, Utilities, or other
panels that have the RefList pull-down available. From within these options, you
can point to a data set or library name and press enter to retrieve or use the
name you selected. See “Personal List Modes” on page 52 for more information.
v Use the command interface (fast path commands) described in “Command
Interface (Fast Path) to the Personal List Function” on page 65.
Using Personal Lists to Create Customized DSLIST Displays
You can use any personal data set list or personal library list to create a data set
list (similar to ISPF option 3.4) which contains multiple level names. The easiest
way to use a Personal Data Set List to create a DSLIST is to type
DSLIST listname
on an ISPF command line. Listname is the name of the personal data set list. If you
are already viewing a DSLIST, you can add names listed in a personal data set list
by typing
APPEND listname
on the command line.
You can also create a list with the L action while displaying a list or a list of lists.
56
z/OS V1R6.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol I
Using Personal Data Set Lists
Personal Data Set List Panel
File View Options Help
──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Personal Data Set List
Enter a list action to perform or select a data set entry to retrieve.
Action: S=Save A=Save As D=Delete this list E=Extended Edit L=DSLIST
Action Name
TEST
Description
Created
Select Partitioned, Sequential Data Set or DSLIST Level
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Command ===>
F1=Help
F3=Exit
F11=ChgView F12=Cancel
Referenced
More:
Volume
+
Figure 23. Personal Data Set List Panel (ISRPDSNL)
You can work with your personal data set lists in three ways:
v Use the choices in the File, View, or Options pull-downs.
v Select one of the point-and-shoot options (for example, Save As).
v Type an action mnemonic in the Action field and press Enter. Actions are listed
at the top of the panel.
Note: The commands and actions on the Personal Data Set List panel are similar
to those on the Personal Library List panel. The descriptions here apply to
both panels, although the Library List panel does not contain the Sort
options.
There are two commands you can use on this panel:
MORE
Displays the list of all of your personal data set lists. This is the same
action as selecting Open List of Lists from the File pull-down.
NEW
Saves the current list and displays a new empty list. This is the same
action as selecting New List from the file pull-down.
Personal Data Set List Panel Action Bar Choices
The Personal Data Set List panel action bar choices function as follows:
File
The File pull-down offers you the following choices:
1
New List Displays an empty (temporary) personal data set list. After
you save this list, it is permanent until you delete it.
2
Open List of Lists Displays a list of your personal data set lists. You
can open a list to change it and make it the current active list.
3
Save Saves the current contents of a personal data set list.
Chapter 3. Using Personal Data Set Lists and Library Lists
57
Using Personal Data Set Lists
View
4
Save as... Saves the current contents to a new personal data set list.
You are prompted for a list name and optional description.
5
Delete Deletes the current personal data set list. You are not asked
to confirm the delete action. After the current list is deleted, ISPF
displays an empty personal data set list as if you had requested a
New action.
6
Edit Enters the personal list edit dialog.
7
DSLIST Builds a DSLIST based on list entries.
8
Cancel Cancels the function.
9
Exit Returns you to the panel from which you accessed the personal
list.
The View pull-down offers you the following choices:
1
Show data sets The list contains the data set entries.
2
Show data sets and notes The list contains the data set entries with
notes.
3
Sort by data set name The data set list is sorted by data set name
field. The sort routine deletes duplicate names, sorts blank entries to
the end of the list, saves the list, and redisplays the personal list.
Note: If a volume or entry description exists without a data set field
entry, the volume and description are deleted by the sort
routine.
Sort by data set volume The data set list is sorted by data set
volume field. The sort routine deletes duplicate names, sorts blank
entries to the end of the list, saves the list, and redisplays the
personal list.
4
Note: If a volume or entry description exists without a data set field
entry, the volume and description are deleted by the sort
routine.
Sort by data set note The data set list is sorted by data set note field.
The sort routine deletes duplicate names, sorts blank entries to the
end of the list, saves the list, and redisplays the personal list.
5
Note: If a volume or entry description exists without a data set field
entry, the volume and description are deleted by the sort
routine.
Options
The Options pull-down offers you the following choices:
Help
58
1
Personal List Settings Displays the Personal List Settings panel
(ISRRFOPT). From this panel, you can alter all settings that affect
personal lists.
2
Browse shared lists
The
1
2
3
Help pull-down offers you the following choices:
Tutorial index...
Appendices
Index
z/OS V1R6.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol I
Using Personal Data Set Lists
Personal Data Set List Panel Fields
The fields on the Personal Data Set List Panel function as follows:
Action
The following choices are valid in the Action field:
Note: The dots in the Action field are point-and-shoot selectable. If you
select a data set or library name, and you invoked this dialog from a
panel that supports the RefList pull-down, ISPF retrieves the
selected data set or library name, terminates this panel, and places
the name you selected in the ISPF Library or Other Data Set Name
field. If you have the RefMode set to List Execute, ISPF also
simulates pressing the Enter key on the panel.
S=Save
Saves the current list. If the list is new, you are prompted
to enter a name for the list.
A=Save as
Saves the current list with a different list name.
D=Delete this list
Deletes the personal data set list that you are working
with. You are asked to confirm this delete action. The
currently active list cannot be deleted.
E=Extended edit
Invokes the personal list editor dialog. This enables you to
insert, repeat, and delete lines in the list.
L=DSLIST
Invokes DSLIST based on list entries.
Name The name of the personal data set list.
Description
A brief description of the personal data set list. The Description field is an
input field. You can change the description for all personal lists except the
reference list (REFLIST).
Created
The date the personal data set list was created.
Referenced
The last date/time the personal data set list was referenced.
Chapter 3. Using Personal Data Set Lists and Library Lists
59
Using Personal Data Set Lists
Personal Data Set Lists Panel
File View Options Help
──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Active: TEST
Personal Data Set Lists
List 1 of 3
Action: O=Open A=Save As D=Delete E=Edit L=DSLIST
Name
_ REFLIST
_ TEST
_ TEST2
**End**
Description
Last 30 referenced data sets
Test list
Second Test List
Command ===>
F1=Help
F3=Exit
Created
02/06/26
02/10/01
02/10/01
Referenced
03/02/04 14:20
02/10/01 12:06
02/10/01 12:05
Scroll ===> PAGE
F4=Settings F5=ShrList F11=ChgView F12=Cancel
Figure 24. Personal Data Set Lists Panel (ISRPLTAB)
The Personal Data Set Lists panel shows a list of your personal data set lists. You
can show the Personal Data Set Lists panel by selecting it from the RefList
pull-down or by using the REFOPEND command.
The Personal Library Lists panel is similar. You can display a list of personal
library lists by selecting the choice from the RefList pull-down or by using the
REFOPENL command.
Personal Data Set Lists Panel Action Bar Choices
The Personal Data Set Lists Panel action bar choices function as follows:
Note: The current setting is shown as an unavailable choice; that is, it displays in
blue (the default) with an asterisk as the first digit of the selection number.
If you are running in GUI mode, the choice is grayed.
File
View
60
The File pull-down offers you the following choices:
1
New List Displays a new personal list.
2
Open Displays the personal list entries.
3
Save as... Saves the current list entries to a new list.
4
Delete... Deletes the list.
5
Edit Invokes the personal list edit dialog.
6
DSLIST Invokes DSLIST based on list entries.
7
Exit Returns you to the panel from which you accessed the Open
dialog.
The View pull-down offers you the following choices:
z/OS V1R6.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol I
Using Personal Data Set Lists
1
Standard View Displays a list of personal lists with list name, list
description, and list statistics.
2
Extended View Displays a list of personal lists with list name, list
description, list statistics, and a partial view of list entries.
3
Sort by name Sorts the displayed list alphabetically by the Name
field.
4
Sort by description Sorts the displayed list alphabetically by the
Description field.
5
Sort by created Sorts the displayed list in descending order by the
Created field.
6
Sort by referenced Sorts the displayed list in descending order by
the Referenced field.
Options
The Options pull-down offers you the following choices:
Help
1
Personal List Settings... Displays the Personal List Settings panel,
from which you can alter all settings that affect personal lists.
2
Browse shared lists... Displays shared personal data set lists. See
“Shared Personal Lists” on page 62 for additional information.
The
1
2
3
Help pull-down offers you the following choices:
Tutorial index...
Appendices
Index
Personal Data Set Lists Panel Fields
The fields on the Personal Data Set Lists Panel function as follows:
Action
The following choices are valid in the Action field:
Note: The dots in the Action field are point-and-shoot selectable. If you
are in GUI mode and select the action field, ISPF displays the
Personal List Commands pop-up so that you can select the action
you want to take. In 3270 mode, selecting a list opens the list. This
means that you can open a list by moving the cursor to the action
field and pressing Enter.
N=New
Displays an empty (temporary) personal data set list. Once
you save this list, it is permanent until you delete it.
O=Open
Opens the selected list to modify it, perform actions, or
selections of data sets.
A=Save as
Saves the current contents of the selected list to a personal
data set list. You will be prompted for a list name and
optional description.
D=Delete
Deletes the selected personal data set list. You will be
asked to confirm the delete action. The currently active list
cannot be deleted.
E=Edit
Invokes the personal list editor dialog.
L=DSLIST
Invokes DSLIST based on list entries.
Name The name of the personal data set list. The Name field is a point-and-shoot
sort field. The current (Active) list is indicated to the left of the panel title.
Chapter 3. Using Personal Data Set Lists and Library Lists
61
Using Personal Data Set Lists
Description
A brief description of the personal data set list.
Created
The date the personal data set list was created. The Created field is a
point-and-shoot sort field.
Referenced
The last date/time the personal data set list was referenced. The
Referenced field is a point-and-shoot sort field.
Note: A personal list is updated whenever a save action is performed
against it.
The LOCATE command is supported as follows:
L xxxxxxxx
LOC xxxxxxxx
LOCATE xxxxxxxx
where: xxxxxxxx is the name of the list you wish to locate.
An asterisk is supported in the last position of the list name. For example, enter
LOCATE PRIV* to locate the list named PRIVATE.
The SELECT command is supported as supported as follows:
S nnnnnnnn A
SEL nnnnnnnn A
SELECT nnnnnnnn A
where: nnnnnnnn is the name of the list you want to select and A is the action to
perform.
An asterisk is supported in the last position of the list name. For example, enter
SELECT PRIV* L to select the list named PRIVATE, with a DSLIST action of L.
Shared Personal Lists
Personal lists (library and data set) can be shared with other users on the system.
Tables ISRPLSHR for data sets and ISRLLSHR for libraries are shared lists. They
are kept in an ISPTLIB concatenated data set. Private lists are tables ISRPLIST (for
data set lists) and ISRLLIST (for library lists). They are kept in the ISPPROF user
profile data set.
Shared lists are created by using ISPF option 3.3 to copy an existing personal list
table from a user profile data set to a data set concatenated to ISPTLIB. You must
rename the table to ISRPLSHR (for data set lists) or ISRLLSHR (for library lists)
during the copy operation. You can open a shared list and use it; you cannot
update or delete a shared list. You can also save it to a private list using the Save
As function available from the Personal Data Set Lists panel (ISRPLTAB) and the
Personal Library Lists panel (ISRLLTAB). You must save the shared list to a
personal list before you can retrieve names from it.
Use the Options pull-down on these two panels to view the shared lists and to
save them locally. When you specify shared lists, the following actions are
available:
v Open (to interact with the list in any supported way)
62
z/OS V1R6.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol I
Using Personal Data Set Lists
v Save As (to save the contents of the current list to a new list)
Name Retrieval with the NRETRIEV command
The ISPF command table contains an entry named NRETRIEV. On enabled panels
(such as edit and browse), NRETRIEV retrieves the library names from the current
library referral list, or data set or workstation file names from the current data set
referral list. The user is responsible for assigning the NRETRIEV command to a PF
key.
When the cursor is not in the Other Data Set Name field, the Volume Serial field,
or the Workstation File Name field, and the NRETRIEV key is pressed, the ISPF
library fields are filled in from the current list. As long as the cursor is not placed
in these fields, subsequent presses of the NRETRIEV key will retrieve the next
library concatenation from the list.
When the cursor is in the Other Data Set Name field, the Volume Serial field, or
the Workstation File Name field, and the NRETRIEV key is pressed, the data set
name or workstation name is filled in from the current data set list. ISPF attempts
to determine if the name in the list is a workstation or data set name. As long as
the cursor is placed in these fields, subsequent presses of the NRETRIEV key will
retrieve the next data set or workstation name from the list.
Use the personal list settings panel to force the NRETRIEV command to verify the
existence of a data set before retrieving it. If verification is active, then a check is
made to see if a data set name exists before a retrieval attempt. If a volume name
is not in the personal list entry, then the catalog is checked to see if the data set
name is cataloged. If a volume name exists, an OBTAIN macro is used to check the
volume for the data set. Verification does not check ISPF library names or
workstation names, and does not check for the existence of PDS(E) members. In
the data set list Dsname Level field, verification is inactive and workstation names
are never retrieved.
NRETRIEV is enabled on the following options:
v View, including extended move, copy, create, and replace panels
v Edit, including extended move, copy, create, and replace panels
v Library Utility (Option 3.1)
v Data Set Utility (Option 3.2)
v Move/Copy Utility (Option 3.3)
v Data Set List (Option 3.4)
v Reset ISPF Statistics (Option 3.5)
v Hardcopy Utility (Option 3.6)
v Workstation Transfer (Option 3.7.2)
v SuperC (Options 3.12, old and new, and Option 3.14)
v SCLM Options:
– View (Option 1)
– Edit (Option 2)
– Member list (Option 3.1)
– Migration (Option 3.3)
– Build (Option 4)
– Promote (Option 5)
Chapter 3. Using Personal Data Set Lists and Library Lists
63
Using Personal Data Set Lists
SCLM Considerations for NRETRIEV
The NRETRIEV command is enabled to work in several of the SCLM options.
There are certain restrictions and considerations to keep in mind when you choose
to use NRETRIEV in SCLM.
SCLM Restrictions
v The NRETRIEV key within SCLM does not use the standard reference list or
personal lists. Instead, it uses a stack that is stored internally. The stack is not
editable. The stack is saved from session to session as a single-line table called
ISRSLIST.
Note: In the SCLM View option, the Other Data Set Name field does use the
standard reference list because the Other Data Set Name field has no
particular meaning to SCLM.
v In SCLM, there is no validation of saved or retrieved names. That means that if
you type in a library name and press Enter, it is added to the list of saved
names, even if SCLM does not process it. This contrasts with the standard
reference list processing, which does not add a data set or library name until the
data set or library is successfully allocated.
v On name retrieval (when the NRETRIEV key is pressed) there is no validation of
the existence of data sets or libraries.
v The regular NRETRIEV command is screen independent (it uses a separate list
indicator for each screen in split screen mode). There is only 1 position locator
for SCLM lists. This means that split screens with SCLM NRETRIEV will use the
same pointer into the list. An NRETRIEV on screen 1 followed by an NRETRIEV
on screen 2 will get list entries 1 and 2 respectively.
Stack Management for SCLM
A library name (or concatenation) is added to the list of saved library names by
pressing Enter on a panel that supports saving names. If the library or
concatenation exists in the list already, it is moved to the top of the list. Where the
Project field or the first Group field is an output field (SCLM options 2, 3, 4, and
5), the output fields are not used in the comparison between what was typed on
the panel and what is already in the list. This enables you to work in different but
similar projects.
In other words, on the edit screen that has both the Project and Group1 as output
fields, the concatenation:
SCLM Library:
Project...: PDFTDEV
Group ....: DGN
....STG
Type .....: ARCHDEF
Member ...:
....INT
....SVT
....INT
....SVT
would match
SCLM Library:
Project...: PDFTOS25
Group ....: JSM
....STG
Type .....: ARCHDEF
Member ...:
Similarly, where groups 2, 3, and 4 are not used, those groups are not used when
checking to see if the name already exists.
64
z/OS V1R6.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol I
Using Personal Data Set Lists
If a match is found, the existing entry in the list is moved to the top of the list.
Command Interface (Fast Path) to the Personal List Function
You can use the following commands to access the referral list function rather than
using the action bar pull-down menus:
REFLISTD xx
Start the personal data set list dialog with the reference data set list and
retrieve the data set in position xx. The xx parameter is optional. This sets
the current data set list to the reference list (REFLIST).
REFLISTL xx
Start the personal library list dialog with the reference library list and
retrieve the data set in position xx. The xx parameter is optional. This sets
the current library list to the reference list (REFLIST).
REFACTD nnnnnnnn xx
Start the personal data set list named nnnnnnnn and retrieve the data set in
position xx. For example, enter
REFACTD MYLIST 2
to retrieve the second data set from the personal data set list named
MYLIST and place it in the Data Set Name field. The nnnnnnnn and xx
parameters are optional.
REFACTL nnnnnnnn xx
Start the personal library list named nnnnnnnn and retrieve the library in
position xx. For example, enter
REFACTL MYLIB 1
to retrieve the first library from the personal library list named MYLIB and
place it in the Library field. The nnnnnnnn and xx parameters are optional.
REFOPEND
Start the personal data set open dialog.
REFOPENL
Start the personal library open dialog.
REFADDD nnnnnnnn
Update the personal data set list named nnnnnnnn with the most recently
referenced data set. For example, enter
REFADDD NEWLIST
to add the most recently referenced data set to the personal data set list
named NEWLIST.
REFADDL nnnnnnnn
Update the personal library list named nnnnnnnn with the most recently
referenced library. For example, enter
REFADDL NEWLIB
to add the most recently referenced library to the personal library list
named NEWLIB.
NRETRIEV
Retrieve a name from the current library or data set list on panels which
support NRETRIEV commands. This command is normally assigned to a
program function (PF) key. NRETRIEV uses the position of the cursor to
Chapter 3. Using Personal Data Set Lists and Library Lists
65
Using Personal Data Set Lists
determine what type of personal list to use and what fields on the panel to
fill in. See “Name Retrieval with the NRETRIEV command” on page 63 for
more information about NRETRIEV.
Using Function Keys with Personal Lists
You can set function keys to process any of the fast path commands, as shown in
Figure 25.
┌────────────────────────────── Keylist Utility ──────────────────────────────┐
│ File
│
│ ────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── │
│ SHARED
ISR Keylist ISRSAB Change
Row 1 to 10 of 24 │
│
│
│ Make changes and then select File action bar.
│
│
│
│ Keylist Help Panel Name . . . ISRSABH
│
│
│
│ Key
Definition
Format Label
│
│ F1 . . . HELP
SHORT Help
│
│ F2 . . . SPLIT
LONG
Split
│
│ F3 . . . EXIT
SHORT Exit
│
│ F4 . . . REFACTD MYLIST 2
SHORT Refd2
│
│ F5 . . . REFACTL MYLIB 1
SHORT Refl1
│
│ F6 . . . REFACTD MYLIST
SHORT Refd
│
│ F7 . . . BACKWARD
LONG
Backward
│
│ F8 . . . FORWARD
LONG
Forward
│
│ F9 . . . SWAP
LONG
Swap
│
│ F10 . . ACTIONS
SHORT Actions
│
│
│
│ Command ===>
Scroll ===> PAGE │
│ F1=Help
F3=Exit
F10=Actions F12=Cancel
│
└─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘
Figure 25. Defining Function Keys to Issue Referral List Commands
If you used these function key settings, you could do the following:
v Press F4 to place the second data set name on the personal data set list named
MYLIST in the Data Set Name field.
v Press F5 to place the first library name on the personal library list named MYLIB
in the Library field.
v Press F6 to display the personal data set list named MYLIST so that you can
select a data set to process.
Note: You could also type a number on the command line and press F6 to place
the data set name in the specified position on the personal data set list
named MYLIST in the Data Set Name field; for example, if you type 6 on
the command line and press F6, the sixth data set on MYLIST would be
placed in the Data Set Name field.
Example of an ISPF Panel That Uses a Referral List
Figure 26 on page 67 shows the panel definition for a panel that uses a referral list.
66
z/OS V1R6.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol I
Using Personal Data Set Lists
)PANEL KEYLIST(ISRSAB,ISR)
)ATTR DEFAULT(...) FORMAT(MIX)
0B TYPE(AB)
04 TYPE(ABSL)
05 TYPE(PT)
09 TYPE(FP)
0A TYPE(NT)
0C TYPE(NT) SKIP(ON)
11 TYPE(SAC)
12 TYPE(CEF) PADC(USER)
13 TYPE(NEF) PADC(USER)
19 TYPE(DT)
22 TYPE(WASL) SKIP(ON)
08 TYPE(CH)
10 TYPE(ET)
)ABC DESC(’RefList’)
PDC DESC(’Reference Data Set List’)
ACTION RUN(ISRRLIST) PARM(’RL1’)
PDC DESC(’Reference Library List’)
ACTION RUN(ISRRLIST) PARM(’LR1’)
PDC DESC(’Personal Data Set List’)
ACTION RUN(ISRRLIST) PARM(’PL1’)
PDC DESC(’Personal Data Set List Open’)
ACTION RUN(ISRRLIST) PARM(’PL2’)
PDC DESC(’Personal Library List’)
ACTION RUN(ISRRLIST) PARM(’LL1’)
PDC DESC(’Personal Library List Open’)
ACTION RUN(ISRRLIST) PARM(’LL2’)
)ABCINIT
.ZVARS=REFLIST
Figure 26. Example Panel Definition Using a Referral List (Part 1 of 2)
Chapter 3. Using Personal Data Set Lists and Library Lists
67
Using Personal Data Set Lists
)ABC DESC(’RefMode’)
PDC DESC(’List Execute’) UNAVAIL(ZRME1)
ACTION RUN(ISRRLIST) PARM(’EEX’)
PDC DESC(’List Retrieve’) UNAVAIL(ZRME2)
ACTION RUN(ISRRLIST) PARM(’ERT’)
)ABCINIT
.ZVARS=LISTFILE
VGET (ZELIST) PROFILE
IF (&ZELIST = ’EXECUTE’)
&zrme1 = 1
&zrme2 = 0
&listfile = 2
ELSE
&zrme1 = 0
&zrme2 = 1
&listfile = 1
)BODY
CMD(ZCMD)
.
.
.
)INIT
.
.
.
)REINIT
REFRESH (PRJ1,LIB1,LIB2,LIB3,LIB4,TYP1,MEM,DSN) /*refresh panel vars*/
)PROC
/* the following is the logic for reference or personal data set list*/
VGET (ZRDSN) SHARED
/* get data set reflist key var
*/
IF (&ZRDSN ^= ’ ’)
/* if reflist has set dsname var
*/
&DSN = &ZRDSN
/* set panel other dsname to zrdsn */
VGET (ZREFVOLM) PROFILE
/* get volume retrieve mode
*/
IF (&ZREFVOLM = ’ON’)
/* if volume retrieve on
*/
&VOL = &ZRVOL
/* set panel volume to zrvol
*/
&ZRDSN = ’ ’
/* blank zrdsn
*/
&ZRVOL = ’ ’
/* blank zrvol
*/
VPUT (ZRDSN ZRVOL) SHARED
/* return blank reflist vars
*/
.CURSOR = DSN
/* set cursor to panel dsname field */
VGET (ZELIST) PROFILE
/* get edit execute/retrieve mode */
IF (&ZELIST ^= ’EXECUTE’)
/* determine if retrieve or execute */
.MSG = ISRDS003
/* force redisplay if retrieve mode */
/* End of logic for reference or personal data set list
*/
/* the following is the logic for reference or personal library list */
VGET (DSALSEL) SHARED
/* get library reflist key var
*/
IF (&DSALSEL ^= ’ ’)
/* if reflist has set lib indicator */
VGET (DSA1,DSA2,DSA3,DSA4,DSA5,DSA6,DSA7) SHARED /* get vars */
&PRJ1 = &DSA1
/* set panel project
*/
&LIB1 = &DSA2
/* set panel library 1
*/
&LIB2 = &DSA3
/* set panel library 2
*/
&LIB3 = &DSA4
/* set panel library 3
*/
&LIB4 = &DSA5
/* set panel library 4
*/
&TYP1 = &DSA6
/* set panel type
*/
&MEM = &DSA7
/* set panel member
*/
&DSN = ’ ’
/* blank panel other dsname
*/
&DSALSEL = ’ ’
/* blank reflist lib indicator
*/
VPUT (DSALSEL) SHARED
/* return to shared pool
*/
.CURSOR = MEM
/* set cursor to panel member field */
VGET (ZELIST) PROFILE
/* get edit execute/retrieve ind
*/
IF (&ZELIST ^= ’EXECUTE’)
/* determine if retrieve or execute */
.MSG = ISRDS003
/* setmsg if retrieve mode
*/
/* End of logic for reference or personal library list
*/
)END
Figure 26. Example Panel Definition Using a Referral List (Part 2 of 2)
68
z/OS V1R6.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol I
Using Personal Data Set Lists
Example of an ISPF Panel That Enables NRETRIEV
Figure 27 shows the panel definition for a panel that uses a referral list.
)BODY
%--------------------------- NRETRIEV Test Panel ---------------------------%
%COMMAND%===>_ZCMD
+
+
+ Project ===>_PROJECT +
+ Group ===>_GROUP1 +===>_GROUP2 +===>_GROUP3 +===>_GROUP4 +
+ Type
===>_TYPE
+
+ Member ===>_MEMBER +
+ DS Name ===>_OTHERDSN
+ Volume ===>_VOLUME+
+
+ Workstation File ===>_WSFILE
+
)INIT
.NRET = ON
/* Make NRETRIEV key active */
)REINIT
REFRESH (*)
.NRET = ON
/* Make NRETRIEV key active */
)PROC
.NRET = OFF
/*IMPORTANT - Make NRETRIEV key inactive */
VGET (ZVERB) SHARED
IF (&ZVERB = NRETRIEV)
/* if NRETRIEV was entered */
IF (.CURSOR NE OTHERDSN, VOLUME, WSFILE)
.NRET = LIB
/* Reset data set counter
*/
IF (&ZNRLIB = YES)
/* If library retrieve was OK*/
.CURSOR = MEMBER
/* set cursor to member field*/
&PROJECT = &ZNRPROJ
/* set library variables from*/
&GROUP1 = &ZNRGRP1
/* the variables set by
*/
&GROUP2 = &ZNRGRP2
/* NRETRIEV
*/
&GROUP3 = &ZNRGRP3
&GROUP4 = &ZNRGRP4
&TYPE
= &ZNRTYPE
&MEMBER = &ZNRMEM
&OTHERDSN = &Z
/* Blank out odsn field
*/
&VOLUME = &Z
/* Blank out volume field
*/
&WSFILE = &Z
/* Blank out workstation file*/
.MSG = ISRDS013
/* Indicate good retrieval */
ELSE .MSG = ISRDS011
/* Else bad library list
*/
ELSE
.NRET = DSN
IF (&ZNRDS = YES)
/* If dsname retrieve was OK */
IF (&ZNRWSN = H)
/* If ISPF thinks it’s host */
.CURSOR = OTHERDSN
/* Move cursor to dsn name */
&OTHERDSN = &ZNRODSN
/* Set other dsn name
*/
&VOL
= &ZNRVOL
/* Set volume variable
*/
&WSFILE = &Z
/* Blank out workstation file*/
ELSE
/* ISPF thinks it’s a wsfile */
.CURSOR = WSFILE
/* Set cursor to ws file
*/
&WSFILE = &ZNRODSN
/* Set ws file name variable */
&VOL
= &Z
/* Blank volume and data set */
&OTHERDSN = &Z
/* To avoid visual confusion */
.MSG = ISRDS014
/* Indicate good retrieval */
ELSE .MSG = ISRDS012
/* Else bad ds referral list */
)END
Figure 27. Example Panel Definition Enabling NRETRIEV
Chapter 3. Using Personal Data Set Lists and Library Lists
69
70
z/OS V1R6.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol I
Chapter 4. Using Commands, Function Keys, and Light Pen or
Cursor Selection
This chapter explains how to use the ISPF system commands, the function keys
and their default assignments, and the light pen and cursor-select facilities.
You can use commands to request processing functions. These are the levels of
commands:
System commands
Provided by the DM component and always available to a user, unless
explicitly overridden by an application, a user, or a site.
User or Site commands
Defined by the site administrator (in the ISPF Configuration table) and
available to a user, in addition to the system commands.
Application commands
Available to a user throughout the processing of an application.
Function commands
Meaningful only while using a particular function within an application.
System, user, site, and application commands are defined by using command
tables. The DM component processes these commands. System, user, site, and
application command processing is generally transparent to the dialog functions.
For example, HELP is a system command.
Function commands include all commands that are processed by a dialog function.
For example, the NUMBER command within the ISPF Editor (option 2) is a
function command.
You can enter a command by:
v Typing the information on the command line, or in the command field, and
pressing the Enter key. This includes the command field in View, Browse, Edit,
and Table Displays, as well as the command field on a panel.
v Pressing the function key set to the desired command.
v Selecting an Attention field by using the light pen or the cursor-select key. The
cursor-select key is a hardware feature on 3179, 3179G, 3180, 3278, 3279, and
3290 terminals.
ISPF intercepts all commands, regardless of whether the command is typed in the
command field or entered with a function key, light pen, or cursor-select key. The
DM component performs the command if it matches an entry in the application,
user, or system command table. Otherwise, it is assumed to be a function
command and is passed to the dialog function.
You can pass commands to the operating system by entering the appropriate
ISPF-provided command (TSO) followed by the actual TSO command. For
example:
===> TSO LISTC LEVEL(Z77PHJ)
You can stack commands to be run by entering a special delimiter between the
commands. For example, entering:
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1980, 2004
71
===> UPDATE BLDG DEPT NAME; MENU ABC
causes the UPDATE command to run first. When it completes, the MENU
command starts. The default delimiter is a semicolon (;), which you can change
with the ISPF SETTINGS option (see the Settings (Option 0) chapter of the ISPF
User’s Guide Volume II).
Commands cannot be stacked following the:
v HELP command. HELP processing deletes any remaining commands in the
stack.
v RETRIEVE command.
ISPF System Commands
Table 3 describes the ISPF system commands in alphabetical order.
Table 3. ISPF System Commands
Command
Description
ACTIONS
Moves the cursor between the action bar and the panel body.
AUTOTYPE
Allows you to type a partial data set or member name, then press a
function key and have ISPF complete the name.
Note: AUTOTYPE is not a true ISPF system command because it is not
built into the base code of ISPF and it works only on panels that are
written to understand it.
BACKWARD
Alias for the UP command. Scrolls toward the top of the data.
BOTTOM
Alias for the DOWN MAX command. Scrolls to the bottom of the data.
CANCEL
If CANCEL is requested from an action bar pull-down, the action taken
depends on whether you are running in host or GUI mode:
v In host mode, the pull-down is removed and the cursor is positioned
on the first action bar choice.
v In GUI mode, the CANCEL command is returned to the dialog.
If CANCEL is requested from a panel displayed using the DISPLAY,
TBDISPL, or SELECT service calls, the DM component places the
command in ZCMD and sets a return code of 0 from the display screen.
If CANCEL is requested from a panel displayed using the DISPLAY or
TBDISPL service calls and the panel was defined with a PANEL tag
(DTL) or a )PANEL statement, the DM component returns the command
in ZVERB and sets a return code of 8 from the display screen.
CMDE
If CMDE is entered on any command line, a pop-up panel (ISPCMDE)
with a 234-character command input field is displayed.
You can enter up to 234 characters using the entry field provided. ISPF
allows TSO commands, CLISTS, and REXX execs and parameters to be
entered in the input field. This panel is processed much like the PDF
Option 6 panel. Data passed to this panel is translated to uppercase
characters. Data passed from this panel remains as it appears on the
panel.
If input has been entered on the panel from which CMDE was called, it
is saved and displayed when the pop-up panel ISPCMDE is displayed.
COLOR
72
z/OS V1R6.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol I
Changes the default colors on seven-color display devices.
ISPF System Commands
Table 3. ISPF System Commands (continued)
Command
Description
CRETRIEV
The actions of the CRETRIEV (conditional retrieve) command are based
on the position of the cursor when you enter the command:
v If the cursor is within the primary input field when you enter the
CRETRIEV command, the command does the same processing as the
RETRIEVE command; the DM component places the previous
command entered, if any, in the command input field.
v If the cursor is not within the primary input field, the CRETRIEV
command does the same processing as a CURSOR command; the DM
component places the cursor at the beginning of the first input field
on the panel, which is usually the option or command field.
CUAATTR
Changes the default values of panel colors, intensities, and highlights for
CUA panel element attributes.
CURSOR
Moves the cursor to the first input field on the panel being displayed,
generally the option or command field, or moves the cursor to the
alternate command field if one has been designated on the )BODY
statement. If invoked a second time on a panel with scrollable data, this
command causes the cursor to be moved to the second input field.
Scrollable data panels include a View, Browse, Edit, or table display
panel or a panel with a scrollable dynamic area.
DOWN
Scrolls toward the bottom of the data.
DSLIST [list name|DSname level]
Enables you to build a data set list from any command line. You can
specify either a personal data set list name or a data set list name level
on the command. If you do not put quotation marks around the dsname
level, the TSO prefix is used as the first qualifier in the dsname level.
By issuing the command with no parameters, you cause a list of
available personal data set lists to be displayed.
DTEST parameter number
Enables you to start, or change the conditions of, a dialog test.
Specifying a parameter number is required, and different conditions of
dialog test result. For example, if you enter DTEST 8 while running an
application under Dialog Test, the 7.8 Breakpoints panel is displayed.
After setting the breakpoints, you return to your application with the
new breakpoints activated. The panels that you can call up with DTEST
are:
1
Invoke Functions panel
2
Invoke Display Panel panel
3
Invoke Variables panel
4
Invoke Tables panel
5
Display Browse log panel
6
Invoke Dialog Services panel
7
Invoke Traces selection panel
8
Invoke Breakpoint panel
Chapter 4. Using Commands, Function Keys, and Light Pen or Cursor Selection
73
ISPF System Commands
Table 3. ISPF System Commands (continued)
Command
Description
END
Stops the current operation and returns to the previous menu. If the
ISPF Primary Option Menu is displayed, this command ends ISPF. See
“Log and List Data Set Processing at the End of a Session” on page 139
for a description of the processing that occurs when the END command
is entered from the ISPF Primary Option Menu.
When entered on a selection panel displayed by the SELECT service, the
END command causes a redisplay of the next higher menu in the
hierarchy. When entered on a panel displayed by the tutorial program, it
stops the tutorial and causes a redisplay of the menu from which the
tutorial was started or the panel from which HELP was requested.
When the END command is entered on a panel displayed by a dialog
function through the DISPLAY or TBDISPL service, the dialog function
must take whatever action is appropriate to terminate and return control.
Entry of the END command is signaled by a return code of 8 from the
DISPLAY or TBDISPL service.
ENVIRON [ENBLDUMP[ON|OFF]]
Allows you to reduce service time by gathering data that can be helpful
[TERMTRAC[ON|ERROR|DUMP|OFF]] in diagnosing problems. Functions provided include:
[TERMSTAT [QUERY]]
v Enabling Abend dumps when ISPF is not in TEST mode
v Tracing and dumping ISPF terminal input and output data and errors
v Collecting terminal characteristic information.
EPDF datasetname [Browse] [View]
[Macro macroname]
[Profile profilename]
[Panel panelname]
[Recover]
[Format formatname]
[Mixed YES|NO]
Enables you to edit, browse, or view a data set from a command line.
Browse Invoke Browse instead of edit.
View
Use View mode (End/Save/Cancel disabled).
Macro macroname
Invoke the editor or view using the initial macro specified by
macroname. Not valid with Browse.
Profile profilename
Invoke the editor or view using the edit profile specified by
profilename. Not valid with Browse.
Panel panelname
Use alternate panel name specified by panelname.
Recover
Perform edit recovery if a recovery is pending. If edit recovery
is used, the file name and macro specified on the command are
ignored. If no edit recovery session is pending, the file is edited
as usual. Not valid with Browse.
Format formatname
Invoke the editor using the format table specified by
formatname.
Mixed YES|NO
Use mixed option for 5550 terminals.
EXHELP
74
z/OS V1R6.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol I
Provides general information about the contents of a panel.
ISPF System Commands
Table 3. ISPF System Commands (continued)
Command
Description
EXIT
Requests that the current function be ended. When entered on a panel
displayed by the tutorial program, EXIT stops the tutorial and causes a
redisplay of the menu from which the tutorial was started or the panel
from which HELP was requested.
v If EXIT is requested from a panel displayed using the DISPLAY,
TBDISPL, or SELECT service calls, the DM component returns the
command in ZCMD and sets a return code of 0 from the display
screen.
v If EXIT is requested from a panel displayed using the DISPLAY or
TBDISPL service calls and the panel was defined using a PANEL tag
(DTL) or a )PANEL statement, the DM component returns the
command in ZVERB and sets a return code of 8 from the display
screen.
EXPAND
Displays a variable in a dynamic area in a pop-up expand window. This
only applies if the cursor is within a scrollable field. If the scrollable field
is input, you will be able to update the variable in the expand window.
FKA [ON|SHORT|OFF|
PREFIX|NOPREFIX]
Toggles through the different forms of the function key area. The first
time you enter the FKA command (without parameters), the long form
of the function key area is displayed. The long form includes the keys
that have a format specified as either long or short in the keylist. If you
enter the command again, the short form is displayed. The short form
displays only those keys that have the short format specified in the
keylist. If you enter the command once again, the keys are removed
from the display. Therefore, if you continue to enter the command, the
different choices are toggled:
v Long form (default)
v Short form
v No display.
The form that you select affects all panels displayed in the session. The
DM component updates the system variable ZFKA to represent the
current state of the function key area form and saves the value in the
system profile.
FKA ON displays the long form of the function key area.
FKA SHORT displays the short form of the function key area.
FKA OFF specifies that the function key area will not be displayed.
If you are running in GUI mode, FKA PREFIX displays the F= prefix on
the push button.
If you are running in GUI mode, FKA NOPREFIX removes the F= prefix
from the push button.
FORWARD
Alias for the DOWN command. Scrolls toward the bottom of the data.
HELP
Displays additional information about an error message, or provides
tutorial/help information for panels, fields on panels, commands, and
options.
INT
Starts the ISPF Workstation Tool Integration dialog. Use the dialog to
configure workstation tools and file extensions for ISPF actions and
services for Edit and View when used in conjunction with workstation
edit and view. For more information, see the section on Workstation Tool
Integration in the Settings (Option 0) chapter of the ISPF User’s Guide
Volume II.
Chapter 4. Using Commands, Function Keys, and Light Pen or Cursor Selection
75
ISPF System Commands
Table 3. ISPF System Commands (continued)
Command
Description
ISPDTLC
Invokes the ISPF DTL Conversion Utility. See the ISPF Dialog Tag
Language Guide and Reference for additional parameters and calling
options.
ISPFVAR [LMSG(ON|OFF) |
ABTAB(ON|OFF) | PSTAB(ON|OFF) |
SESM(ON|OFF) | JUMP(ON|OFF) |
EDPRT(ON|OFF) | EURO(ON|OFF) |
SPLTLINE(ON|OFF) |
SCRML(ON|OFF)]
Sets the following system variables:
LMSG
Display long message in pop-up
ABTAB
Tab to action bar choices
PSTAB
Tab to point-and-shoot fields
SESM
Select Session Manager mode
JUMP
Jump from leader dots
EDPRT
Edit the PRINTDS command
EURO
Enable the EURO currency symbol
SPLTLINE
Always show split line
SCRML
Scroll member list
ISPFWORK
Starts the ISPF Workplace.
ISPLIBD [libtype]
Invokes the LIBDEF Display Utility. The optional parameter, libtype,
identifies a specific LIBDEF library definition to be displayed. All
LIBDEF definitions for the current logical screen are displayed if the
parameter is omitted, if the parameter is longer than eight characters, or
if the parameter specifies ISPPROF as the library name. See ISPF Dialog
Developer’s Guide and Reference for more information about the ISPLIBD
command.
ISPPREP
Allows you to create preprocessed panels, those for which ISPF has
partially processed the panel definition before it is stored in the panel
data set, either interactively or in batch mode.
ISRRLIST
The action bar interface into referral lists.
ISRROUTE
The action bar interface into the ISPF command stacking routing.
ISRROUTE also provides an interface to the SELECT service from the
ACTION/RUN statement within a pull-down choice. The parameters are
the same as the ISPEXEC interface to the SELECT service.
76
z/OS V1R6.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol I
ISPF System Commands
Table 3. ISPF System Commands (continued)
Command
Description
KEYLIST [PRIVATE|SHARED|OFF|ON] The parameters on this command determine where, or if, ISPF looks for
keylists. The default setting for KEYLIST is equivalent to issuing the
KEYLIST PRIVATE command, which means that the program looks in
the user’s profile table for the keylist specified on a panel before looking
in the xxxxKEYS table allocated in ISPTLIB.
The KEYLIST SHARED command means that ISPF looks only in the
xxxxKEYS table allocated in ISPTLIB for the keylist.
Using either the PRIVATE or SHARED parameter performs an implicit
KEYLIST ON command. Both of the parameters are local to each
application, so setting PRIVATE for application X does not affect
application Y, which might be using SHARED.
By specifying KEYLIST OFF, you cause ISPF to ignore the keylist on all
logical screens and use the ZPF variables for controlling function keys.
This is in effect only for the application for which you enter the
command.
The KEYLIST ON command causes ISPF to recognize keylists again,
with the parameter (SHARED or PRIVATE) that was in effect
immediately before the KEYLIST OFF command. KEYLIST ON and OFF
are equivalent to the Enable and Disable keylist choices on the Function
keys pull-down. Keylist Settings are discussed in the Settings (Option 0)
chapter of the ISPF User’s Guide Volume II. SHARED and PRIVATE also
appear on the Function keys pull-down in ″Keylist Settings″.
The KEYLIST command with no parameters causes the Keylist utility to
start.
KEYS
Displays the PF Key Definitions and Labels panel, which allows you to
change the ZPF variable settings (ZPFVARs), as in previous versions of
ISPF. However, if the KEYS command is issued from a panel with an
active keylist, the associated Keylist Utility panel Change pop-up
window is displayed.
Note: If the KEYLIST SHARED command has been issued, or the
SYSTEM parameter has been specified on the KEYLIST keyword on the
)PANEL statement, this action causes only a BROWSE of the keylist.
Refer to the ISPF Dialog Developer’s Guide and Reference for more
information about the SYSTEM parameter in the )PANEL statement.
KEYSHELP
If KEYSHELP is defined, KEYSHELP provides you with a brief
description of each key defined for a panel.
LEFT
Scrolls left. If your cursor is in a scrollable field, this scrolls towards the
beginning of the field.
LIST [PRINT|DELETE|KEEP]
Allows you to process the list data set without exiting ISPF. See
“Processing the Log and List Data Sets” on page 137 for a description of
using the LIST command.
LOG [PRINT|DELETE|KEEP]
Allows you to process the log data set without exiting ISPF. See
“Processing the Log and List Data Sets” on page 137 for a description of
using the LOG command.
Chapter 4. Using Commands, Function Keys, and Light Pen or Cursor Selection
77
ISPF System Commands
Table 3. ISPF System Commands (continued)
Command
Description
MSGID [ON|OFF]
With no parameters, displays a message indicating the message ID of the
last message displayed. With a parameter of ON or OFF, indicates
whether a message number is to be added to the beginning of interactive
long message text. During entry to ISPF, the mode is initialized to OFF,
and the message ID is not displayed as part of the long message text on
interactive displays. If the addition of the message ID would cause long
message text to be truncated, the message is displayed in a pop-up
window.
Messages that have the message number included in the long message
text will continue to display the message number, even when MSGID
OFF is in effect. Also, the message number will appear twice when
MSGID ON is in effect.
The MSGID ON/OFF command affects only the current logical screen,
so when you are running in split screen, one screen can have MSGID
ON and the other MSGID OFF. The MSGID command will return only
the MSGID of a message for its own logical screen.
An option on the Log Data Set Defaults and List Data Set Defaults
panels, which are choices on the Log/List pull-down on the ISPF
Settings panel,
Log Message ID . . . _ (/ = Yes)
allows you to select whether the message ID is written to the log data
set as part of the long message text. The initial default is deselected.
Note that not all lines in the log data set originate from a message
member. Therefore, not every line in the log data set will have a message
number associated with it.
Note: This facility does not affect long message text returned by the
GETMSG service, messages displayed in the Error Box, or messages
displayed by TRACEX.
NOP
The classic no operation command.
NRETRIEV
Data set and library name retrieved. See “Name Retrieval with the
NRETRIEV command” on page 63 for more information.
PANELID [ON|OFF]
Indicates whether the panel identifier (ID) is to be displayed. If you
enter PANELID without any parameters, the command toggles the
display of the panel ID. If an action bar is present, the ID is displayed
immediately below the action bar, indented one space. If an action bar is
not present, the DM component displays the ID indented one space in
the left corner of line 1 on the panel.
Note: In GUI mode, the panel identifier is placed on the title bar rather
than on the first line of the panel.
During initial entry to ISPF, the PANELID is set to OFF. The ID is
displayed only if the panel contains a protected-field attribute byte in
row 1 column 1 (relative to the action bar) and is padded with one
blank.
78
z/OS V1R6.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol I
ISPF System Commands
Table 3. ISPF System Commands (continued)
Command
Description
PFSHOW [ON |OFF|TAILOR]
Toggles through the different forms of the function key area. The first
time you enter the PFSHOW command (without parameters), the long
form of the function key area is displayed. If you enter the command
again, the short form is displayed. If you enter the command once again,
the keys are removed from the display. Therefore, if you continue to
enter the command, the different choices are toggled:
v Long form (default)
v Short form
v No display.
The form that you select affects all panels displayed in the session. The
DM component updates the system variable ZPFSHOW to represent the
current state of the function key area form and saves the value in the
system profile.
PFSHOW ON displays the long form of the function key area.
PFSHOW OFF specifies that the function key area will not be displayed.
PFSHOW TAILOR displays a panel that lets you specify the set of
function keys (primary, alternate, or all) for which definitions are to be
displayed and the number of keys per line to display in each function
key definition line.
PRINT
Records a snapshot of the physical screen image in the list data set for
subsequent printing.
For the PRINT, PRINT-HI, PRINTL, and PRINTLHI commands, a screen
image can exceed 121 characters. When it does, the line must be split
when the output is being directed to a printer other than a 3800. The line
length is obtained from a user-modifiable specification on the ISPF
Settings panel for the list data set. The default length for printing is 121
characters.
Using Print Commands with DBCS
The print commands are affected in the DBCS environment as follows:
v DBCS character printing
Because shift-out and shift-in characters do not occupy positions on a
printer, ISPF inserts a blank character before each shift-out and after
each shift-in.
v Fields affected by the OUTLINE keyword
Field-outlining information is embedded in the record as a
set-attribute (SA) order. Each SA order occupies three bytes. One SA is
required to start field-outlining, one to end field-outlining, and one to
change field-outlining. Therefore, each affected field normally takes six
additional bytes.
Thus, the record-length of print command output is larger than the
screen width. The LIST file should be large enough to contain the
expanded records. If not, the output might not print correctly.
Note: The PRINT command is disabled if you are running in GUI mode.
Chapter 4. Using Commands, Function Keys, and Light Pen or Cursor Selection
79
ISPF System Commands
Table 3. ISPF System Commands (continued)
Command
Description
PRINTG
Allows you to send the information on the current logical screen to a
Graphical Data Display Manager (GDDM) graphics printer.
Notes:
1. In split-screen mode, ISPF adds the split line to the top logical screen.
If you issue the PRINTG command from the top screen, the split line
is printed along with the logical screen.
2. Also, in split-screen mode, PRINTG prints all data in the visible
portion of the logical screen, but only the graphics area data in the
nonvisible portion of the logical screen.
If you use the other print commands (PRINT, PRINT-HI, PRINTL, and
PRINTLHI) to print screen images containing a graphics area, the part of
the screen containing the graphics area prints as blanks.
If you issue the PRINTG command as a COMMAND option on a
DISPLAY service request, only data already defined to GDDM at the
time the service request is issued will be printed. Any GDDM fields
defined by the dialog (using GDDM commands) before issuing the
DISPLAY service request will be printed.
Before issuing the PRINTG command from a command line you must
first have initialized the GDDM graphic interface using the GRINIT
service.
PRINTG does not provide return codes to a dialog; however, it does
display completion or error messages.
For information about how to specify parameters related to using the
PRINTG command, see the section on Print Graphics Parms in the
Settings (Option 0) chapter of the ISPF User’s Guide Volume II.
Note: The PRINTG command is disabled if you are running in GUI
mode.
PRINT-HI
Same as PRINT, except that high-intensity characters on the screen are
printed with overstrikes to simulate the dual-intensity display.
See Using Print Commands with DBCS under the PRINT command on
page 79.
Note: The PRINT-HI command is disabled if you are running in GUI
mode.
PRINTL
Causes a snapshot of the logical screen image to be recorded in the ISPF
list file for subsequent printing. In split-screen mode, the PRINTL
command prints what would be seen if split-screen were not in effect.
See Using Print Commands with DBCS under the PRINT command on
page 79.
Note: The PRINTL command is disabled if you are running in GUI
mode.
PRINTLHI
Same as PRINTL, except that high-intensity characters on the logical
screen are printed with overstrikes to simulate the dual-intensity display.
See Using Print Commands with DBCS under the PRINT command on
page 79.
Note: The PRINTLHI command is disabled if you are running in GUI
mode.
80
z/OS V1R6.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol I
ISPF System Commands
Table 3. ISPF System Commands (continued)
Command
Description
PSCOLOR
Globally alters the color, intensity, and highlighting of point-and-shoot
fields through a pop-up dialog. Valid choices include the following:
Color
Intensity
RED
HIGH
PINK
LOW
GREEN
YELLOW
BLUE
TURQ (Turquoise)
WHITE
Highlight
NONE
BLINK
REVERSE
USCORE
To restore the ISPF default values, delete any new values you have
entered (leaving the entry fields blank) and press Enter, or select the
Defaults field.
RCHANGE
Repeats the action of the previous CHANGE command (change one
character string to another) (Edit and View only).
REFACTD nnnnnnnn xx
Calls the personal data set list named nnnnnnnn and retrieves the data
set in position xx. See “Command Interface (Fast Path) to the Personal
List Function” on page 65 for additional information.
REFACTL nnnnnnnn xx
Calls the personal library list named nnnnnnnn and retrieves the data set
in position xx. See “Command Interface (Fast Path) to the Personal List
Function” on page 65 for additional information.
REFADDD nnnnnnnn
Updates the personal data set list named nnnnnnnn with the most
recently referenced data set. See “Command Interface (Fast Path) to the
Personal List Function” on page 65 for additional information.
REFADDL nnnnnnnn
Updates the personal library list named nnnnnnnn with the most
recently referenced library. See “Command Interface (Fast Path) to the
Personal List Function” on page 65 for additional information.
REFLISTD xx
Calls the reference data set list dialog and retrieves the data set in
position xx. See “Command Interface (Fast Path) to the Personal List
Function” on page 65 for additional information.
REFLISTL xx
Calls the reference library list dialog and retrieves the library in position
xx. See “Command Interface (Fast Path) to the Personal List Function”
on page 65 for additional information.
REFOPEND
Calls the personal data set open dialog. See “Command Interface (Fast
Path) to the Personal List Function” on page 65 for additional
information.
REFOPENL
Calls the personal library list open dialog. See “Command Interface (Fast
Path) to the Personal List Function” on page 65 for additional
information.
RESIZE
Increases the size of a pop-up window to fill the entire 3270 physical
display area. The initial RESIZE command increases the pop-up window
to its maximum size, and the following RESIZE reduces the window to
its original size.
RETF
Retrieves commands from the command stack moving in the direction
from the oldest command in the command stack toward the most recent
commands in the command stack. Forward retrieve (RETF) retrieves the
oldest command on the command stack, if RETF is entered immediately
after a command is executed, before performing a RETRIEVE. See “RETF
Command” on page 88 for more information.
Chapter 4. Using Commands, Function Keys, and Light Pen or Cursor Selection
81
ISPF System Commands
Table 3. ISPF System Commands (continued)
Command
Description
RETP
Causes a pop-up panel to be displayed with a list of the last 20
commands in the retrieve stack. Retrieve pop-up (RETP) enables you to
select by number the command to be retrieved. The command selected is
retrieved to the command line, as it is when using other retrieve
commands. You will not be able to change the commands in the retrieve
pop-up until the command is selected and retrieved to the command
line.
The RETP pop-up panel has an OPTIONS action bar choice that allows
you to set the minimum number of characters required to save a
command in the retrieve stack and to choose whether to position the
cursor at the beginning or end of the retrieved command when the
command is retrieved to the command line. RETP displays the pop-up
panel if the retrieve stack is empty, which allows the user to change the
retrieve options. See “RETP Command” on page 88 for more
information.
RETRIEVE
Repeatedly entering RETRIEVE causes the commands most recently
entered from the primary input field, usually the ZCMD field, to be
displayed on the command line. The commands are displayed one at a
time, in the reverse sequence to which they were entered (last-in,
first-out). This allows you to easily recall a command for resubmission
from the command line. You can edit the command before entering it if
you wish. See “RETRIEVE Command” on page 86 for more information.
RETURN
Causes an immediate return to a primary option menu or to the display
from which you entered a nested dialog. The RETURN command
simulates repeated END commands, up to some appropriate stopping
point, without displaying intervening panels. See “Using the RETURN
Command” on page 89 for more information.
RFIND
Repeats the action of the previous FIND command (find one or more
occurrences of a specific character string) or the FIND part of the most
recent CHANGE command (Browse, Edit, and View only).
RIGHT
Scrolls right. If your cursor is in a scrollable field, this scrolls towards the
end of the field.
SAREA
Displays the Status Area pop-up window.
SCRNAME screen name
[PERM|ON|OFF]
Causes the logical screen in which the command is entered to be given
the screen name specified. The name can be any set of 2 to 8 characters
that conform to member naming rules, except NEXT, PREV, LIST, ON,
and OFF.
PERM is an optional parameter to indicate that ISPF does not allow the
SCRNAME parameter on a SELECT statement, or the setting of the
modifiable system variable ZSCRNAME, to override the value being
assigned by this SCRNAME command. The PERM setting lasts for the
duration of the logical screen. After you end the logical screen, the
setting is no longer active.
SCRNAME ON causes the name that you specify for the screen to be
displayed in the panelid area of the screen, if panelid is OFF. SCRNAME
OFF removes the screen name from visible display.
SETTINGS
82
z/OS V1R6.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol I
Displays the ISPF Settings panel.
ISPF System Commands
Table 3. ISPF System Commands (continued)
Command
Description
SPLIT [NEW]
Causes the screen to be divided into two logical screens separated by a
horizontal line or changes the location of the horizontal line. If you have
de-selected the Always show split line option in Settings, there is no split
line in 3270 mode. In GUI mode, each screen is shown as a separate
physical window. See “Splitting the Screen Horizontally or Vertically” on
page 44 for more information.
SPLITV
On 3290 terminals, causes the screen to be separated into two vertical
logical screens.
The SPLITV function is not active if the actual screen data display is
more than 80 characters wide.
START
Starts a dialog in a new logical screen. If a logical screen does not exist,
it will be created.
You can use the START command to do the following:
v Issue a command from the ISPF command table; for example,
START KEYLIST
v Issue a command with parameters (in single quotes; for example,
START ’ISRROUTE BRI’
v Start a dialog; for example, START PANEL(ISRUTIL)
Notes:
1. If you are running in GUI mode, issuing the START command
creates a new window.
2. If you are running on the host and invoke START from a pull-down
choice, the screen will be split where your cursor is located within
the pull-down.
3. This function does not change the limitation number of logical
screens. If ISPF already has the maximum number of screens when
the START command is issued, the screen is re-split; that is, the split
line might move on the host, or a window is reused if you are
running in GUI mode.
Chapter 4. Using Commands, Function Keys, and Light Pen or Cursor Selection
83
ISPF System Commands
Table 3. ISPF System Commands (continued)
Command
Description
SWAP
[LIST|PREV|NEXT|screen name|n]
When no parameters are given (in 3270 mode), moves the cursor to
where it was previously positioned on the other logical screen of a
split-screen pair.
When operating in split-screen mode, pressing the SWAP key (F9) causes
ISPF to ignore any entry on the command line.
When no parameters are given (in GUI mode) and there are more than
two screens present, defaults to SWAP LIST.
Entering SWAP LIST displays the ISPF task list. The task list displays the
following information about all of the active logical screens:
v Screen ID (ZSCREEN)
v Screen name
v Panel ID
v Application ID
v Session type (GUI or 3270)
You can select from this list the screen you want to display or start a
new screen or application. The screen you select replaces the screen from
which you issued the command.
Using a listed parameter changes the focus (in GUI mode) or display (in
3270 mode) to the PREVious, NEXT, or specified logical screen.
PREV changes the focus or display to the next lower screen number
until reaching 1, then wraps back to 32 or the last number used.
NEXT displays the next highest screen number until the last number
used is reached (ISPF maximum 32, your installation might vary), then
will wrap back to number 1.
SWAP screen name changes the display or focus to the screen called screen
name, if it is active. See the SCRNAME command for more information
about screen names.
SWAP n, where n is a number, changes the display or focus to the
specified screen number, if it is active.
SWITCH (3270 | GUI)
Switches the mode of screen display between GUI and 3270.
TOP
Alias for the UP MAX command. Scrolls to the top of the data.
TSO
Allows the user to enter a TSO command, CLIST, or REXX command
procedure.
Do not enter the following commands after the TSO command:
v LOGON, LOGOFF
v ISPF, PDF, ISPSTART, and SPF
v TEST
v Commands that are restricted by TSO or PCF
You can enter a CLIST or REXX name after the TSO command, but the
following restrictions apply:
v The CLIST or REXX command procedure cannot invoke the restricted
commands shown in the preceding list.
v Restrictions that apply to CLIST attention exits are described in ISPF
Dialog Developer’s Guide and Reference.
v TERMIN command procedure statements cause unpredictable results.
84
z/OS V1R6.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol I
ISPF System Commands
Table 3. ISPF System Commands (continued)
Command
Description
TSOCMD
Displays the ISPF Command Shell panel.
TSOGUI [ ON | OFF ]
ON specifies that the ISPF/TSO window is resumed and all TSO line
mode output and input is directed to the ISPF/TSO window.
OFF specifies that the ISPF/TSO window is suspended and all fullscreen
and line mode data appears in the 3270 window until TSOGUI ON
command is issued.
TUTOR [panelid]
Calls the ISPTUTOR program to display specified tutorial panels.
To display a particular tutorial panel, enter the TUTOR command along
with the panel identifier of the desired tutorial panel as a parameter.
If you issue the TUTOR command without a parameter, the general
tutorial help panel (ISP00000) is displayed.
UP
Scrolls toward the top of the data.
WINDOW
Moves a pop-up that is currently displayed.
If more than one pop-up is displayed on your logical screen, only the
active (or most recent) pop-up will move.
A pop-up can only be moved within the logical screen from which it
originated.
Note: The WINDOW command is disabled if you are running in GUI
mode.
WS
Modelessly starts the command you specify, providing a seamless
interface between host and workstation applications. For example, when
running in GUI mode, you can enter the following command to invoke a
workstation editor on a file named test.fil: WS e.exe test.fil
WSCON
Displays the Initiate Workstation Connection panel. Using this panel, you
can start a workstation connection. There are some restrictions to
consider if you choose to start a workstation connection with this
command:
v At the completion of ISPF command processing, or program, clist, or
REXX exec execution, ISPF does not reprocess the panel from which
the command was invoked. The panel is simply relaunched to the
screen without processing, for example, the panel’s )INIT section. So,
if certain constructs are defined within the panel sections based on the
ZGUI variable (nonblank indicating connection in GUI mode), these
constructs are not defined properly until after the Enter key is pressed
following the WSCON command.
v When connecting to the workstation in GUI mode, the first panel
displayed in GUI mode might not contain group boxes and images
that are defined on the panel. After you press the Enter key, causing
the panel to be reprocessed, these constructs are visible in GUI mode.
Chapter 4. Using Commands, Function Keys, and Light Pen or Cursor Selection
85
ISPF System Commands
Table 3. ISPF System Commands (continued)
Command
Description
WSDISCON
Disconnects your workstation connection. There are some restrictions to
consider if you choose to disconnect from a workstation with this
command:
v At the completion of ISPF command processing, or program, clist, or
REXX exec execution, ISPF does not reprocess the panel from which
the command was invoked. The panel is simply relaunched to the
screen without processing, for example, the panel’s )INIT section. So,
if certain constructs are defined within the panel sections based on the
ZGUI variable (nonblank indicating connection in GUI mode), these
constructs are not defined properly until after the Enter key is pressed
following the WSDISCON command.
v When disconnecting from GUI mode, the name of any group boxes
defined on the panel from which you issued WSDISCON, will display
on the screen in 3270 mode. After you press the Enter key, causing the
panel to be reprocessed, these names disappear and any panel text
under the names reappears.
v If in GUI mode and in split screen mode when you invoke the
WSDISCON command, you are disconnected from the workstation
and the screen from which you issued WSDISCON is displayed in the
full 3270 emulator session without a split line, regardless of how
“Always show split line” is set. The other ISPF sessions are hidden
and available for display after the swap command is entered.
Additional split requests cause the split line to be redisplayed,
provided the “Always show split line” setting is selected.
v If pop-up windows are displayed in GUI mode when the WSDISCON
command is issued, those pop-up windows are suspended on the 3270
session and the panels display as fullscreen panels. If new addpops
are then invoked, these new panels display as pop-up windows.
v You cannot disconnect using the WSDISCON command when running
in batch GUI mode.
v If the CODEPAGE and CHARSET parameters were specified (on the
WSCON service, the Initiate Workstation Connection panel, or the
ISPSTART GUI statement) when your workstation connection was
made, these values might no longer be the host code page and
character set in 3270 mode following a WSDISCON command. The
values returned from the terminal query are restored as the active
code page and character set. If your emulator does not support code
pages, the CODEPAGE and CHARSET parameter values originally
specified on your ISPSTART statement are used. If these ISPSTART
parameters were not specified, ENGLISH is the default specification.
ZKEYS
Displays a panel that lets you view and change the current function key
variables. This command is equivalent to selecting the Global PF Key
settings choice from the Function keys pull-down on the ISPF Settings
panel.
Using the RETRIEVE, RETF, and RETP Commands
This section describes how to use the RETRIEVE, RETF, and RETP commands.
RETRIEVE Command
The RETRIEVE command causes the most recently entered command to be
displayed on the command line. If the command recalled by RETRIEVE is longer
than the current primary input field, ISPF truncates the command to the size of the
primary input field for display purposes. Only the data displayed in the primary
86
z/OS V1R6.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol I
ISPF System Commands
input field is processed and stored in the command retrieval stack when you press
Enter or a function key. However, the original command retains its full length in
the retrieval stack.
If the current panel has no input fields, then the size of the primary input field is
zero and the retrieved command is not displayed. Normal stack processing occurs,
however, and the internal pointer is incremented to the next saved command. This
can result in an unexpected command being recalled when RETRIEVE is issued on
a subsequent panel that has input fields.
If you issue the RETRIEVE command when the stack is empty, ISPF presents you
with a blank command line with the cursor in the first position. If the stack is not
empty, ISPF places the cursor immediately following the retrieved command.
If you are in the process of recalling a string of commands by issuing successive
RETRIEVE commands, you can cause ISPF to recycle to the top of the command
retrieval stack by pressing Enter when the primary input field (normally the
command line) is blank.
When you are operating in split-screen mode, one stack retains commands for all
logical screens.
There are five cases for which ISPF does not retain an entered command for
retrieval:
v Commands entered using attention fields, such as light pen-selectable fields or
cursor-select fields.
v Commands entered through the use of function keys. This includes any portion
of a compound command that results from pressing a function key. For example,
if you key PAGE into the primary input field and then press the function key set
to the DOWN command, only the PAGE portion of the DOWN PAGE command
is retained as a single element in the retrieval stack. The entire character string
entered from the primary input field in conjunction with a function key is
always retained, whereas any portion of the command resulting from the
function key value is not retained.
v The RETRIEVE command, if entered as a single command. If RETRIEVE is one
of the commands of a chain being processed by ISPF, the entire chain is placed
on the retrieval stack. However, processing of the command chain ends when
ISPF interprets the RETRIEVE command and displays the next command in the
stack. Any commands following RETRIEVE in the chain are not processed.
RETRIEVE can be part of a stack element as a parameter of another command.
For example, you might enter FIND RETRIEVE as a command.
v Commands entered on the COMMAND option of the DISPLAY service.
v Jump function (extended return) commands entered from a nondisplay field.
You can issue any retrieved command, as is, while it is being displayed, or you can
edit the command line and then issue the modified version.
Command retrieval works on a last-in, first-out basis. For example, assume that the
last three commands you have issued are PRINT, DOWN, and RIGHT, in that
order. Now suppose that you want to again issue the PRINT command. Assuming
that F12 is set to RETRIEVE, the sequence of operations is:
1. Press F12. RIGHT displays on the command line.
2. Press F12 again. DOWN displays on the command line.
3. Press F12 a third time. PRINT displays on the command line.
Chapter 4. Using Commands, Function Keys, and Light Pen or Cursor Selection
87
ISPF System Commands
4. Press Enter.
You can also use the RETRIEVE command to check and correct errors made in
keying commands. For example, suppose that you mistakenly enter PFSHOW
TAYLOR. When ISPF advises you that TAYLOR is not a valid parameter, you
would:
1. Press F12. PFSHOW TAYLOR displays on the command line.
2. Type over the Y with an I.
3. Press Enter.
Each ISPF session supports only one command retrieval stack, to be shared by all
logical screens. The number of commands that ISPF saves for retrieval depends on:
v The size of the stack area allocated for this purpose by the installation. Refer to
ISPF Planning and Customizing for the appropriate material on changing the size
of the stack area allocated for RETRIEVE command processing.
v The lengths of the individual command lines that are saved.
As a command is entered, it goes to the top of the stack, pushing all other
commands down. If there is not enough room at the bottom of the stack to hold
the entire bottom command, it is dropped from the stack.
Duplicate commands are allowed in the stack, except when the command being
entered is a duplicate of the command at the top of the stack. All command lines
(except the RETRIEVE command) are placed in the stack as entered, regardless of
validity. Actually, these commands can be any character string, up to 255 bytes
each, entered from the screen’s primary input field (not necessarily the ZCMD
field).
Jump function commands are stored in the stack unless they are entered from a
nondisplay field, regardless of whether the field is the primary input field or not.
If the RETRIEVE command is repeatedly entered until the bottom command in the
stack displays, issuing the RETRIEVE command once more causes the command at
the top of the stack to be displayed again. To force a return to the top of the stack,
clear the command field and press Enter. Then, the next RETRIEVE command
causes the command line to be set to the command at the top of the stack.
RETF Command
The forward retrieve (RETF) command recalls commands from the command
retrieval stack from the oldest command in the stack towards the most recent
commands in the stack. This is useful when you RETRIEVE too many times in an
attempt to retrieve a specific command. RETF enables you to return to the desired
command without having to cycle through the entire retrieval stack.
RETP Command
The retrieve pop-up (RETP) command causes a pop-up panel to be displayed with
the last 20 commands in the command retrieval stack listed. You can select the
command you want to retrieve by number. The selected command is retrieved to
the command line. When using the RETP command, the following considerations
apply:
1. If a command in the command retrieval stack is too long to fit in the retrieve
pop-up, the last visible character of the command is changed to a > to show
that some characters are not displayed. However, the entire command is
retrieved to the command line when it is selected to be retrieved.
2. The default for the minimum number of characters is one, so any command
entered is saved on the retrieval stack. The user has the option of setting the
88
z/OS V1R6.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol I
ISPF System Commands
value from 1–99 for the minimum number of characters to save. Therefore, if
you select three characters for the minimum number to be saved in the
retrieval stack and a one- or two-character command is entered, it is not added
to the retrieval stack. This prevents short commands that can be easily retyped
from taking up space in the retrieval stack. Changing the minimum number of
characters to save in the retrieval stack does not affect commands already in
the retrieval stack. This setting is saved in the variable ZRETMINL, which is
saved in the user’s ISPF system profile table ISPSPROF and across ISPF
invocations.
3. The default for the cursor position when a command is retrieved is at the end
of the command. The cursor position setting is saved in the variable
ZRETPOSC, which is saved in the user’s ISPF system profile table ISPSPROF
and across ISPF invocations.
Using the RETURN Command
The RETURN command causes the immediate return to a primary option menu or
to the display from which you entered a nested dialog. When a RETURN
command is entered, the DM component takes the following action:
1. It simulates the END command on the panel that is currently displayed; that is,
the DISPLAY or TBDISPL service returns a code of 8.
2. For subsequent requests, made through the DISPLAY or TBDISPL service, for
display of a different panel, the panel is not displayed, and a return code of 8
is issued by the service.
3. However, when two consecutive display requests name the same panel, normal
operation of the DISPLAY and TBDISPL services is restored and processing
proceeds as though RETURN had not been entered. The DM component
decides whether to proceed. Generally, because RETURN signals the
application user’s desire to end the current processing, a developer can limit
processing after the RETURN is received to clean up and do final processing
before returning control to the dialog element from which the function was
started.
4. If two consecutive requests do not specify the same panel, processing continues
in the mode described in item 2 until control is returned to a primary option
menu or a nested dialog completes. Then, normal operation of the DISPLAY
and TBDISPL services is restored.
It might be necessary to suspend processing of a panel temporarily so that other
panels can be displayed. Issue a CONTROL DISPLAY SAVE request to save the
contents and control information of the panel whose processing is to be suspended.
Before resuming the processing of this panel, issue CONTROL DISPLAY RESTORE
to reinstate the contents and control information for the panel. If non-ISPF screens
have been displayed, issue CONTROL DISPLAY REFRESH to clear the screen.
This mode of operation continues until either a primary option menu is
encountered or a nested dialog completes. If a primary option menu is
encountered, it is displayed. If a nested dialog completes, the panel from which it
was invoked is redisplayed. This panel is exactly as you last saw it, except that the
command field is blank. In either case, this completes the action of the RETURN
command.
Note: A nested dialog is one invoked from any panel by a SELECT action
command. The HELP and KEYS commands invoke nested dialogs. In
addition, the TSO system commands invoke nested dialogs when they are
used to execute a CLIST procedure that displays panels through ISPF
services.
Chapter 4. Using Commands, Function Keys, and Light Pen or Cursor Selection
89
ISPF System Commands
If a dialog function needs to distinguish between END and RETURN, it can do so
in one of the following ways:
v If the panel was defined using the panel definition statements, upon return from
the DISPLAY or TBDISPL service, with a return code of 8, the function can
examine variable ZVERB in the shared pool. It contains either END or RETURN.
v If the panel was defined using the DTL, upon return from the DISPLAY or
TBDISPL service, with a return code of 8, the function can examine variable
ZVERB in the shared pool. It contains either EXIT or CANCEL.
v Upon return from the SELECT service when the PANEL keyword was specified,
the dialog function can examine the return code from SELECT. Return code 0
indicates that the END command was entered on the selected menu panel.
Return code 4 indicates that the RETURN command was entered on the selected
menu panel or on some lower-level menu.
Using the Jump Function
The jump function allows you to go directly to any valid option from the primary
option menu currently in effect. Refer to ISPF Dialog Developer’s Guide and Reference
for information about coding primary option menus. To use the jump function,
enter the option on the command line or in the command field of any panel,
preceded by an equal sign and followed by a blank. For example:
Command ===> =3.1
takes you directly to the first suboption of option 3 on the primary option menu in
effect.
The action is as follows:
v If not entered on a primary option menu, the jump function causes repeated
END commands to be simulated until a primary option menu is encountered.
What follows the equal sign is then used on the primary option menu, and
pressing of the Enter key is simulated. The primary option menu is not
displayed.
v If entered on a primary option menu, the jump function equal sign is ignored
and the specified option is selected.
Unlike the RETURN command, the jump function is not affected by nested dialogs.
For example, from the ISPF Edit option, you enter a HELP command to enter the
tutorial. Then from the tutorial, you enter =1. This causes the tutorial to end, Edit
to end, and primary option 1 to be started.
For convenience, you can enter a jump function in two other places:
v Any field that is preceded by an arrow. The arrow must consist of at least two
equal signs followed by a greater-than sign (==>). Also, the arrow must
immediately precede the input attribute byte.
v Any field preceded by leader dots (that is, ... or . .). ISPF looks at the three
characters preceding the field; they must be either three consecutive dots or two
dots separated by a blank.
The command field is the only field that can be initialized to =n by the dialog and
have the jump function recognize it. Modifying the ZCMD field in the )PROC or
)INIT section can affect jump function operation.
If ISPF encounters an error during jump function processing, the processing stops
with the jump function in error displayed on the command line, unless that
function was entered from a nondisplay field.
90
z/OS V1R6.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol I
ISPF System Commands
Because a jump request generally signals a user’s desire to end the current
processing, the dialog developer must limit processing to cleaning up and
completing processing before returning control to the selection in the jump request.
Otherwise, the dialog developer can cancel the jump request/return mode by
providing two consecutive displays with the same panel name.
For compatibility with the SPF licensed program, the jump function can be entered
in conjunction with the RETURN command or RETURN function key. For example,
you type =2 and then press the RETURN function key rather than pressing Enter.
The action is just the same as if you had typed =2 and pressed Enter.
Using the Scrolling Commands
You can use the scrolling commands if the dialog function invokes the DISPLAY
service for panels with scrollable areas or scrollable dynamic areas, the table
display service (TBDISPL), or the interfaces to the PDF component VIEW,
BROWSE, and EDIT services. During processing of the tutorial, ISPF interprets
these commands as follows:
UP (F7/19)
Same as the UP command
DOWN (F8/20)
Same as the SKIP command
LEFT (F10/22)
Same as the BACK command
RIGHT (F11/23)
Same as the Enter key (display the next page).
When scrollable data is displayed, scrolling enables you to move the screen window
up, down, left, or right across the information. When the cursor is within a
scrollable field, scrolling enables you to move left or right within the variable data.
Only up and down scrolling is allowed for table displays and scrollable areas.
When scrolling is allowed, a scroll amount is commonly displayed at the top of the
screen (line 2). This amount determines the number of lines, or columns, scrolled
with each use of a scroll command. To change the scroll amount, move the cursor
to the scroll field and type over the displayed amount. Valid scroll amounts are:
ZXSMIN–ZXSMAX
The minimum and maximum scroll values as defined in the configuration
table. The defaults are 0–9999. Specifies the number of lines (up or down)
or columns (left or right) to be scrolled.
Note: If you specify a scroll amount of 0, no scrolling occurs.
PAGE Specifies scrolling by one page.
For scrolling purposes, a page is defined as the amount of information
currently visible on the logical screen. Function key definition lines are not
a part of the page. In split-screen mode, for example, a Browse display
might have 12 lines by 80 columns of scrollable data. In this case, a scroll
amount of PAGE moves the text up or down by 12 lines, or right or left by
80 columns. If the cursor is within a scrollable field, PAGE will move the
text right or left the equivalent of the display field length.
DATA For up and down scrolling, specifies scrolling by one line less than a page.
For left and right scrolling, it is one column less than a page. Within a
scrollable field, it is one column less than the display field length.
HALF Specifies scrolling by half a page. Within a scrollable field, it is half the
display field length.
MAX
Specifies scrolling to the top, bottom, left margin, right margin, beginning
of field or end of field, depending upon which scrolling command is used
Chapter 4. Using Commands, Function Keys, and Light Pen or Cursor Selection
91
ISPF System Commands
and the current cursor position. For scrollable fields, the maximum right
position is the field length minus the display length and the maximum left
position is 1.
CSR
Specifies scrolling based on the current position of the cursor. The line or
column indicated by the cursor is moved to the top, bottom, left margin, or
right margin of the screen, depending upon which scrolling command is
used. If the cursor is not in the body of the data or if it is already
positioned at the top, bottom, left margin, or right margin, a full-page
scroll occurs.
Note: Scroll amount is not used for scrollable areas.
The current scroll amount is saved in the application profile. There are three scroll
amount values: one for Browse (ZSCBR), one for Edit and View (ZSCED), and one
for member lists (ZSCML). When you type over the scroll amount, the new value
remains in effect until you change it again. The value MAX is an exception.
Following a MAX scroll, the scroll amount reverts to its previous value.
The scroll amount field is optional. If the input field following the command field
in the panel body is exactly four characters long, it is assumed to be the scroll
amount field. If there Otherwise, the system variable ZSCROLLD, which can be set
by the dialog, is used to determine the default scroll amount. is no scroll amount
field and ZSCROLLD has not been set, the default is PAGE.
When you enter a scroll request, the variables ZSCROLLA and ZSCROLLN are set.
ZSCROLLA contains the value of the scroll amount field, such as MAX or CSR.
ZSCROLLN contains the number of lines or columns to scroll, computed from the
value in the scroll amount field. For example, if a dialog is in split-screen mode, 12
lines are currently visible and you request DOWN HALF, ZSCROLLN contains a 6.
The system variable ZVERB contains the scroll direction (DOWN in this case). If
the value of ZSCROLLA is MAX, the value of ZSCROLLN is not ignored.
You can also use any valid scroll amount as part of the scroll command. For
example, type:
Command ===> UP 3
and press Enter, or type:
Command ===> 3
and press the UP function key. Either form results in a temporary, one-time
override of the scroll amount.
If ISPF does not recognize the value specified on the command line as a valid
scroll amount, such as PAGE, DATA, HALF, MAX, CSR, or a positive integer, the
value is interpreted as a command and passed to the function in control.
Using the EXPAND Command
The expand panel displays the variable in a scrollable dynamic area. Standard up
and down scrolling is supported. You can display the variable in character and
hexadecimal using the following primary command. The setting will be
remembered for subsequent expand processing.
HEX ON/OFF Turn hexadecimal display on and off.
92
z/OS V1R6.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol I
ISPF System Commands
Using Command Tables to Define Commands
ISPF implements system, user, site and application commands through the use of
command tables.
A system command table (ISPCMDS) is distributed with ISPF in the table input
library. An application can provide an application command table by including a
table named xxxxCMDS in its table input library, where xxxx is a 1- to 4-character
application ID. You can also add up to 3 user command tables and up to 3 site
command tables to the ISPF Configuration table. This is a permanent place for
your set of user-defined commands. When IBM updates the ISPF command table,
you do not need to re-add your commands. By setting the Before or After option,
you can search the site command tables either before or after the ISP command
table. The default option is Before. If the application’s table input library is defined
with the LIBDEF service, the LIBDEF must be active when the SELECT service call
that invokes the application is issued, and the PASSLIB parameter must be
specified.
You can define an application command table using either:
v The command table utility described in the Command Table Utility (Option 3.9)
section of the ISPF User’s Guide Volume II.
v The Dialog Tag Language (DTL) and ISPF conversion utility. Refer to the ISPF
Dialog Tag Language Guide and Reference for the tags you must use.
When a user enters a command, the DM component searches the application
command table (if any), then the user command tables (if any), then the site
command tables (if any), and finally the system command table, ISPCMDS. This is
the default search order, which assumes the option Before for the site command
tables. If you choose the option After for these tables, they are searched after
ISPCMDS. If it finds the command, action is taken immediately. If it does not find
the command in the application or system tables, the command is passed to the
dialog, unaltered, in the command field. The dialog must then take appropriate
action.
Command Table Format
A command table is an ISPF table in which each row contains the specification for
one command. Each column contains a variable for the command. The variables
are:
ZCTVERB
Specifies the name of the command. A command name must be
from 2–8 characters long and must begin with an alphabetic
character. Note that the terms command name and command verb are
synonymous and are used interchangeably.
ZCTTRUNC
Specifies the minimum number of characters that you must enter
to find a match with the command name. If this number is zero or
equal to the length of the name, you must enter the entire name.
This number must not be one, or be greater than the length of the
name.
ZCTACT
Specifies the action to be performed when the command specified
in ZCTVERB is entered. Can be up to 240 characters.
ZCTDESC
Contains a brief description of the purpose of the command. This
variable is optional. It is not used by the DM component in
processing the command, but it is displayed by the command table
utility. The description is limited to 80 characters.
Chapter 4. Using Commands, Function Keys, and Light Pen or Cursor Selection
93
ISPF System Commands
The dialog manager treats ZCTVERB, ZCTTRUNC, ZCTACT, and ZCTDESC as
defined function variables. They are not accessible to dialogs.
The valid actions that can be performed (ZCTACT) are:
SELECT
Followed by selection keywords causes the selected dialog
(command, program, or menu) to be given control immediately.
ALIAS
Followed by another command and any parameters allows
specification of command aliases.
PASSTHRU
Causes the command to be passed to the dialog instead of
continuing to search the system table.
SETVERB
Causes the command to be passed to the dialog with the command
verb stored in ZVERB separately from the parameters. The ISPF
system commands distributed with the product that have
SETVERB as an action are not always passed through to the dialog.
Refer to “Passing Commands to a Dialog Function” on page 98 for
further discussion.
NOP
Causes the command to be inactive. ISPF displays an inactive
command message in this case.
Blank (no action)
Causes the table entry to be ignored. Scanning continues, searching
for additional entries with the same name.
A variable name
The name begins with an ampersand and can be one of the actions
described in this list. This allows dynamic specification of
command action.
Additional action keywords are used to indicate system commands for which
special processing is required. These are CURSOR, PRINT, PRINTG, PRINT-HI,
PRINTL, PRINTLHI, SPLIT, SPLITV, SWAP, and RETRIEVE. Although these are
valid actions, they are intended for use only in the system command table
distributed with ISPF and are intended to be used only with the associated
command verb. They are not intended for use in application command tables.
Customizing the ISPCMDS Command Table
Use the following steps to customize your ISPCMDS command table:
1. Copy the ISPCMDS into a data set concatenated before the ’*.SISPTENU’ data
set in the ISPTLIB DD statement.
v Name the new member using a unique prefix of up to 4 characters, for
example: RSMCMDS or MOD1CMDS.
v Allocate the copied-to data set to the ISPTABL DD card. You can use the
following CLIST to do a LIBDEF against ISPTABL if you have a ISPTABL DD
allocated:
PROC 0
ISPEXEC LIBDEF ISPTABL DATASET ID(the_dataset_name)
WRITE &LASTCC
END
If your logon procedure does not allocate an ISPTABL DD card:
PROC 0
ALLOC F(ISPTABL) DA(the_dataset_name)
END
2. Using option 3.9, customize this member with your new commands.
94
z/OS V1R6.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol I
ISPF System Commands
v Option 3.9 will search the ISPTLIB DD for this member.
v Option 3.9 will save (UPDATE) this customized member to the output data
set pointed to by ISPTABL.
3. After you have customized this member, you can use option 3.1 or 3.4 member
list to rename this member to ISPCMDS.
4. Exit ISPF.
v This will nullify the LIBDEF on ISPTABL.
5. Re-invoke ISPF.
v When ISPF searches the ISPTLIB DD concatenation, your customized
ISPCMDS will be found first.
SELECT Action Commands Temporarily Invoke a New Dialog
A SELECT action command can be specified in a command table. The action is
coded exactly the same as for the SELECT service. All SELECT keywords are valid,
including NEWAPPL.
The selected dialog is started immediately when a SELECT action command is
entered on the command line of any panel. This temporarily suspends the current
dialog. When the selected dialog completes, the screen is refreshed and the
suspended dialog resumes.
Examples of SELECT action commands:
ZCTVERB
UPDATE
PREPARE
MENU
ZCTTRUNC
0
4
4
ZCTACT
SELECT PGM(PQRUPDT) PARM(&ZPARM)
SELECT CMD(XPREP &ZPARM) NEWPOOL
SELECT PANEL(&ZPARM)
In the example, the ZCTTRUNC variable indicates that the UPDATE and MENU
command names cannot be truncated. PREPARE, however, can be truncated to
PREPAR, PREPA, or PREP. The functions and keywords in the ZCTACT field
indicate the actions that the commands perform.
The ZPARM variable that appears in the SELECT keywords indicates that
command parameters are to be substituted at that point. For example, if the
following commands were entered:
===> UPDATE BLDG DEPT NAME
===> PREPA LOG LISTING
===> MENU PQRMENU1
the following SELECT actions would result:
SELECT PGM(PQRUPDT) PARM(BLDG DEPT NAME)
SELECT CMD(XPREP LOG LISTING) NEWPOOL
SELECT PANEL(PQRMENU1)
ZPARM, a dummy variable, is used only to substitute user-entered parameters into
SELECT action commands. It is not stored in a variable pool and is not accessible
to dialogs.
Notes:
1. Take care with ACTIONs that use ZPARM, as the ISPF parser will add a
matching parenthesis if one appears to be missing. Consider an entry of
″SELECT CMD(%CMD &ZPARM) NEWAPPL(ISR)″. If ″(XYZ″ is passed then
the command will receive ″(XYZ) NEWAPPL(ISR)″ as a parameter.
Chapter 4. Using Commands, Function Keys, and Light Pen or Cursor Selection
95
ISPF System Commands
2. Use of SELECT action commands can cause recursive entry into dialog
functions, which the DM component allows. The dialog developer should either
design functions for recursive use or display a message if a user attempts to
reenter a nonrecursive function.
The ISPF DISPLAY and TBDISPL services can be used recursively. The current
display environment is automatically saved whenever a SELECT action command
is entered and is restored upon completion of the command.
Assigning Command Aliases
A command alias is an alternate way of expressing a command. For example, you
might assign to the command UP MAX an alias of TOP to make it easier to
remember and to issue. In the case of a command that includes lengthy
parameters, using an alias can be a much more efficient way of entering the
command. Also, using aliases can be helpful for writing dialogs in languages for
which single words can meaningfully replace multiword command-parameter
expressions. Normally, alias entries are used in an application command table to
refer to system commands, which might or might not include parameter fields.
Issuing the command or its alias causes the same result.
An alias must precede, in the command table, any reference to the command to
which it refers. You can establish an alias by setting values in two command table
variables. Set:
v ZCTVERB to the value you wish to use as the alias for an existing command
v ZCTACT to the keyword ALIAS followed by the command, including any
parameters, for which you are establishing the alias. Thus, the value of the
ZCTACT variable can be either a single-word command, such as HELP, or it can
be a multipart command, such as UP MAX.
You can set the value of ZCTTRUNC in the command table to the minimum
number of characters of the alias name that must be entered. For example, for the
alias FORWARD, if you set ZCTTRUNC to a value of 3, issuing the first three
characters (or more) has the same effect as issuing FORWARD. If you assign a
value of 0 in the ZCTTRUNC field, the complete alias name must be issued.
The maximum length of the value you can specify in ZCTACT, including the
keyword ALIAS, followed by a blank, and the command verb plus any parameters,
is 240 characters. This leaves a maximum of 234 characters for the command, at
least one blank following the command, and any parameters. ISPF interprets up to
the first 8 characters in the command name. ISPF issues an error message for
command names that do not contain from 2–8 characters.
Any parameters included in the ZCTACT command table field take precedence
over any parameters included with that command’s alias issued from a command
line. Thus, if you issue a command alias that includes parameters, ISPF:
v Recognizes the command alias verb
v Ignores the parameters you specified with the alias
v Substitutes the parameters included with the command verb in ZCTACT.
If the command verb in ZCTACT does not include parameters, ISPF accepts
parameters specified with the command’s alias from a command line. This can be
useful when a command’s parameters do not fit into the 240 character spaces
available in ZCTACT.
You can create a chain of command-parameter aliases in a command table as long
as the result is a valid executable action. The last command verb and parameter
96
z/OS V1R6.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol I
ISPF System Commands
values that ISPF encounters in the alias chain within the command table are the
ones that are executed. The command verb and the parameter values do not
necessarily come from the same table entry. For example:
ZCTVERB
EASYKEY
CMD
CMD1
ZCTTRUNC
0
0
0
ZCTACT
ALIAS CMD PARM1 PARM2
ALIAS CMD1 PARM3
ALIAS CMD2
In this example, if you entered EASYKEY from a command line, the command that
would ultimately be executed would be CMD2 PARM3.
Some other examples of defining alias values are:
ZCTVERB
QUIT
FORWARD
*TOP
*BACKWARD
*ENDFILE
*LOW
ZCTTRUNC
0
3
0
0
4
0
ZCTACT
ALIAS END
ALIAS DOWN
ALIAS BACKWARD MAX
ALIAS UP
ALIAS LOW
ALIAS DOWN MAX
*These four entries represent two-level chaining.
This example defines QUIT as an alias of END, FORWARD as an alias of DOWN,
and so on. For example, if you enter QUIT, the system responds as though you
had entered END.
Looking at the two-level chaining examples, if you enter TOP, ISPF responds as
though you had entered UP MAX. This is because, at the second level when
BACKWARD is replaced with UP, there is no second-level parameter to replace
MAX. In the case of ENDFILE, ISPF responds as though you had entered DOWN
MAX. ISPF replaces the verb LOW with DOWN and the blank parameter value
with MAX.
Note: Command aliases shipped with ISPF in table ISPCMDS include TOP (UP
MAX), BOTTOM (DOWN MAX), BACKWARD (UP), and FORWARD
(DOWN).
Overriding System Commands
An application can override any system command simply by including the same
command name in the application command table. For example:
ZCTVERB
HELP
TSO
ZCTTRUNC
0
0
ZCTACT
PASSTHRU
NOP
In this example, the dialog has overridden both the HELP and TSO commands.
During ISPF processing, if you enter HELP, the command is passed to the dialog
function in control, which determines the action to be taken. The action specified
for the TSO command is NOP, which disables the TSO command. ISPF displays an
inactive command message when a NOP action command has been processed.
Chapter 4. Using Commands, Function Keys, and Light Pen or Cursor Selection
97
ISPF System Commands
Passing Commands to a Dialog Function
Any command that is not found in the application or system command table is
passed, unaltered in the command field, to the dialog. This occurs regardless of
whether the command was typed in the command field or entered by use of a
function key or the attention field.
You can force a command to be passed to the dialog, even if the command exists
in the command table, by typing a greater-than symbol (>) in front of the
command.
Any command in the command table that has an action of PASSTHRU is processed
as though the command were not found in the table. It is passed in the command
field to the dialog.
Commands can also be passed to the dialog using the SETVERB action. This action
causes the dialog manager to separate the name from the command parameters, if
any. The command is stored in variable ZVERB, which is in the shared pool. The
left-justified command parameters are passed in the command field to the dialog.
For example:
ZCTVERB
QUERY
ZCTTRUNC
0
ZCTACT
SETVERB
The verb QUERY is stored in variable ZVERB and the character string, such as
DEPT 877 in the following examples, is passed in the command field.
The following actions produce the same results:
v Typing QUERY DEPT 877 in the command field and pressing Enter.
v Typing DEPT 877 in the command field and pressing a function key that has been
equated to the character string QUERY.
v Pressing a function key that has been equated to the character string QUERY DEPT
877.
v Using the light pen or cursor-select key to select an attention field that contains
the character string QUERY DEPT 877.
The following system commands, distributed with the DM component, are defined
as SETVERB action commands:
END
RETURN
RFIND
RCHANGE
UP
DOWN
LEFT
RIGHT
The ZVERB variable can be used to distinguish between END and RETURN. The
effect of END and RETURN on the DISPLAY service is the same because RETURN
is used to simulate repeated END commands, until a primary option menu is
reached.
RFIND and RCHANGE are used only by ISPF View, Browse, and Edit. Thus, these
commands are not passed back to a user dialog in ZVERB.
98
z/OS V1R6.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol I
ISPF System Commands
The commands UP, DOWN, LEFT, and RIGHT are only active when a scrollable
panel is displayed. Use of these commands from a nonscrollable panel results in a
command is not active message.
Specifying Command Actions Dynamically
You can specify a command action dynamically (as part of function processing) by
the use of a dialog variable. A variable action can be used to share commands, such
as UP, DOWN, LEFT, and RIGHT, with the DM component. It can also be used to
enable or disable commands during certain points in the dialog. Suppose, for
example, an application command table includes the following entries:
ZCTVERB
UP
DOWN
ZCTTRUNC
0
0
ZCTACT
&SCRVERT
&SCRVERT
You can use the variable SCRVERT to dynamically control the action of the UP and
DOWN vertical scroll commands as follows:
v If SCRVERT is set to NOP, the commands are not available.
v If SCRVERT is set to PASSTHRU, the commands are passed to the dialog.
v If SCRVERT is set to blank, command scanning continues. In this case, the
system definitions for UP and DOWN in the system command table take effect.
v If SCRVERT is set to an action that is not valid, the commands are not available,
as in NOP.
For this particular example, setting SCRVERT to SETVERB would have the same
effect as setting it to blank, because UP and DOWN are defined in the system
command table as SETVERB action commands.
If the dialog overrides or shares the use of the scroll commands, it becomes that
dialog’s responsibility to ensure that the commands have been redefined with an
action of blank, or with SETVERB. This must be done before starting any ISPF
function that requires View, Browse, Edit, and Table Display. The same rule applies
to the RFIND command used by Browse and Edit and the RCHANGE command
used by Edit.
Using a Function Key
Under ISPF, function keys are not automatically assigned to special functions. You
equate each function key to a character string. When you press a function key, it
simulates command entry. The processing is the same as if you had typed the
character string in the command field and pressed the Enter key.
Note: On a 3270 display, the horizontal divider line that separates the logical
screens is not considered part of either logical screen. If the cursor is placed
on this horizontal divider line and a function key is pressed, the result is the
same as if the ENTER key was pressed and the cursor is positioned on the
active logical screen’s command line.
A dialog function cannot distinguish the difference between a command entered by
a function key and a command entered by typing in the command field. If the
character string with which the function key is equated is longer than the screen’s
command field, the string is truncated without warning.
Chapter 4. Using Commands, Function Keys, and Light Pen or Cursor Selection
99
Using a Function Key
If you type information on the command line and then press a function key, the
function key definition, followed by a blank, is concatenated ahead of the contents
of the command field. For example, suppose F7 is equated to the character string
UP. If you type 4 in the command field and then press F7, the results are exactly
the same as if you had typed UP 4 in the command field and pressed the Enter
key.
ISPF does not require function keys for its operation. Commands can be entered in
the command field of any display, including View, Browse, Edit, and Table Display.
However, for ease of use, function keys are strongly recommended.
The default function key assignments distributed with ISPF for the 3x4 key pad on
the right side of the keyboard are shown in Table 4. These are function keys 1–12
on a 12-key terminal or keys 13–24 on a 24-key terminal.
Table 4. Function Key Arrangement
F1
HELP
F2
SPLIT
F3
END
F4
RETURN
F5
RFIND
F6
RCHANGE
F7
UP
F8
DOWN
F9
SWAP
F10
LEFT
F11
RIGHT
F12
RETRIEVE
Function keys can be displayed at the bottom of a panel. Using the FKA or
PFSHOW command, you can display either the long or short form of the keys, or
remove the keys from the panel. See “ISPF System Commands” on page 72 for a
complete description of how to display or remove the function keys.
For panels defined without the )PANEL section, the long and short form of the
function key area is the same. If you use a )PANEL section, you can use the
KEYLIST command or the Keylist settings... choice from the Function keys
pull-down on the ISPF Settings panel to determine which keys appear in each
form. For more information on Keylist settings, see the ’Settings (Option 0)’ chapter
of the ISPF User’s Guide Volume II.
Long
Displays the keys that appear in the short form along with all other keys
you indicated should appear for the long form. The long form is the
default. An example of the long form follows:
Option ===>
F1=Help
F2=Split
F10=Actions F12=Cancel
Short
100
F3=Exit
F7=Backward F8=Forward
F9=Swap
Displays the keys that appear in the short form. An example of the short
form follows:
z/OS V1R6.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol I
Using a Function Key
Option ===>
F1=Help
No
F3=Exit
F10=Actions F12=Cancel
Removes the function key area, making the space available for the
application. The keys are still active but are not displayed.
Defining Function Key Values
You can define function key values three ways:
v Use the KEYS command to display the Keylist Utility panel or the PF Key
Definitions and Labels panel, then change the function keys for the panel you
are on.
v Use the ZKEYS command or select the Non-Keylist PF Key settings choice from
the Function keys pull-down on the ISPF Settings panel. Use this method to
define the function keys when the )PANEL statement has been coded on the
panel. All DTL-generated panels have a )PANEL statement. For more
information on working with Function Keys and Keylists, see the ’Settings
(Option 0)’ chapter of the ISPF User’s Guide Volume II.
v Use the KEYLIST command or select the Keylist settings... choice from the
Function keys pull-down on the ISPF Settings panel. Use this method to define
the function keys when the application panels are defined with the DTL. For
more information on Keylist settings, see the ’Settings (Option 0)’ chapter of the
ISPF User’s Guide Volume II.
Changing the Format of the Function Key Area
The FKA and PFSHOW commands let you change the visual display of the
function keys on a panel. You can display the keys in long form or short form, or
remove them completely. You can also use the PFSHOW command with the
TAILOR parameter or the Tailor function key display... choice from the Function
keys pull-down on the ISPF Settings panel to display the Tailor Function Key
Definition Display panel shown in Figure 28 on page 102.
Chapter 4. Using Commands, Function Keys, and Light Pen or Cursor Selection
101
Using a Function Key
┌───────────────────────────── ISPF Settings ─────────────────────────────┐
s │
Tailor Function Key Definition Display
│
│
│
│ For all terminals:
│
O │ Number of keys . . 2 1. 12
│
│
2. 24
│
│
│
│ Keys per line . . . 1 1. Six
│
│
2. Maximum possible
│
│
│
│ Primary range . . . 1 1. Lower - 1 to 12
│
│
2. Upper - 13 to 24
│
│
│
│ For terminals with 24 PF keys:
│
│ Display set . . . . 1 1. Primary - display keys 1 to 12
│
│
2. Alternate - display keys 13 to 24
│
│
3. All - display all keys
│
│
│
│ Press ENTER key to save changes. Enter END to save changes and exit. │
T │
│
│
│
│ Command ===>
│
C │ F1=Help
F3=Exit
F12=Cancel
│
└─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘
Figure 28. Tailor Function Key Definition Display Panel (ISPOPFA)
This panel lets you select:
v The number of function keys available for display.
See the ’Tailor Function Key Definition Display’ section of the ’Settings (Option
0)’ chapter of ISPF User’s Guide Volume II for a discussion of the rules governing
the number of keys available for display.
v The number of keys per line to display in each function key definition line.
System variable ZPFFMT holds the value selected.
Choice
Six
Maximum possible
Description
Always displays six keys per line
Displays as many keys as will fit
on each line.
ZPFFMT value
SIX
MAX
Note: The Maximum possible option is forced when you select the Panel display
CUA mode option on the ISPF Settings panel.
v The set of function keys that are to be the primary and alternate keys. System
variable ZPRIKEYS holds the value selected.
Choice
Lower - 1 to 12
Upper - 13 to 24
Description
Primary keys are 1–12
Primary keys are 13–24.
ZPRIKEYS value
LOW
UPP
The default value is Lower - 1 to 12.
v The set of function keys on terminals with 24 function keys for which definitions
are to be displayed. System variable ZPFSET holds the value selected.
Choice
Primary - display keys 1 to 12
Alternate - display keys 13 to 24
All - display all keys
102
z/OS V1R6.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol I
Description
Primary set (1–12)
Alternate set (13–24)
All keys (1–24).
ZPFSET value
PRI
ALT
ALL
Using a Function Key
ISPF ignores these values for terminals with only 12 function keys.
Variables ZPFFMT, ZPRIKEYS, and ZPFSET are stored in the application profile
pool. Dialogs can set these values directly by using the VPUT statement in a panel
definition, or by using the VPUT service in a dialog function.
Dialog developers can control how the PFSHOW command behaves by using the
ZPFCTL system variable. ZPFCTL is also stored in the application profile pool. Its
possible values are:
USER The user can control the display of function key definition lines by using
the PFSHOW command. This is the default value.
ON
ISPF unconditionally displays function key definitions on all panels.
Issuing PFSHOW OFF, FKA OFF, or toggling to the no display setting
causes ISPF to issue an error message.
OFF
ISPF does not display function key definition lines. If PFSHOW ON,
PFSHOW TAILOR, FKA ON, or toggling to the long or short form setting
of either command is issued, ISPF displays an error message.
Applications can set the ZPFCTL variable value to either USER, ON, or OFF by
using the VPUT service or by using a VPUT statement with the PROFILE
keyword.
Note: The ZPFCTL variable is ignored if the PFSHOW/FKA command is invoked
from a panel containing a )PANEL statement or if the panel was created
using DTL.
Similarly, keylists can be controlled to some degree by the application.
The ZKLUSE can be set to Y or N. If KEYLIST is ON, the value in ZKLUSE in the
application profile is Y. If KEYLIST is OFF, it is N. If an application VPUTs the
variable to the application profile, the keylist setting is altered.
The following variables can be used by an application to determine what keylist is
being used, and where it comes from.
v ZKLNAME - If KEYLIST is ON and it is a panel with the )PANEL statement,
ZKLNAME contains the name of the keylist currently being used. Otherwise it is
blank.
v ZKLAPPL - If KEYLIST is ON and it is a panel with the )PANEL statement,
ZKLAPPL contains the application ID that the keylist currently being used came
from. Otherwise it is blank.
v ZKLTYPE - If KEYLIST is ON and it is a panel with the )PANEL statement,
ZKLTYPE contains either P (private) or S (shared), depending on the keylist
currently being used. Otherwise it is blank.
Function key definitions appear at the bottom of each logical screen. There can be
more than one logical screen, such as when you are using the split-screen function.
If the application has not issued an ADDPOP service call, ISPF displays no more
than four function key definition lines on one panel. If the application has issued
an ADDPOP service call and the set of keys to be displayed is primary or
alternate, ISPF displays no more than two lines. If all of the keys are to be
displayed, no more than four lines appear. If all of the keys will not fit on the
lines, ISPF wraps the keys and truncates the last keys.
Chapter 4. Using Commands, Function Keys, and Light Pen or Cursor Selection
103
Using a Function Key
Saving Function Key Definitions
This section applies only if you created your application panels using the ISPF
panel definition statements and used the ZKEYS command or selected the Global
PF Key settings choice from the Function keys pull-down on the ISPF Settings
panel. It does not apply for keys defined with the KEYLIST command or through
the Keylist settings... choice from the Function keys pull-down on the ISPF
Settings panel.
Function key definitions are kept in a set of system variables named ZPF01, ZPF02,
... ZPF24. Labels are kept in a set of system variables named ZPFL01, ZPFL02, ...
ZPFL24.
When you set the Primary range field on the Tailor Function Key Definition
Display panel to Upper - 13 to 24, variables ZPF13–ZPF24 and ZPFL13–ZPFL24
contain the primary PF key definitions and labels. For 24-key terminals, these
definitions correspond to physical keys 13–24. For 12-key terminals, these
definitions correspond to physical keys 1–12. Variables ZPF01–ZPF12 contain the
alternate key definitions, and are meaningful only for terminals with 24 function
keys.
When you set the Primary range field on the Tailor Function Key Definition
Display panel to Lower - 1 to 12, variables ZPF01–ZPF12 and ZPFL01–ZPFL12
contain the primary PF key definitions and labels. For 24-key terminals, these
definitions correspond to physical keys 1–12. For 12-key terminals, these definitions
correspond to physical keys 1–12. Variables ZPF13–ZPF24 contain the alternate key
definitions and are meaningful only for terminals with 24 function keys.
Current values for all 24 keys (variables ZPF01–ZPF24 and ZPFL01–ZPFL24) are
kept in the application profile. Hence, unique function key definitions can be
associated with different applications.
An application can provide default function key settings for a new user by
providing a default profile. An application can prevent the user from changing the
default function key settings by overriding the ZKEYS command. It does this by
assigning the command to NOP in the application command table.
Using the Light Pen and Cursor-Select Key
ISPF permits fields on a panel to be detected with a light pen or the cursor-select
key. The cursor-select key is a hardware feature on 3179, 3179G, 3180, 3278, 3279,
and 3290 terminals. Only the attention mode of light pen selection is used.
Panel fields that are detectable by light pen or cursor selection can simulate a
command entry, or give you an alternate means of selecting options from a menu.
Each field must be defined as an attention field. Use an attribute character that has
been defined with the ATTN(ON) keyword. The panel designer must provide the
number of blank characters that are required by the terminal hardware before and
after the attention attribute character.
Processing of light pen or cursor-selected fields is handled in much the same way
as function key processing. The entire contents of the selected field are treated as a
command and processed as though they had been typed into the command field. If
the command is found in the tables, it is performed immediately. If the command
is not found in the tables, it is inserted into the command field, and the entire
command field is passed to the dialog. But unlike function keys, information in the
command field is not concatenated with the contents of the attention field. They
104
z/OS V1R6.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol I
Using the Light Pen and Cursor Select Key
should not be used on data entry panels, because any information that is typed in
an input field, including command fields, is lost when the attention occurs.
Attention fields can be used on a menu to simulate option selection. The panel
designer must truncate any unwanted characters resulting from an attention entry
into the command field. An example is shown in Figure 29.
)ATTR
$ TYPE(TEXT) ATTN(ON)
)BODY
%------------------------------- SOME MENU ------------------------------%SELECT OPTION ===>_ZCMD
+
%
$ 1 - BROWSE +DISPLAY SOURCE DATA OR LISTINGS
$ 2 - QUERY
+FIND OUT INFORMATION ABOUT SOMETHING
.
.
.
)PROC
&ZCMD = TRUNC (&ZCMD, ’ ’)
&ZSEL = TRANS (TRUNC (&ZCMD, ’.’)
1, ’PGM(ISPBRO)’
2, ’PANEL(XYZ)’
.
.
.
Figure 29. Use of Light Pen Attribute
In Figure 29 a light pen or cursor-selection of the first option would place the
character string 1 – BROWSE in the ZCMD field and simulate the Enter key. In the
)PROC section, the contents of the ZCMD field are truncated at the first blank
before the ZSEL variable is set, based on a translation of the ZCMD field.
Panels that are shipped with the ISPF product do not contain the ATTN(ON)
keyword in the attribute section. If light pen or cursor selection is used, it is the
user’s responsibility to add the ATTN(ON) keyword to the attribute section of the
desired panel. Refer to the ISPF Dialog Developer’s Guide and Reference for complete
descriptions of the various panel sections.
How Program Access (PA) Keys Affect ISPF Operation
The two Program Access (PA) keys are defined as follows. These definitions cannot
be changed.
ATTENTION (PA1)
Normally, you should not use this key while you are in ISPF full-screen
mode. The text following discusses exceptions.
RESHOW (PA2)
Redisplays the contents of the screen. PA2 can be useful if you have
pressed the ERASE INPUT or CLEAR key accidentally or have typed
unwanted information but not yet pressed the Enter key or a function key.
Generally, PA1 is used to terminate TSO commands or CLISTs running under ISPF.
However, some TSO commands and CLISTs process PA1 in their own way.
Notes:
1. If you are running in GUI mode, you must switch back to your host session to
process PA1.
Chapter 4. Using Commands, Function Keys, and Light Pen or Cursor Selection
105
Using the Light Pen and Cursor Select Key
2. If you are running in GUI mode, you must press Alt-Home (that is, hold down
the Alt key and press the Home key) to process PA2 from the GUI display.
Restrictions that apply to CLIST attention exits are described in the ISPF Dialog
Developer’s Guide and Reference. Also, ISPF should not be started from a CLIST that
contains an attention exit because results are unpredictable.
If PA1 is pressed while ISPF is in full-screen mode after the keyboard has been
unlocked, it is treated as a RESHOW request. If PA1 is pressed again, the current
function is terminated and either the primary option menu or a top-level selection
panel supplied by the dialog developer is displayed.
When an ISPF function is running, if the RESET key is pressed to unlock the
keyboard and PA1 is pressed, ISPF attempts to terminate the current function and
redisplay the primary option menu. The attempt might not always be successful;
for example, if there is an error in MVS allocation, the attempt fails. A failure
might cause unpredictable results such as waits, loops, abends, or incorrect and
unrelated error messages.
AUTOTYPE - Automatic Data Set Name and Member Name Completion
The AUTOTYPE function is not available on all ISPF panels. It works only on
panels that are specifically written to understand it.
If you assign the value of AUTOTYPE to a function key, you can type a partial
name into a library, member, or data set name field, then press the function key to
have ISPF complete the name for you.
AUTOTYPE automatically searches the catalog or PDS directory to find names that
match what you entered. You can even type a pattern to limit the names that
AUTOTYPE will return. AUTOTYPE works only on panels that have been enabled
to use the function. You can also enable your own applications to use AUTOTYPE
(see “Enabling Applications to Use AUTOTYPE” on page 108).
If you are using a terminal emulator, you can assign an easily reachable key to the
function key that invokes AUTOTYPE. For example, you can use a control key
combination or any other key or combination that is within easy reach. You can
also use the function key directly.
Within ISPF, AUTOTYPE is enabled for the following panels:
v Edit, Browse, and View (options 1 and 2, including recursive edit/browse/view,
copy, replace and move panels).
v Library Utility panels (option 3.1)
v Data Set Utility panels (option 3.2, including Rename)
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
106
Move/Copy (option 3.3)
Data Set List entry panel (options 3.4)
Reset ISPF Statistics (option 3.5)
Hardcopy Utility (option 3.6)
Download/Upload Data Set To/From Workstation (options 3.7.2)
SuperC Compare (options 3.12 and 3.13 in all fields)
SuperC Search (options 3.14 and 3.15, all fields)
SCLM View and Edit (options 10.1 and 10.2)
SCLM Library Utility (option 10.3.1)
z/OS V1R6.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol I
AUTOTYPE - Data Set Name Completion
v
v
v
v
v
v
Sublibrary Management (option 10.3.2)
SCLM Migration Utility (option 10.3.3)
SCLM Delete Group Utility (option 10.3.9)
SCLM Build and Promote (options 10.4 and 10.5)
Preprocessed panel utility (ISPPREP)
Dialog tag language compiler (ISPDTLC)
On panels that are not enabled for AUTOTYPE, pressing the AUTOTYPE key is the
same as pressing ENTER. The variable ZVERB is set to the value ’AUTOTYPE’.
How to Use AUTOTYPE
1. Type a partial name (zero or more characters) into a Library field (project,
group, type, or member) or the Other Data Set Name field.
2. Press the function key that has been set to AUTOTYPE. ISPF sets the field to
the correct value.
3. If you immediately press the function key again, ISPF retrieves the next data
set or member name. Up to 100 data set names and 700 member names can be
retrieved.
Rules for Specifying the ’Other Data Set Name’ Field
The prefix or pattern you specify is that which is to the left of the cursor. For
example, if the field is ’CLIST(ABC)’, with the cursor under the letter ’S’, then the
pattern used is ’CLI’. For more information, see “Cursor Position Sensitivity” on
page 108.
v If the content of the Data Set Name field does not begin with a quote, your TSO
prefix is added. If the field does begin with a quote, no prefix is added.
Unquoted data set names are not processed if you do not have a TSO prefix
(except for on the Data Set List Utility panel).
v The pattern can be any pattern similar to what you use in your data set list
(except that you don’t have to specify your TSP prefix as described above).
Trailing wildcards are automatically added. For example, in a Data Set Name
field, typing ’CHR’ will result in a pattern of prefix.CHR*.** when searching the
catalog.
v If you include a left parenthesis, followed optionally by a member name or
pattern, the data set is assumed to be a PDS and the member name is returned.
For example ’CLIST(XY’ would search prefix.CLIST for members matching the
pattern XY*. A trailing * is always added to the member name to create a
pattern.
Rules for Library Fields - Project, Group, Type, Member
v If the cursor is in the Project field, the other fields are not used as part of the
data set name search and are erased.
v If the cursor is in a Group field, the project name and type name (if any) are
added to create the search pattern. Each group name is used only once, even if
there are many types in that group. As each group name is displayed, the first
type name found for that project.group combination is also retrieved. The
member name, if any, is not used and is erased.
v If the cursor is in the Type field, the project and first group name are used to
create the pattern. The Type field is updated and the member name is erased.
v If the cursor is in the Member field, the project, first group, and type are used as
the data set name. The second, third, and fourth groups are not used.
Chapter 4. Using Commands, Function Keys, and Light Pen or Cursor Selection
107
AUTOTYPE - Data Set Name Completion
Cursor Position Sensitivity
The pattern or prefix used to search for names is only that which is to the left of
the cursor. In this way you can refine your search simply by moving the cursor.
For example; suppose you have one hundred data sets called ’SYS1.A234.RGG.*’
and you plan to use one named ’SYS1.A234.RGG.DBD0223.L422.FEB0299.TERRA’.
You could type ’SYS1.A234.RGG’ and press the AUTOTYPE key. That might return
’SYS1.A234.RGG.DBD0211.X331.AUG0599.FIRMA’. You can refine the next value
returned by typing a ’2’ over the first ’1’ in ’DB0211’ and then pressing the
AUTOTYPE key again. This will use the new pattern and get you closer to the
desired value.
Restrictions
AUTOTYPE only retrieves cataloged alias names. It will not retrieve generation
data group or generation data set names. AUTOTYPE does not use the Volume
field on any panel. It sets the Volume field associated with the current data set
name field to blank.
AUTOTYPE does not use any ISPF name change exits or data set list retrieval
exits.
AUTOTYPE retrieves a maximum or 100 data sets and 700 member names before
cycling through the list from the beginning.
Enabling Applications to Use AUTOTYPE
You can enable applications to use AUTOTYPE by making some minor panel
modifications as follows:
1. At the beginning of the )REINIT section, add the following lines. Make sure the
subsequent line in the )REINIT section starts in column 1 so that it does not
become part of the IF clause you have inserted.
|
|
IF (&ZNXTMSG=’ISRT’) .CSRPOS = &ZCSRP
.CURSOR = &ZCSRV
2. At the end of the )REINIT section add the following line in column 1.
REFRESH (*)
3. At the beginning of the )PROC section add the following lines. Make sure the
subsequent line in the )PROC section starts in column 1 so that it does not
become part of the IF clause you have inserted. If there is a line that says: .RET
= OFF in the )PROC section, it should go before these lines.
&ZCSRV = .CURSOR
&ZCSRP = .CSRPOS
&ZNAMES=’ZCSRV ZCSRP PRJ1 LIB1 LIB2 LIB3 LIB4 TYP1 MEM DSN ZCMD
PANEXIT ( (ZNAMES) , LOAD,ISRAUTOT)
IF (&ZNXTMSG=’ISRT’) EXIT
Modify the line that assigns the variable &ZNAMES. This assignment contains
a list of variable names on the panel. They must all be specified in order. Use
an asterisk (*) for names that are not relevant for your panel.
The values in the &ZNAMES variable are:
1. The variable containing the Cursor field name
2.
3.
4.
5.
108
The
The
The
The
variable containing the cursor offset
name of the Project variable on the panel
name of the first Group variable.
name of the second Group variable
z/OS V1R6.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol I
AUTOTYPE - Data Set Name Completion
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
The name of the third Group variable
The name of the fourth Group variable
The name of the Type variable
The name of the Member variable
The name of the Other Data Set Name variable
The name of the command line variable (clears the command line)
The cursor and name variables (described here as ZCSRV, ZCSRP, and ZNAMES)
can have any names you choose but they must match the names used in the )INIT
section and the PANEXIT statement in the )PROC section.
If a name references a read-only field, add a dash to the end of the name. If you
need to limit the size of the returned name, you can append the maximum length,
after a period, to the name; for example, ODSN.44. You can disable member searches
for a data set name field by adding a percent sign to the end of the field name; for
example, ODSN.44% or ODSN%.
Panels defined in Dialog Tag Language (DTL) can be enabled for AUTOTYPE
through DTL keywords. See the ISPF Dialog Tag Language Guide and Reference for
more information.
Chapter 4. Using Commands, Function Keys, and Light Pen or Cursor Selection
109
AUTOTYPE - Data Set Name Completion
110
z/OS V1R6.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol I
Chapter 5. Libraries and Data Sets
An ISPF library is a cataloged partitioned data set or a partitioned data set
extended (PDSE). The PDSE is a data set type introduced in the Data Facility
Product Version 3.2 (DFP V3.2). See “Partitioned Data Set Extended (PDSE)” on
page 135 for more information.
The ISPF library has a three-level name consisting of a project, group, and type. An
optional library member name can also be included. A member consists of
programming code, data, or text.
ISPF displays library names on line 1 of a data display, such as the member list
shown in Figure 32 on page 119. Each library generally contains members with the
same type of information.
Before you can create and use a new ISPF library or data set, you must allocate it
using option A of the Data Set utility (option 3.2). The following section explains
how to name the ISPF library or data set. See the section on the Data Set Utility
(Option 3.2) in the ISPF User’s Guide Volume II for step-by-step instructions on
allocating data sets.
Naming ISPF Libraries and Data Sets
On data entry panels that require a library or other data set name, such as the
Data Set Utility (option 3.2) and Edit Entry (option 2) panels, two groups of fields
are provided: one for entering an ISPF library name and one for entering another
partitioned or sequential data set name. The next two sections explain these two
groups of fields.
ISPF Library Names
To name an ISPF library, you must specify at least a project, group, and type. For
example:
Project . . ISPFPROJ
Group . . . TEST
Type . . . . PLI
Project
The common identifier for all ISPF libraries belonging to the same
programming project. This name must be your user ID unless you
are using a specific project name that has been predefined in the
MVS master catalog.
Group
The identifier for a particular set of ISPF libraries, that is, the level
of the libraries within the library hierarchy. For example, the group
name of your private library could be PRIVATE or perhaps your
first name, such as Joe in the example in Figure 30 on page 115.
Type
The identifier for the type of information in the ISPF library, such
as PL/I, SCRIPT, or PANELS.
Standard ISPF Naming Conventions
Each component of the library name can be up to 8 alphanumeric or national
characters; the first one must be alphabetic. This conforms to standard TSO data
set naming conventions. For convenience, any cataloged data set (sequential or
partitioned) with a three-level name can be entered in the Project, Group, and Type
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1980, 2004
111
Naming ISPF Libraries and Data Sets
fields, with one level of the name in each field. If a cataloged data set with four or
more levels is to be entered, multiple levels of the name may be entered in each
field, with each level being separated by a period.
If both a library and a data set name are specified on the same panel, the data set
name takes priority. Therefore, to specify a library, leave the Data Set Name field
blank.
When the library identification appears in a title line or message, the project name,
group name, and type name are separated with periods. A member name, if
applicable, is enclosed in parentheses. For example:
PROJECT.GROUP.TYPE(MEMBER)
On most data entry panels that allow a library name to be specified, a Member
field is available:
Member . . . PROJ1
Member
The name of an ISPF library or other partitioned data set member. Leaving
this field blank or entering a pattern causes ISPF to display a member list.
See “Displaying Member Lists” on page 117 for more information.
A pattern is a partial member name that uses either an * (asterisk) or %
(percent sign) as place holders:
v A * symbol represents a string of characters
v A % symbol represents only 1 character
ISPF matches the pattern to any like member names in the specified data
set.
The ISPF library’s project, group, and type must always accompany the member
name, if entered. If you try to edit a member that does not exist, ISPF provides an
Edit display screen with a blank data area.
Member names entered in the Member field or those enclosed in parentheses and
entered in the Data Set Name field must follow standard ISPF naming conventions.
If you have a partitioned data set with members whose names do not follow ISPF
naming conventions, ISPF allows limited processing, as follows:
v View (option 1) allows any character string as a member name in either the
Member or Data Set Name field and attempts to View or Browse the specified
member.
v Edit (option 2) allows an existing member with a nonstandard member name to
be edited. You cannot create a member with a nonstandard member name.
ISPF cannot process member names that begin with a blank or have embedded
blanks which can cause unpredictable results. Also, ISPF cannot process member
names that include special characters, such as an ampersand (&). CLIST processing
in both Foreground (option 4) and Batch (option 5) can result in a run-time error.
Other Partitioned or Sequential Data Set Names
You can use the following field to specify any partitioned or sequential data set:
Other Partitioned or Sequential Data Set:
Data Set Name . . .
112
z/OS V1R6.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol I
Naming ISPF Libraries and Data Sets
Data Set Name
Any fully qualified data set name, such as:
Data Set Name . . . ’USERID.SYS1.ASM’
You can include either a TSO user prefix or user ID as the first-level
qualifier of the data set name. If you omit the single quotes and if you
have created a TSO user prefix, that prefix is automatically added to the
beginning of the data set name. If you omit the single quotes and if you do
not have a TSO user prefix, no prefix is added, and the name is used
exactly as it appears.
If you include your user prefix or user ID, enclose the data set name with
apostrophes. If you include the apostrophe at the beginning of the data set
name but omit the one at the end, ISPF inserts it for you.
Note: ISPF does not support multivolume data sets or partitioned data sets with
record format FBS or VBS.
For partitioned data sets, a member name enclosed in parentheses can follow the
data set name. For example:
Data Set Name . . . ’SYS1.PROCLIB(ASMHC)’
If you include the parenthesis at the beginning of the member name but omit the
one at the end, ISPF inserts it for you.
When you omit the member name and parentheses or use a pattern ISPF displays
a member list. See “Displaying Member Lists” on page 117 for more information.
You can refer to generation data sets by using a signed or unsigned number in
place of a member name in the Data Set Name field only. For example:
Data Set Name . . . ’gds.test(0)’
This example refers to the most recently allocated data set in the generation data
group. Minus numbers refer to previously allocated data sets; positive refer to
unallocated.
Note: For Edit, Browse, and View, a VSAM data set can be specified if the ISPF
Configuration Table enables VSAM processing.
Volume Serials
Along with a data set name, you can optionally specify a volume serial. If you do,
the system catalog is not used. For example:
Volume Serial . . . ______
(If not cataloged)
Volume Serial
A real DASD volume or a virtual volume residing on an IBM 3850 Mass
Storage System. To access 3850 virtual volumes, you need MOUNT
authority, which is acquired through the TSO ACCOUNT command or the
RACF TSO AUTH CLASS command.
Chapter 5. Libraries and Data Sets
113
Library Concatenation
Library Concatenation
Whenever the first Group field is accompanied by three additional fields
horizontally across the screen, you can enter a library concatenation sequence, which
is a series of group names chained together. ISPF searches these groups in the
sequence that you enter them.
You can concatenate libraries of the same type, but only libraries that belong to the
same project. You will usually concatenate the lowest-level library ahead of the
next higher-level library, and so on, in bottom-to-top order. Therefore,
concatenation is usually most effective if this search sequence is the same as the
library hierarchy.
For example, new library members or members undergoing changes generally
reside in libraries used by program developers. A test library may contain
members that have been unit tested and are ready for integration test. A master
library might contain fully tested members that correspond to a previously
released version of the program.
Concatenated libraries must have consistent record formats and logical record
lengths. You can use concatenation with the following ISPF functions:
v Viewing
v Browsing
v Editing
v Selecting Library Utility (option 3.1) functions:
– Print index or complete data set
– Browse, delete, edit, print, rename, or view members
– Compress data set.
v Copying data sets or members
v Compiling
v Assembling
v link-editing
v SCRIPT/VS processing.
Note: You can also use additional input libraries for compilations and assemblies.
Figure 30 on page 115 shows a sample three-level hierarchy consisting of a set of
master libraries, a set of test libraries, and three sets of private development
libraries identified by user ID. Using this hierarchy, a typical concatenation
sequence for a project of ISPFPROJ, a type of DATA, and a member PGM1 is:
ISPF Library:
Project . .
Group . . .
Type . . .
Member . .
114
z/OS V1R6.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol I
.
.
.
.
ISPFPROJ
JOE
. . . TEST____ . . . MASTER__
DATA
PGM1____
Library Concatenation
MA S T E R
A SM
COB O L
TEXT
DA T A
S CR I P T
TES T
A SM
COB O L
TEXT
DA T A
S CR I P T
JOE
F R AN K
T OM
A SM
A SM
A SM
COB O L
COB O L
COB O L
TEXT
TEXT
TEXT
DA T A
DA T A
DA T A
S CR I P T
S CR I P T
S CR I P T
Figure 30. Hierarchy of ISPF Libraries
In this example, the search for member PGM1 goes through libraries:
ISPFPROJ.JOE.DATA
ISPFPROJ.TEST.DATA
ISPFPROJ.MASTER.DATA
Concatenation during Editing
Using concatenation during editing provides a way to copy members to your
development library. Use the concatenation sequence to search the libraries for the
member to edit. The edited member is saved in your development library, the first
library in the concatenation sequence, while the unchanged version remains in the
test or master library. When the new version is fully tested, you can use the
Move/Copy utility (option 3.3) to:
v Move the new version to a higher-level library.
Concatenation during Language Processing
The purpose of concatenation during language processing is to:
v Help you include source segments in their proper order when using INCLUDE
or COPY statements or when using SCRIPT imbed controls
Chapter 5. Libraries and Data Sets
115
Library Concatenation
v Allow debugging of new or changed programs without altering the contents of
the test or master libraries.
The output from a compilation or assembly (an object module) or from a link-edit
(a load module) is stored in the lowest-level OBJ or LOAD library, the first library
in the concatenation sequence.
Using Member Selection Lists
A member selection list, also called a member list, is initially an alphabetic list of the
members of an ISPF library or TSO partitioned data set. Table 5 provides a quick
reference to the primary options that display member lists and their differences. In
the Type of Selection column, “Single” means that ISPF processes only the line
command that is the closest to the top of the list, ignoring all others. “Multiple”
means that you can enter more than one line command simultaneously. The
numbers in parentheses refer to notes following the table. See “Member Selection
List Commands” on page 124 for more information about the line commands
shown in the table.
Table 5. Member Selection List Differences
Primary Options
Type of
Selection
Valid Line Commands
Prompt Field
Available
View (1)
Single
S,V (4)
No
Browse (1)
Single
S,B (4)
No
Edit (2)
Single
S,E (4)
No
Library (3.1)
Multiple
B,C,D,E,G,M,P,R T,V,W
Yes
Move/Copy (3.3)
Multiple
B,S (1)
Yes
Data Set List (3.4)
Multiple
B,C,D,E,G,M,P,R T,V,W (2)
Yes
Reset (3.5)
Multiple
S
No
Convert (3.10)
Multiple
S
Yes
SuperC (3.12)
Multiple
S
No (3)
SuperCE (3.13)
Multiple
S
No (3)
Search-For (3.14)
Multiple
S
No
Foreground (4)
Single
S
No
Batch (5)
Single
S
No
Workplace (11)
Multiple
B,C,D,E,G,P MO,R,S,T,V,W
No
Notes:
1. For the Move/Copy utility, B (browse member) enables you to browse
members of an ISPF library or another partitioned data set before moving or
copying them without having to use browse on another panel. Then, use S
(select) to select the member or members to move or copy. See “Line
Commands for the Move/Copy Utility” on page 130 for more information.
2. When you select M (display member list) line command on a data set list, you
can use B (browse member), D (delete member), E (edit member), P (print
member), R (rename member), and V (view member). You can also enter TSO
commands, CLISTs, and REXX EXECs.
S (select) is valid also, but only when the B, CO, E, MO, RS, or V line
commands are used on a data set list.
116
z/OS V1R6.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol I
Using Member Selection Lists
3. Instead of a Prompt field, this member list has an OLDMEM field, which you
can use to enter the name of a member in the old data set. For more
information about this field, see the section on SuperC Member Lists in the
SuperC Utility (Option 3.12) chapter of the ISPF User’s Guide Volume II.
4. For your convenience ISPF supports E as a select character from Edit member
lists in addition to S and point-and-shoot selection. Similarly, V is supported
from View member lists, and B is supported from Browse member lists.
5. When multiple members are selected from a member list that supports multiple
selection and all members have been processed, the member list is scrolled such
that the last member processed is positioned to the top of the member list
display.
Displaying Member Lists
For each of the primary options listed in the preceding table, except Data Set List
(option 3.4), you can display a member list by:
v Leaving the Member field blank for an ISPF library
v Omitting the member name from the name of another partitioned data set
v Entering a pattern as the member name.
You can use a combination of asterisks and percent signs in the same pattern.
However, the pattern, including the asterisks and percent signs, can contain no
more than 8 characters. For example, entering the following pattern in the
Member field:
Member . . . *prof___
could display this member list:
ISFPROF
ISPPROF
ISPSPROF
ISRPROF
LOCPROF
SUPCPROF
When using the Data Set List utility (option 3.4), you can display a member list by:
v Entering the M (display member list) line command
v Entering the V (view), B (browse), or E (edit) line command and then using one
of the methods described in the preceding list. This applies only if you are
editing or browsing members of a partitioned data set.
v Entering the CO (copy) line command
v Entering the MO (move) line command
v Entering the RS (reset) line command.
On any member list, PF10 and PF11 toggle between two different views of the
member list data.
Notes:
1. The column headers on a member list display (with the exception of Prompt)
are point-and-shoot sort fields.
2. If you enter a slash in the line command field, the Member List Commands
pop-up window shown in Figure 31 is displayed so that you can select the
command you want to use.
3. The line command field is a point-and-shoot field. If you select the line
command field beside a member name, the Member List Commands pop-up
window shown in Figure 31 is displayed so that you can select the command
you want to use.
Chapter 5. Libraries and Data Sets
117
Using Member Selection Lists
4. Member list count fields show an accurate count when the number of members
in a PDS or PDSE is less than 100 000. The row value will be truncated after
member 99 999 and the total value will be truncated on display of the list if
more than 99 999 members exist.
Menu Functions Confirm Utilities Help
─ ┌───────────────────────────────────────────────────┐
B │
Action for Member FILEMDB2
│
│
│
/ │ Member Action
│
_ │
1. Edit
8. Copy
│
_ │
2. View
9. Reset
│
_ │
3. Browse
10. Open Edit
│
_ │
4. Delete
11. Submit
│
_ │
5. Rename
12. TSO Cmd
│
_ │
6. Print
13. WS Cmd
│
_ │
7. Move
14. Select BROWSE
│
_ │
│
_ │ Prompt Action . .
(For prompt field)
│
_ │
│
_ │ Select a choice and press ENTER to continue
│
_ │ F1=Help
F2=Split
F3=Exit
│
_ │ F7=Backward
F8=Forward
F9=Swap
│
_ └───────────────────────────────────────────────────┘
_________ FMNMODT
0000F398
_________ FMNMODTR
00000500
Command ===>
F1=Help
F2=Split F3=Exit
F5=Rfind F7=Up
F10=Left F11=Right F12=Cancel
──────────────────────
Row 00001 of 00047
TTR
AC AM RM
004F1B 01
31 ANY
004F1B 01
31 ANY
004F1B 01
31 ANY
004F1B 01
31 ANY
004F1B 01
31 ANY
006E04 01
31 ANY
004F1B 01
31 ANY
004F1B 01
31 ANY
004F1B 01
31 ANY
00000C 00
31 ANY
001F15 01
31 ANY
001D05 01
31 ANY
006B05 01
31 ANY
001D0D 01
31 ANY
006D0A 01
31 ANY
001E06 01
31 ANY
00201B 01
31 ANY
Scroll ===> PAGE
F8=Down
F9=Swap
Figure 31. Member List Commands Pop-Up Window (ISRCMLEP)
Ending Member Lists
With two exceptions, you can end a member list by entering END (F15) or using =
(the jump function) to go to another option. For the two exceptions, SuperC and
Search-For member lists, enter RETURN (F16), CANCEL, or =. On these member
lists, the END command processes your selections.
ISPF Member Statistics
On member lists, column headings appear in the national language. The
information shown under the column headings contains the ISPF statistics
generated for each member. You can print these statistics using option X (print
index listing) of the Library utility (option 3.1) or option P (print data set list) of
the Data Set List utility (option 3.4). You can also use the SAVE command to write
a member list or data set list to the ISPF list data set or to a sequential data set.
The statistics are displayed next to each member name.
Figure 32 on page 119 shows an example of a member list with statistics and the
1-character line command field to the left of the member names.
118
z/OS V1R6.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol I
Using Member Selection Lists
Menu Functions Confirm Utilities Help
──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
LIBRARY
USERID.EXEC
Row 00001 of 00146
Name
Prompt
Size
Created
Changed
ID
_ ALLOCEXT
5 2002/07/25 2002/07/25 16:28:48
USERID
_ AMBLIST
7 2001/01/04 2001/09/11 12:02:41
USERID
_ AOPST
10 2002/05/27 2002/05/27 10:38:15
USERID
_ APCTOOLS
20 2002/11/29 2003/01/21 09:59:50
USERID
_ APCTOOLX
193 2002/11/29 2003/01/21 10:16:42
USERID
_ APCT2AZ
2610 2002/11/29 2003/01/21 10:23:24
USERID
_ APPLT1
4 2002/05/22 2002/05/22 09:32:20
USERID
_ APPLT2
8 2002/05/22 2002/05/22 09:32:49
USERID
_ APPLT3
4 2002/05/22 2002/05/22 09:28:59
USERID
_ ASMPROG1
3 2002/01/23 2002/01/23 12:41:02
USERID
_ BATCHCMP
4 2002/02/21 2002/02/21 13:04:48
USERID
_ CLEDIT
3 2002/06/11 2002/06/11 09:31:02
USERID
_ CMSED
39 2002/12/06 2002/12/06 14:10:55
USERID
_ COMP
10 2002/10/09 2002/10/09 15:14:44
USERID
_ CRZDIFF
58 2002/11/18 2002/11/18 13:39:48
USERID
_ CRZDISP
14 2002/11/14 2002/11/14 15:02:03
USERID
_ CRZLOAD
105 2002/11/13 2002/11/18 14:30:48
USERID
Command ===>
Scroll ===> PAGE
F1=Help
F2=Split F3=Exit
F5=Rfind F7=Up
F8=Down
F9=Swap
F10=Left F11=Right F12=Cancel
Figure 32. Member List Display (ISRUDMM)
If you want to see all of the statistics, you can scroll the screen either right or left
by using PF keys 10 and 11. If you scroll right in this example, the screen looks
like the one shown in Figure 33. Pressing either key repeatedly results in recycling
of the screens.
Menu Functions Confirm Utilities Help
──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
LIBRARY
USERID.EXEC
Row 00001 of 00146
Name
Prompt
Size
Init
Mod
VV MM
ID
_ ALLOCEXT
5
1
0
01.04
USERID
_ AMBLIST
7
7
0
01.08
USERID
_ AOPST
10
10
0
01.01
USERID
_ APCTOOLS
20
19
0
01.03
USERID
_ APCTOOLX
193
212
0
01.04
USERID
_ APCT2AZ
2610
2647
0
01.16
USERID
_ APPLT1
4
3
0
01.02
USERID
_ APPLT2
8
5
0
01.03
USERID
_ APPLT3
4
4
0
01.00
USERID
_ ASMPROG1
3
1
0
01.17
USERID
_ BATCHCMP
4
3
0
01.03
USERID
_ CLEDIT
3
2
0
01.01
USERID
_ CMSED
39
37
0
01.03
USERID
_ COMP
10
10
0
01.00
USERID
_ CRZDIFF
58
12
0
01.02
USERID
_ CRZDISP
14
14
0
01.01
USERID
_ CRZLOAD
105
57
0
01.15
USERID
Command ===>
Scroll ===> PAGE
F1=Help
F2=Split F3=Exit
F5=Rfind F7=Up
F8=Down
F9=Swap
F10=Left F11=Right F12=Cancel
Figure 33. Member List Display cont. (ISRUDMM)
Member List Display Panel Action Bar
The Member List Display panel action bar choices function as follows:
Chapter 5. Libraries and Data Sets
119
Using Member Selection Lists
Menu See the chapter on the Primary Option Menu in the ISPF User’s Guide
Volume II for information about the Menu pull-down.
Functions
The Functions pull-down offers the following choices:
1
Save List. Saves the member list into the list data set.
2
Change Colors... Displays the Member List Color Change Utility
panel (Figure 34) to allow you to change one or more of the Member
List Field Attributes and press Enter to see the effect immediately.
Clearing a field or selecting the Defaults field restores defaults.
Note: You can also display this panel by typing MLC on the
Command line and pressing Enter.
Member List Color Change Utility
Change one or more of the Member List Field Attributes and press Enter
to see the effect immediately. Clearing a field restores defaults.
Field:
Member Name . . . .
Member Stats . . .
Prompt field . . .
Color:
BLUE . . .
GREEN . . .
TURQ . . .
Intens:
Hilite:
LOW
. . . NONE
LOW
. . . NONE
HIGH . . . NONE
Defaults:
Blue
Green
Turq
Use ISPF Settings input field pad for member selection field
-------------------------------- Example ----------------------------------LIBRARY
Name
_ ISRBRO01
_ ISREDM01
_ ISRUDLP
**End**
ISR.V4R2M0.ISRPENU
Prompt
Size
Created
/
231
1993/03/22
*Reset
207
1990/02/13
*Copied
123
1989/02/03
Command ===>
F1=Help
F2=Split
F12=Cancel
F3=Exit
Row 00001
Changed
1995/05/31 08:53
1994/01/25 13:14
1994/01/25 13:14
F7=Backward F8=Forward
of 00003
ID
HEATHER
EMILY
X657188
Defaults
F9=Swap
Figure 34. Member List Color Change Utility Panel (ISRMLCP)
3
120
Initial Sort View... Displays the Member List Sort Field View panel
(Figure 35 on page 121) to enable you to select the member list field
to be sorted on, before the display of an enhanced member list.
Member Name is the default View. Some other sort views that you
can choose are:
v RECFM=BLK sets the initial view for blocked (FB,VB,...) data set
formats.
v RECFM=U sets the initial view for unformatted (Load,...) data set
formats.
v Any of the following conditions result in a default sort view on
member name.
– Library field selected as initial sort view and member list is
based on a single data set.
– Created or Alias selected as initial sort view and extended
command member list.
z/OS V1R6.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol I
Using Member Selection Lists
– A member name is given as input to member list action.
Note: You can also display this panel by typing MLS on the
Command line and pressing Enter.
Menu Functions Confirm Utilities Help
─ ┌─────────────────────────────────────────┐ ────────────────────────────────
│ Enhanced Member List Initial Sort
│
Row 00001 of 00047
│
│ Size
TTR
AC AM RM
_ │ RECFM=BLK
RECFM=U
│ 0133AC0 004F1B 01
31 ANY
_ │ 1 1. Name
1 1. Name
│ 0133AC0 004F1B 01
31 ANY
_ │
2. Library
2. Library
│ 0133AC0 004F1B 01
31 ANY
_ │
3. VV
3. Size
│ 0133AC0 004F1B 01
31 ANY
_ │
4. MM
4. TTR
│ 0133AC0 004F1B 01
31 ANY
_ │
5. Created
5. Alias
│ 0002A20 006E04 01
31 ANY
_ │
6. Changed
6. AC
│ 0133AC0 004F1B 01
31 ANY
_ │
7. Size
7. AM
│ 0133AC0 004F1B 01
31 ANY
_ │
8. Initial
8. RM
│ 0133AC0 004F1B 01
31 ANY
_ │
9. MOD
9. Attr
│ 002C4A8 00000C 00
31 ANY
_ │
10. Userid
10. SSI
│ 0000200 001F15 01
31 ANY
_ │
│ 0000BD0 001D05 01
31 ANY
_ │ Select an initial sort field view
│ 0010390 006B05 01
31 ANY
_ │ for Enhanced member lists.
│ 000BCF0 001D0D 01
31 ANY
_ │ F1=Help
F2=Split
F3=Exit
│ 0004D38 006D0A 01
31 ANY
_ │ F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap
│ 000F398 001E06 01
31 ANY
_ └─────────────────────────────────────────┘ 0000500 00201B 01
31 ANY
Command ===> MLS
Scroll ===> PAGE
F1=Help
F2=Split F3=Exit
F5=Rfind F7=Up
F8=Down
F9=Swap
F10=Left F11=Right F12=Cancel
Figure 35. Member List Sort Field View Panel (ISRMLIS)
Note: When using LLA in FREEZE mode, member lists might appear
to be out of SORT order because ISPF uses direct reads of the
data set directory for initial member list build and SORT, and
uses BLDL for the displayed statistics.
Confirm
Select 1 or 2 to set delete confirmation ON or OFF.
Utilities
See the chapter on the Primary Option Menu in the ISPF User’s Guide
Volume II for details on the Utilities pull-down.
Help
The
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Help pull-down offers the following choices:
Workplace General
Library/DSLIST General
Scrolling
Pattern matching
LOCATE command
SORT command
SAVE command
RESET command
SELECT command
MLC command (member list color)
MLS command (member list sort)
S line command
Statistics
Appendices
Index
Chapter 5. Libraries and Data Sets
121
Using Member Selection Lists
Member List Display Panel Fields
ISPF generates statistics each time you edit a member, unless your edit profile is
set to STATS OFF. The following fields identify the statistics in a member list:
Note: The column headers on a member list display (with the exception of
Prompt) are point-and-shoot sort fields.
Name Name of the member.
Prompt
The Prompt field serves a variety of purposes. You can rename a member
by typing the new name to the right of the member name. You can type a
slash character (/) in the first position of the Prompt field so you can
define additional behaviors for a given action.
Also, the Prompt field acts as a status field, showing information about the
last action taken for a member. If you run an edit macro or TSO command
against a member, the 7-character informational status that is returned in
the dialog variable ZPROMPT at the completion of the service is shown in
this field.
Lib
Library number. The Lib field appears only if you specify a concatenated
sequence of libraries. It shows the library that contains the member. In this
example, if the member resides in the second library in the sequence, a 2
appears in the Lib field.
VV.MM
Version number and modification level. The version number is set to 1 and
the modification level is set to 0 when the member is created. The
modification level is the number of times this version has been modified.
For example, 02.15 means version 2, modification 15.
If a member name is just an alternate name for another member, ALIAS
appears in this field.
Created
Date this version was created. The format used depends on your national
format. For example, 90/06/27 means June 27, 1990 to some, but so does
06/27/90 and 27/06/90 mean it for others.
Changed
Date and time this version was last modified; date is shown in the national
format (see Created). Time is shown using a 24-hour format. For example,
17:20 means 5:20 p.m..
Size
Current number of lines. The largest number this field can display is
65 535.
Init
Number of lines when the member was first saved. The largest number
this field can display is 65 535.
Mod
Number of lines in the current member that have been added or changed.
If the data is unnumbered, this number is zero. The largest number this
field can display is 65 535.
ID
The user ID of the person who created or last updated this version.
When you use View, Browse, and Edit, the current version and modification level
are displayed in the title area, line 1, following the library and member name. You
can change the version number, the user ID, or both, with the Reset ISPF Statistics
utility (option 3.5) or with the LEVEL and VERSION Edit primary commands.
Changing the version number updates most of the other statistics.
122
z/OS V1R6.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol I
Using Member Selection Lists
If you use the ISPF editor to delete all lines in a member of an ISPF library and
then save the member, the statistics show that the member still exists but has a
length of zero. To delete a member, including its statistics, use the Library utility
(3.1).
Load Module Library Member Statistics
Figure 36 shows that the ISPF library statistics displayed in a member list have a
different format for load module libraries. See “Member List Display Panel Action
Bar” on page 119 for a description of the action bar choices on this panel.
Menu Functions Confirm Utilities Help
──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
LIBRARY
PDFTDEV.SVT.LOAD
Row 00001 of 00480
Name
Prompt
Alias-of
Size
TTR
AC
AM
RM
_ FLM$CP
FLMIO24
0000A938
01E70E
00
24
24
_ FLM$CPI
000000E8
01820C
00
31
ANY
_ FLM$DE
FLMIO24
0000A938
01E70E
00
24
24
_ FLM$DT
FLMIO24
0000A938
01E70E
00
24
24
_ FLM$99
FLMIO24
0000A938
01E70E
00
24
24
_ FLMB
000A9970
01EF16
00
31
ANY
_ FLMBCMD
FLMDDL
00122360
029008
00
31
ANY
_ FLMBD$
FLMDDL
00122360
029008
00
31
ANY
_ FLMCMD
FLMS7C
000E62B8
02AE13
00
31
ANY
_ FLMCNTGN
0001E838
028C1D
00
31
ANY
_ FLMCPCS
00000150
01822A
00
31
ANY
_ FLMCSLNK
FLMIO24
0000A938
01E70E
00
24
24
_ FLMCSPDB
00001940
01E80A
00
31
24
_ FLMCXCMD
FLMIO24
0000A938
01E70E
00
24
24
_ FLMCXCPD
FLMIO24
0000A938
01E70E
00
24
24
_ FLMCXCPM
FLMIO24
0000A938
01E70E
00
24
24
_ FLMCXCTN
FLMIO24
0000A938
01E70E
00
24
24
Command ===>
Scroll ===> PAGE
F1=Help
F2=Split F3=Exit
F5=Rfind F7=Up
F8=Down
F9=Swap
F10=Left F11=Right F12=Cancel
Figure 36. Load Module Library Display (ISRUDMM)
If you want to see all of the statistics, you can scroll the screen either right or left
by using PF keys 10 and 11. Pressing either key repeatedly results in recycling of
the screens.
The fields on a member list display for a load module library are:
Note: The column headers on a member list display (with the exception of
Prompt) are point-and-shoot sort fields.
Name
Name of the member.
Prompt
The Prompt field serves a variety of purposes. You can rename a
member by typing the new name to the right of the member name.
You can type a slash character (/) in the first position of the
Prompt field so you can define additional behaviors for a given
action. Also, the Prompt field acts as a status field, showing
information about the last action taken for a member.
Lib
Library number. The Lib field appears only if you specify a
concatenated sequence of libraries. It shows the library that
contains the member. In this example, the member resides in the
second library in the sequence.
Chapter 5. Libraries and Data Sets
123
Using Member Selection Lists
Size
Size of the member in hexadecimal. The largest number this field
can display is ’FFFFFFFF’X.
TTR
Relative block address.
Alias-of
Name of the member for which this member is an alias. See
following note.
AC
Authorization code.
AM
Addressing mode.
RM
Residency mode.
Attributes
The member’s attributes:
NX
Not executable
DATA Can be loaded only
OVLY In overlay structure
RF
Refreshable
RN
Can be reentered
RU
Reusable
TEST Module to be tested.
SSI
System Status Index
Note: Question marks (?) are placed in the member list of a load module library
for members that have load module directory fields that are not valid. For
example, module 14, shown in Figure 36 on page 123, contains alias and
authorization code information that is not valid.
Load module library lists displayed using the Data Set List utility (option 3.4)
contain an extended line command field and do not display the created date.
Member Selection List Commands
If the member list is too large for the screen, you can see other parts of the list by
using the UP and DOWN scroll commands. These commands are valid for all
member list displays. However, because a member list display can be no wider
than 80 characters, you cannot use the LEFT and RIGHT scroll commands. Refer to
the ISPF Dialog Developer’s Guide and Reference for more information about scroll
commands.
The following primary commands are valid for all member list displays. You enter
these commands on the Command line:
v CONFIRM
v FIND
v LOCATE string
v SRCHFOR
v RESET
v RFIND
v SAVE [list-id]
v SELECT pattern [lcmd]
v SORT [field1[field2]]
v MLC
v MLS
v REFRESH
The following line commands can be used with member lists. These are 1-character
commands that are entered to the left of the member name. The option you are
using determines:
124
z/OS V1R6.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol I
Using Member Selection Lists
v Whether you can enter more than one line command simultaneously
v Which line commands are valid
v Whether a Prompt or OLDMEM field is available.
Table 5 on page 116 provides a quick reference to the differences between member
lists and the line commands available on each one. The line commands are:
v B (browse member)
v C (copy member)
v D (delete member)
v E (edit member)
v G (reset member)
v M (move member)
v P (print member)
v R (rename member)
v S (select member)
v T (TSO command)
v V (view member)
v W (WS command)
v = (repeat last command).
The S line command is available for all member list displays except the Library
and Data Set List utilities. See “S Line Command” on page 128 for more
information.
The B line command is available only for the Library, Move/Copy, and Data Set
List utilities. The D, E, P, R, and V line commands are available only for the
Library and Data Set List utilities.
Note: For the Data Set List utility, these line commands are valid only after you
enter the M (display member list) line command. See “Library and Data Set
List Utility Line Commands” on page 130 for information.
ISPF ignores any unprocessed member list commands when you leave a member
list.
Primary Commands
Confirming a Delete Command: The CONFIRM primary command controls
display of the Confirm Delete panel. Use the following format:
CONFIRM [ ON | OFF]
You can use the following operands with the CONFIRM command:
ON
Tells ISPF to display the Confirm Delete panel when you enter the D
(delete data set) line command or TSO DELETE command. This is the
default setting.
OFF
Tells ISPF not to display the Confirm Delete panel.
For example, the following command would tell ISPF not to display the Confirm
Delete panel:
CONFIRM OFF
Note: Confirm is forced on from the workplace member list with a default action
of “D”.
Chapter 5. Libraries and Data Sets
125
Using Member Selection Lists
Find a Character String: To find a character string within the specified field use
the FIND or the RFIND command. Only one of the fields on the member list can
be specified at a time for the search. Use the following format:
FIND string field [NEXT]
[[ALL ] [PREfix]
[[FIRST ] [SUFfix]
[[LAST ] [WORD ]
[[PREV]
NAME is the default field. NEXT is the default operand. For example, the
following command tells ISPF to find the last occurrence of the character string
XLC in the NAME field.
FIND XLC NAME LAST
ISPF automatically scrolls to bring the line containing the character string to the
top of the list.
Use the RFIND command to repeat the search without reentering the character
string.
Locating a Data String: To find a data string, you can enter a LOCATE command
in the Command field on any member list display. The format of the command is:
LOCATE string
where:
string
A data string that is used to find an entry based on how the member list is
sorted.
ISPF searches the field by which the member list was sorted for an entry equal to
string. Either the entry, if found, or else the entry that immediately precedes the
entry that you are searching for is scrolled to the top of the list.
For example, if the member list shown in Figure 36 on page 123 is sorted by name,
the following command causes member MODULE12 to scroll to the top of the list:
LOCATE MODULE12
Removing Unwanted Line Commands and Messages: The RESET command
removes unprocessed line commands and messages that show the result of line
command processing. This command has no operands.
Writing a Member List to a Sequential Data Set: The SAVE primary command
writes a member selection list to a sequential data set. The format of the SAVE
command is:
SAVE [list-id] [LONG]
|
where:
list-id Optional. A user-specified qualifier of the sequential data set to which the
member list is written.
126
z/OS V1R6.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol I
Using Member Selection Lists
|
|
|
|
LONG
Optional. LONG formats all dates in yyyy/mm/dd format for the member.
Additionally, for PDS datasets not containing load libraries, the
untranslated member name is written after the member name.
ISPF names the data set:
prefix.userid.list-id.MEMBERS
prefix Your data set prefix, as specified in your TSO user profile. If you have no
prefix set, or if your prefix is the same as your user ID, the prefix is
omitted and the data set name is userid.list-id.MEMBERS.
userid Your TSO user ID.
The data set is created if it does not exist, or written over if it exists and
has compatible attributes.
ISPF writes the member list in the current sort order and as it appears on the
display, except for the column headings, line command fields, and anything you
have typed on the display.
If you omit the list ID, ISPF writes the member selection list in the current sort
order, including column headings, to the ISPF list data set. Processing is the same
as using option X of the Library utility (primary option 3.1), except that data set
information is not printed.
Selecting a Member: You can use the SELECT, or S, command as either a primary
command or a line command.
SELECT Primary Command: The SELECT primary command allows you to select
one or more members in a member list, whether they are displayed or not. When
you enter it on a member list displayed using the Edit option, this command even
creates a member if you specify the complete member name of a member that does
not exist.
The SELECT command optionally provides a quick method of calling the same line
command for one or more members. The format of the SELECT command is:
SELECT { pattern | * }[lcmd]
where:
pattern
Either a complete member name or a partial member name that contains one
or more asterisks (*), percent signs (%), or both as place holders. See
“Displaying Member Lists” on page 117 for more information about using
patterns.
*
An asterisk, which means you want to select all members in a member list.
lcmd
One of the following optional line commands: S (select), B (browse), V (view),
D (delete), E (edit), or P (print). On a member list that has an expanded line
command field, such as one generated by the M (member list) line command
in the Data Set List utility (option 3.4), you can also enter a TSO command,
CLIST, or REXX EXEC. If you do not enter a line command, S is the default.
The member list shown in Figure 32 on page 119 contains members INT and
INTTOOL. The following command selects these members for printing:
Chapter 5. Libraries and Data Sets
127
Using Member Selection Lists
SELECT INT* P
S Line Command: You can enter the S line command at the beginning of a line,
ahead of one or more member names. For example, in Figure 36 on page 123, you
could select member MODULE9 by moving the cursor to the left of the member
name, typing S, and pressing Enter.
Note: On member lists displayed with the View, Browse, Edit, Foreground, and
Batch options, ISPF processes only the first S entered, ignoring all others.
With the Move/Copy utility and the Convert utility, you can rename members by
entering new member names in the Prompt field to the right of the member name.
Sorting a Member List: The SORT primary command arranges a member list
according to the fields you specify. The sort sequence, ascending or descending, is
determined by the fields you choose and is maintained between member list
displays.
The format of this command is:
SORT [ field1[field2 ]]
where:
field1
The primary field by which the member list is sorted.
field2
The secondary field by which the member list is sorted.
Table 6 and Table 7 show:
v Valid values for field1 and field2
v The sort sequence used for each field
v A description of each field name.
Note: When National Language Support is enabled, the field names listed in
Table 6 and Table 7 on page 129 may be displayed in the national language.
If they are then the SORT command will expect field1 or field2 to be entered
in the national language, or the standard abbreviation to be used.
Table 6. Sort Fields for Source Libraries
128
Field
Sequence
Description
Name
Ascending
Member name
Lib
Ascending
Library in concatenation sequence
VV
Ascending
ISPF version number
MM
Ascending
ISPF modification level
Created
Descending
Creation date
Changed
Descending
Date and time last changed
Size
Descending
Current number of records
Init
Descending
Initial number of records
Mod
Descending
Number of modified records
ID
Ascending
Last user
Prompt
Descending
Prompt field
z/OS V1R6.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol I
Using Member Selection Lists
Table 7. Sort Fields for Load Libraries
Field
Sequence
Description
Name
Ascending
Member name
Lib
Ascending
Library in concatenation sequence
Size
Descending
Load module size
TTR
Ascending
TTRN of beginning of load module
Alias-Of
Ascending
Member this is an alias of
AC
Ascending
Authorization code
Descending
2
Addressing mode
RM
Descending
2
Residency mode
Attributes
Descending
Load module attributes
SSI
Ascending
System Status Index
Prompt
Descending
Prompt field
AM
For example, to sort a member list by size and then by track record, you could
enter:
SORT SIZE TTR
Searching for Members: Use the SRCHFOR primary command to search the
members in the member list for one or more strings of data using the SuperC
Utility (see Option 3.14). You may limit the search to excluded or non-excluded
members, and control whether migrated members are recalled and searched or not.
Use the following format:
SRCHFOR string
The string parameter is optional and if specified is used to prefill the first search
string on the subsequent MEMLIST Srchfor Options panel.
WORD, SUFFIX, and PREFIX are available operands for search string specification.
Note that the search strings are case sensitive and must match exactly as specified.
Consider the ’Any case’ process option if you want to disregard case.
You can use the C (continuation) operand to specify that both the current and
previous string must be found on the same line to constitute a match. Otherwise,
lines with either string are treated as matching.
Table 8. Examples of search strings
Example Search strings:
Explanation:
===> ABC
===> EFG
Either string ABC or EFG may be found in the search
members.
===> ABC WORD
===> EFG C
The two strings (ABC and EFG) must be found on the same
line. ABC must be a complete word, while EFG (a
continuation definition) can be part of any word.
===> ABcD prefix
The string (ABcD) is detected if the case of each letter
matches and it is a prefix of a word.
===> X’7b00’
The hex string is specified as the search string. The listing
must be browsed with ’HEX ON’.
2. For the AM and RM columns, the value ANY is considered to be the largest value and will therefore sort to the top of the list.
Chapter 5. Libraries and Data Sets
129
Using Member Selection Lists
Table 8. Examples of search strings (continued)
===> ’AB C’’D’
The string (AB C’D) is specified.
To start the search, press the Enter key from the MEMLIST Srchfor Options panel.
To cancel the request and return to the Member List, enter END or CANCEL.
Output is in the listing DSN you specify and in the MESSAGE field in the DSLIST.
Sort on this field to consolidate results.
Changing Member List Field Attributes: The MLC command enables you to
change one or more of the member list field attributes and to see the change
immediately. Clearing a field restores the field’s default setting. Use the Defaults
point-and-shoot field to restore all field attributes to ISPF default settings.
You can also change the member selection field to use the ISPF Settings input field
padding character instead of the member list field default padding character. The
member list default padding character for single command selection lists is a
period (.), and for multiple command selection lists it is an underscore (_).
Changing the Default Sort Order for Member Lists: The MLS command enables
you to change the default sort order for all ISPF member lists. You can specify
separate sort orders for Load and non-Load data sets. These sort orders apply only
to ISPF Enhanced Member lists.
Refreshing the Member Lists: The REFRESH command refreshes the member
list, adding new members, adding renamed members under their new names, and
deleting members that have been removed from the list. It also resets the line
command field and prompt field on the member list. Unprocessed line commands
and input or messages in the prompt fields are erased by the Refresh command.
Line Commands
Line Commands for the Move/Copy Utility: On member list displays for the
Move/Copy utility (option 3.3), you can enter the following line commands at the
beginning of a line, ahead of one or more member names.
B
Browse the member
S
Select the member.
The B (browse) line command allows you to browse a member or members to
determine whether you really want to move or copy them. You can enter the B line
command beside as many members as you want to. The first member that has a B
line command beside it is browsed when you press Enter. When you finish
browsing each member, the member list is redisplayed along with the unprocessed
line commands. Press Enter again to browse the next member.
Once you have decided which members to move or copy, use the S (select) line
command to select those members.
Library and Data Set List Utility Line Commands: On member list displays for
the Library utility (option 3.1) and the Data Set List utility (option 3.4), you can
enter the following line commands at the beginning of a line, ahead of one or more
member names.
B
Browse the member
C
Copy the member
D
Delete the member
130
z/OS V1R6.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol I
Using Member Selection Lists
E
G
J
M
P
R
T
V
W
Edit the member
Reset the member
Submit the member
Move the member
Print the member
Rename the member
TSO command
View the member
WS command
Note: Member lists displayed with the M line command have a 9-character line
command field to accommodate TSO commands, CLISTs, and REXX EXECs.
For more information, see the sections titled “M-Display Member List” and
“TSO Commands, CLISTs, and REXX EXECs” in the Data Set List Utility
(Option 3.4) chapter of the ISPF User’s Guide Volume II.
When you use the R line command, enter the new member name in the Prompt
field to the right of the member name.
When you press Enter, each member preceded by a line command is processed
unless:
v The V (view), B (browse), or E (edit) line command is followed by another line
command. When you return to the member list after Viewing, Browsing, or
Editing a member, you must press Enter again to call any remaining line
commands.
v You enter a line command for a member that was deleted. The names of deleted
members are not removed from the member list until it is updated. Remove the
line command that precedes the deleted member, and press Enter again. See
“Updating a Member List” on page 132 for more information.
v You enter an R (rename) line command, but do not put a new name in the
Prompt field. Enter a new member name, and press Enter again.
You can then do one of the following:
v Enter additional primary or line commands
v Scroll, if necessary, to bring additional members into view
v Enter the END command to return to the previous panel.
Figure 37 and Figure 38 on page 132 show before and after examples that print
members TEST and TEST1, delete member TEST8, and rename member TEST4 to
OLDTEST.
Chapter 5. Libraries and Data Sets
131
Using Member Selection Lists
Menu Functions Confirm Utilities Help
──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
LIBRARY
USERID.TEST.SOURCE
Row 00001 of 00009
Name
Prompt
Size
Created
Changed
ID
P TEST
1 2003/02/03 2003/02/03 17:04:14
USERID
P TEST1
1 2003/02/03 2003/02/03 17:04:14
USERID
TEST2
1 2003/02/03 2003/02/03 17:04:23
USERID
TEST3
1 2003/02/03 2003/02/03 17:04:14
USERID
R TEST4
OLDTEST
1 2003/02/03 2003/02/03 17:04:14
USERID
TEST5
1 2003/02/03 2003/02/03 17:04:14
USERID
TEST6
1 2003/02/03 2003/02/03 17:04:14
USERID
TEST7
1 2003/02/03 2003/02/03 17:04:14
USERID
D TEST8
1 2003/02/03 2003/02/03 17:04:14
USERID
**End**
Command ===>
F1=Help
F2=Split F3=Exit
F5=Rfind
F10=Left F11=Right F12=Cancel
F7=Up
Scroll ===> PAGE
F8=Down
F9=Swap
Figure 37. Library Utility before Print, Rename, and Delete (ISRUDMM)
Menu Functions Confirm Utilities Help
──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
LIBRARY
USERID.TEST.SOURCE
Row 00001 of 00009
Name
Prompt
Size
Created
Changed
ID
_ TEST
*Printed
1 2003/02/03 2003/02/03 17:04:14
USERID
_ TEST1
*Printed
1 2003/02/03 2003/02/03 17:04:14
USERID
_ TEST2
1 2003/02/03 2003/02/03 17:04:23
USERID
_ TEST3
1 2003/02/03 2003/02/03 17:04:14
USERID
_ TEST4
*Renamed
_ TEST5
1 2003/02/03 2003/02/03 17:04:14
USERID
_ TEST6
1 2003/02/03 2003/02/03 17:04:14
USERID
_ TEST7
1 2003/02/03 2003/02/03 17:04:14
USERID
_ TEST8
*Deleted
**End**
Command ===>
F1=Help
F2=Split F3=Exit
F5=Rfind
F10=Left F11=Right F12=Cancel
F7=Up
Scroll ===> PAGE
F8=Down
F9=Swap
Figure 38. Library Utility after Print, Rename, and Delete (ISRUDMM)
Updating a Member List
When the member list is displayed again following completion of a function or
command, it does not include:
v For View, Browse, and Edit:
– New members created by recursive Edit calls
132
z/OS V1R6.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol I
Using Member Selection Lists
– New members created using the CREATE command in EDIT do not display
in an Enhanced Member List display, but do display when using the
traditional member list processing.
– Members created by another user
– In split-screen mode, members created on another logical screen.
v For Library, Move/Copy, Data Set List, and Convert:
– New names of members that have been renamed
– Fewer member names when members are deleted (Library and Data Set List)
or moved (Move/Copy).
To display an up-to-date list, return to the previous panel, leave the member name
blank or enter a pattern. See “Displaying Member Lists” on page 117 for more
information about displaying member lists.
To set your system to display a traditional member list when using the E, V, or B
commands (Edit, View, Browse) specifically, see the section on DSLIST Settings in
the ISPF User’s Guide Volume II. This can be found in the Utilities (Option 3)
chapter, in the section on Data Set List Utility Options.
Member List Positioning
After selected members have been processed, the member list is redisplayed and
positioned based on the members selected and the setting of the Scroll Member
List option.
When the Scroll Member List option is selected:
v If a single member is selected, the member list is redisplayed with the selected
member scrolled to the top of the display. However, if the CANCEL command is
used to exit the selected member, the member list is not scrolled.
v If multiple members are selected and some selections are contained in the last
screen displayed before the Enter key was pressed, the first selected member on
that screen is scrolled to the top of the display.
v If multiple members are selected and none of the selections are contained in the
last screen displayed before the Enter key was pressed, the first selected member
in the member list is scrolled to the top of the display.
When the Scroll Member List option is not selected:
v If only single selections are allowed and the selection is contained in the last
screen displayed before the Enter key was pressed, the member list is not
scrolled. The cursor is positioned in front of the selected member.
v If only single selections are allowed and the selection is not contained in the last
screen displayed before the Enter key was pressed, the member list is
redisplayed showing the last screen containing the selected member. The cursor
is positioned in front of the selected member.
v If multiple selections are allowed and the last selected member is contained in
the last screen displayed before the Enter key was pressed, the member list is
not scrolled. The cursor is positioned in front of the last selected member.
v If multiple selections are allowed and the last selection is not contained in the
last screen displayed before the Enter key was pressed, the member list is
redisplayed with the last selected member scrolled to the top. The cursor is
positioned in front of the last selected member.
Chapter 5. Libraries and Data Sets
133
Data Set Passwords
Data Set Passwords
A Data Set Password field is included on library and data set entry panels:
Data Set Password . .
(If password protected)
The Data Set Password field contains the password for OS password-protected
data sets. By assigning more than one password to the same data set, you can give
some users read-only access while giving others read/write access.
Nondisplay input fields are used so that the passwords do not appear on the
screen. When you specify a concatenated sequence of libraries, the password
applies to all data sets in the sequence.
If you replace a long password with a shorter password, blank out the remaining
spaces of the Data Set Password field.
You can use ISPF with either the TSO/VS2 Programming Control Facility (PCF) or
the Resource Access Control Facility (RACF®). PCF and RACF provide extensive
facilities for data set security. However, when using either PCF or RACF, do not
enter a password on the ISPF panels, because both facilities rely on your TSO
user ID and logon password to identify you and check for proper authorization.
Format Definitions
A Format Name field is included on the View Entry Panel and on the Edit Entry
Panel:
Format Name . . . ________
The Format Name field contains the name of a format definition, which is used to
view, browse, or edit a formatted data set. A formatted data set contains records
that consist of subfields. The locations and lengths of these subfields are fixed
throughout the data set. The formatted data set support in View, Browse, and Edit
is particularly useful for data that contains double-byte character (DBCS) data but
does not contain shift-out (SO) and shift-in (SI) characters.
The format name can consist of up to eight alphanumeric characters; the first one
must be alphabetic.
A format definition can include Extended Binary Coded Decimal Interchange Code
(EBCDIC) fields, DBCS fields, and mixed fields. If the specified format includes a
mixed field definition, the Mixed Mode field is ignored, even if you select it. See
“Mixed Mode” on page 135 for information. For information about defining
formats for formatted data sets, see the section on the Format Specifications Utility
(Option 3.11) in the ISPF User’s Guide Volume II. The Format Specifications utility is
provided to support the IBM 5550 terminal that uses DBCS.
When formatted data is displayed, an attribute character that does not reside in the
data set and is not stored in the data set precedes each field. Therefore, the column
position on the display is different from the column position in the data set.
The allowable maximum length is decreased two bytes per field definition from
the standard View, Browse, and Edit allowable maximum length.
134
z/OS V1R6.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol I
Mixed Mode
Mixed Mode
A Mixed Mode field is included on the View Entry Panel and on the Edit Entry
Panel:
_ Mixed Mode
The Mixed Mode field specifies whether you want to view, browse, or edit
unformatted mixed data that contains both EBCDIC (single-byte) and DBCS
(double-byte) characters. Use a slash to select mixed mode. If your terminal does
not support DBCS, the value in this field is ignored.
DBCS strings are enclosed with SO (X’0E’) and SI (X’0F’) characters in
unformatted mixed data. The SO character precedes the DBCS character string and
the SI character follows the string.
If the view, browse, or edit line contains mixed data that are not valid, ISPF
assumes the line can contain only EBCDIC characters. Examples of mixed data that
are not valid include:
v Unpaired SO and SI characters
v Incorrect DBCS characters between SO and SI characters
v An odd number of bytes between SO and SI characters.
If you call View, Browse, or Edit from the Library utility (option 3.1) or the Data
Set List utility (option 3.4), ISPF assumes that you want to use mixed mode.
If you want to view, browse, or edit DBCS data as EBCDIC data, you must do so
in non-mixed mode. You can do this by operating from a terminal that does not
support DBCS or by deselecting the Mixed Mode field.
In non-mixed mode, SO and SI characters are not treated as special characters;
instead, they are treated as characters that cannot be displayed. Thus, you can
view, browse, or edit the data in the conventional way.
You can also view, browse, or edit DBCS data in hexadecimal format, just as you
would EBCDIC data. For information about specifying hexadecimal display, see the
section titled HEX-Displaying Data in Hexadecimal Format in the View (Option 1)
chapter of the ISPF User’s Guide Volume II.
Note: Do not edit a record in hexadecimal format when a DBCS string encroaches
on the display boundary.
DBCS data that is not valid is not supported. If DBCS fields or DBCS strings in a
mixed field contain any bytes with hexadecimal code ranging from X’00’ to X’3F’,
you may get unwanted results.
Partitioned Data Set Extended (PDSE)
The partitioned data set extended (PDSE) is a storage management subsystem
formatted data set. Externally, the PDSE is very similar to a PDS. Internally, the
PDSE contains a new directory structure, member format, and record format. A
PDSE is indistinguishable from a PDS through most interfaces used to access a
PDS directory or member. All ISPF functions support the PDSE.
You can concatenate a PDSE library with a PDS library if they have consistent
record formats and logical record lengths. All functions in the Library Utility
(option 3.1) support PDSEs with the exception of the compress function.
Chapter 5. Libraries and Data Sets
135
Packed Data Sets
Packed Data Sets
The packed data set format allows you to use direct access storage devices (DASD)
more efficiently. In this format, ISPF replaces any repeating characters with a
sequence showing how many times the character is repeated. Before you can
properly use data stored in this format as input to processing programs, such as
compilers, you must first tell ISPF to unpack and expand the data.
The two requirements for using packed data sets are:
v To store data in packed format:
– Enter the PACK ON Edit primary command while editing a data set or PDS
member.
– Select the Pack Option field (under To Data Set Options:) when copying or
moving members using the Move/Copy utility (option 3.3).
v To unpack and expand packed data for processing, select the Source Data
Packed field on the Foreground Selection panel or the Batch Selection panel. You
must select this field if any of the input data, including that referred to in COPY
or INCLUDE statements, is in packed format.
List and Log Data Sets
ISPF helps you get hardcopy listings of source modules, and maintains a log of
significant user activities. These items are kept in data sets called the list data set
and the log data set, respectively.
When needed, the two data sets are allocated automatically. They are temporary
data sets named:
prefix.userid.SPFn.LIST
prefix.userid.SPFLOGn.LIST
prefix The data set prefix in your TSO profile. Used only if it is different from
your user ID.
userid Your user ID.
n
A number from 0 to 9.
If you have specified in your TSO profile a data set prefix that differs from your
user ID, the data set names begin with your data set prefix, followed by your user
ID. Once generated, these data sets remain open throughout your ISPF session.
However, even though they are open, you can still process them by using the ISPF
LIST and LOG commands.
List Data Set
The list data set is used for temporary storage for data to be printed at a later time.
This data includes, for example, data written as a result of:
v Using the LIST service
v Issuing the PRINT, PRINT-HI, PRINTL, or PRINTLHI commands (but not
PRINTG)
v Using Option 3 utilities.
To avoid generating an ISPF list data set, do not request any print functions.
136
z/OS V1R6.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol I
List and Log Data Sets
Log Data Set
The log data set is used to capture data that can be useful for such things as
diagnosing problems. This data includes, for example, data written as a result of:
v Using the LOG service
v Test and trace data such as:
– ISPF TRACE mode data
– Dialog Test option 7.7 dialog trace data.
Use the Log/List pull-down from the ISPF Settings panel action bar to prevent
generating the ISPF log data set. However, if you use the Dialog Test option (7),
allow generating the log data set because Dialog Test writes trace data to the log
when you request it. Also, if Dialog Test finds an unexpected condition, problem
data and error messages are written to the log.
Processing the Log and List Data Sets
You can process the log and list data sets either:
v During an ISPF session, using the LOG and LIST commands
v At the end of a session.
ISPF processes (prints, keeps, deletes) only data sets that it has allocated. Any
attempt to process a log or list data set that has been preallocated by the user
results in an appropriate ISPF message. Any references to ISPF processing of log or
list data sets refer to data sets that ISPF has allocated. Users can supply routines to
process preallocated data sets after ISPF has terminated.
How to Specify Log and List Data Set Processing Options
The log and list data set processing options can be specified through any of the
following:
v Use of the LOG and LIST commands during an ISPF session.
v Use of the Log/List pull-down on the ISPF Settings panel for setting default
options.
v The ISPF termination panel, which can display when you exit from ISPF. See
“Log and List Data Set Processing at the End of a Session” on page 139 to find
out under what conditions ISPF will display this panel.
Processing the Log and List Data Sets During an ISPF
Session
The LOG and LIST commands allow you to process the log and list data sets,
respectively, at any time during an ISPF session. The log and list data sets must
have been allocated. You control the data set processing by specifying on the LOG
or LIST command one of the three keyword options: PRINT, DELETE, or KEEP.
If you issue the LOG or LIST command with no parameter specified, ISPF displays
a panel that allows you to select the data set processing options. The panels for the
LOG and LIST commands are shown in Figure 39 on page 138 and Figure 40 on
page 138, respectively.
Chapter 5. Libraries and Data Sets
137
List and Log Data Sets
Specify Disposition of Log Data Set
Log Data Set (USERID.SPFLOG2.LIST) Disposition:
Process Option . . . .
1. Print data set and delete
2. Delete data set without printing
3. Keep existing data set and
continue with new data set
Batch SYSOUT class . .
Local printer ID or
writer-name . . . . .
Local SYSOUT class . .
Press ENTER key to process the log data set.
Enter END command to exit without processing the log data set.
Job statement information: (Required for system printer)
===>
===>
===>
===>
Command ===>
F1=Help
F2=Split
F12=Cancel
F3=Exit
F7=Backward F8=Forward
F9=Swap
Figure 39. Log Data Set Defaults Panel (ISPLLP01)
Specify Disposition of List Data Set
List Data Set (USERID.SPF1.LIST) Disposition:
Process Option . . . .
1. Print data set and delete
2. Delete data set without printing
3. Keep existing data set and
continue with new data set
Batch SYSOUT class . .
Local printer ID or
writer-name . . . . .
Local SYSOUT class . .
Press ENTER key to process the list data set.
Enter END command to exit without processing the list data set.
Job statement information: (Required for system printer)
===>
===>
===>
===>
Command ===>
F1=Help
F2=Split
F12=Cancel
F3=Exit
F7=Backward F8=Forward
F9=Swap
Figure 40. List Data Set Defaults Panel (ISPLLP02)
With the appropriate panel displayed, type in the process option of your choice. If
you specify Print data set and delete, you must also specify a Batch SYSOUT class,
or local printer ID or writer name. After you have typed in all information that
you wish to specify, press Enter to pass the input to ISPF. ISPF takes the specified
action for the data set and then returns you to the panel from which you issued
the LOG or LIST command. ISPF issues a message indicating whether the action
requested was successful.
138
z/OS V1R6.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol I
List and Log Data Sets
If you issue the END command from the Log or List Data Set Defaults panel, ISPF
returns you to the panel from which you issued the LOG or LIST command
without processing the data set.
ISPF initializes the Log or List Data Set Defaults panel fields with the default
values specified with the Log/List pull-down on the ISPF Settings panel. If a
default disposition of Keep data set has been specified, ISPF translates the value to
Keep data set and allocate new data set before displaying the panel. If you modify
the process option field, the new value is used to process the data set; however, it
is not saved in the system profile. All other fields modified on the panel are saved
in the system profile and become the default values the next time the data set is
processed.
If you issue the LOG or LIST command with the PRINT, DELETE, or KEEP option,
ISPF does not display a panel. Specifying PRINT, DELETE, or KEEP on the
command causes data set processing equivalent to specifying Print data set and
delete, Delete data set, and Keep data set and allocate new data set, respectively,
on the Log or List Data Set Defaults panel.
Two system variables, ZLOGNAME and ZLSTNAME, contain the fully qualified
names of the log and list data sets, respectively. If either data set is not allocated or
has not been used in the session, the corresponding system variable value is blank.
Note: The values of ZLOGNAME and ZLSTNAME are set to blank immediately
after the log and list data sets have been processed because the data sets are
freed by the LOG/LIST command processing. A new data set will not be
allocated until it is written to. If you intend to use the log or list data set
name for your processing, be sure to retrieve it before issuing the LOG or
LIST command.
The system variables are summarized in ISPF Dialog Developer’s Guide and Reference.
Conditions for Using the LOG and LIST Commands
You can issue the LOG or LIST command from any command line except when
any of the following applies:
v The command panel for the related log or list data set is active in any logical
screen.
v The ISPF termination panel is active.
v The data set to be processed is not allocated or was preallocated.
v Dialog Test option 7.5 (Browse ISPF log) is active, and you are attempting to
process the log data set.
An attempt to issue the LOG or LIST command in violation of any of these
conditions results in ISPF issuing an appropriate message.
Log and List Data Set Processing at the End of a Session
Figure 41 shows the panel that ISPF displays at the end of a session if one of the
following is true:
v The initial dialog began with the display of a menu, and the dialog is ended
with the END command issued from that menu.
v The initial dialog began with the performance of a function, and the function
ends with a return code of 0.
v The log and list data set processing defaults have not been specified, or the
default values are not valid.
Chapter 5. Libraries and Data Sets
139
List and Log Data Sets
If the application ends with a nonzero return code, the termination panel is not
displayed.
If the termination panel does not display for one of these reasons, the log and list
data sets are processed using the default options.
Specify Disposition of Log and List Data Sets
More:
Log Data Set (USERID.SPFLOG2.LIST) Disposition:
Process Option . . . .
1. Print data set and delete
2. Delete data set without printing
3. Keep data set - Same
(allocate same data set in next session)
4. Keep data set - New
(allocate new data set in next session)
Batch SYSOUT class . .
Local printer ID or
writer-name . . . . .
Local SYSOUT class . .
+
List Data Set (USERID.SPF1.LIST) Disposition:
Process Option . . . .
1. Print data set and delete
2. Delete data set without printing
3. Keep data set - Same
(allocate same data set in next session)
4. Keep data set - New
(allocate new data set in next session)
Command ===>
F1=Help
F2=Split
F3=Exit
F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap
F12=Cancel
Figure 41. Specify Disposition of Log and List Data Sets Panel (ISPPFT03)
The valid process options shown in Figure 41 are described below.
Data Set Processing Options
For each term defined below, the first value shown is the processing option that
you can specify on the Log/List pull-down from the ISPF Settings panel, on the
Specify Disposition of Log and List Data Sets panel, or on the Log or List Data Set
Defaults panel. The value in parentheses is the corresponding LOG or LIST
command parameter.
1. Print data set and delete (PRINT)
Print the data set, then delete it. You must specify a Batch SYSOUT class or
local printer ID or writer name.
v If the Batch SYSOUT class is specified, ISPF submits a background job to
print and deletes the data set or sets.
v If a local printer ID or writer name is specified, ISPF uses the TSO PRINTDS
command to route the data set to the specified printer or external writer
program and then deletes the data set.
Note: If you have selected Edit PRINTDS Command on the ISPF Settings
panel (option 0), ISPF displays the Local Print Command Edit panel
to allow you to intercept and edit the PRINTDS command before it
processes. See “Editing the PRINTDS Command” on page 141 for
additional information.
ISPF uses file tailoring services to print data on a system printer. Therefore, if
this option is specified during an ISPF session, along with a Batch SYSOUT
140
z/OS V1R6.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol I
List and Log Data Sets
class, file tailoring must not be active on the logical screen from which the
LOG or LIST command is issued. If an FTOPEN or FTINCL has been issued
without a subsequent FTCLOSE, ISPF issues an appropriate message.
2. Delete data set without printing (DELETE)
Delete the data set.
3. Keep data set - Same
Not applicable to LOG or LIST command. Close and free the data set. Allocate
the same data set the next session.
4. Keep data set - New (KEEP)
Close and free the data set. Allocate a different data set for the next session or
the next time log or list information is generated in this session.
Editing the PRINTDS Command
If you have selected Edit PRINTDS Command on the ISPF Settings panel (option
0) and you specify a local printer ID or writer name on either the Log and List
Data Set Termination Options panel or the Hardcopy Utility panel, ISPF displays
the Local Print Command Edit panel shown in Figure 42 to allow you to edit the
PRINTDS command before it processes.
Local Print Command Edit
Select function to perform and press Enter to exit and print.
End or Cancel will exit without printing.
Local Print Command Options:
Function to perform . . . 1 1. Exit and issue PRINTDS command
2. Exit without printing
PRINTDS Header:
. . : PRINTDS DATASET(’USERID.SPFLOG3.LIST’) DEST(PRINTER1) CCHAR
Configuration table PRINTDS operands:
. . . NONUM
User PRINTDS operands:
. . .
F1=Help
F12=Cancel
F2=Split
F3=Exit
F7=Backward F8=Forward
F9=Swap
Figure 42. Local Print Command Edit Panel (ISPCHPLP)
The fields on this panel function as follows:
Function to perform
Specify the print function you want ISPF to perform:
1
Exit ISPF and issue the PRINTDS command (as edited below)
2
Exit ISPF without printing.
Note: If you arrive at this panel from ISPF termination processing,
you will continue with termination and exit the product after
your print request is issued or cancelled.
Chapter 5. Libraries and Data Sets
141
List and Log Data Sets
PRINTDS Header
This field cannot be edited. It contains the PRINTDS command, the data
set name, the printer ID or writer name, and the CCHAR operand, if
appropriate.
Configuration table PRINTDS operands
These operands operate at a system level and can be altered only in the
ISPF Configuration table.
User PRINTDS operands
Enter additional operands (for example, COPIES or FORMS). These
operands can be edited and are saved in the application command table.
If you enter CANCEL (or select Cancel), the PRINTDS command is not issued. If
you enter END or RETURN or use a jump function, the PRINTDS command is
issued and you receive a completion message.
Foreground and Batch Output Listings
The following additional listing data sets are allocated as needed for foreground or
batch processing:
prefix.userid.list-id.LIST
prefix.userid.list-id.LINKLIST
prefix.userid.list-id.TERM
prefix.userid.list-id.TESTLIST
prefix The data set prefix in your TSO profile. Use it only if you have one and it
is different from your user ID.
userid Your user ID.
list-id The name specified in the List ID field on the foreground or batch data
entry panel. This name is required for sequential data sets. However, for
partitioned data sets, the member name becomes the default list-id if the
List ID field is blank.
The particular data set names you use depend on the foreground or batch
processing option chosen.
For batch processing, the output can either be directed to a list data set or printed
as part of the batch job. When batch processing is finished, you can browse the list
data set, and then use the Hardcopy utility (option 3.6) to print it. Using this
utility, show whether you want to keep the data set or delete it after printing. ISPF
does not delete these data sets when you end ISPF.
For the foreground option, the output listing is directed to a list data set and
automatically displayed for browsing. When you end the browse function, ISPF
displays a selection panel that allows you to choose whether to print, keep, or
delete the list data set. Again, ISPF does not delete this data set when you end
ISPF.
Other Temporary Data Sets
If you are using virtual I/O (VIO), you can allocate space for temporary data sets,
and then VIO assigns them system-generated names. Otherwise, ISPF allocates
temporary control and listing data sets, as needed, for its own internal use. You are
usually not aware of their existence. They are assigned the following names:
142
z/OS V1R6.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol I
Other Temporary Data Sets
prefix.user-id.SPFTEMPn.CNTL
prefix.user-id.SPFTEMPn.LIST
prefix.user-id.appl-idzzzz.BACKUP
prefix.user-id.appl-idzzzz.BACKUPI
prefix.user-id.SPFxxx.OUTLIST
prefix
The data set prefix in your TSO profile. It is used only if you have
one and it is different from your user ID.
userid
Your user ID.
n
A number from 1–4, depending on which logical screen is active.
appl-id
The application ID.
zzzz
A number from 0001–0008, or higher if customized, controlled by
the edit recovery table (appl-id EDRT for the EDREC service and
appl-id EIRT for the EDIREC service) and the number of concurrent
edit calls that are active.
xxx
A number generated by ISPF, which has a range of 100–999.
These data sets are deleted:
v By edit recovery when the data sets are no longer needed
v When you specifically request that they be deleted.
v By Move/Copy when no IEBCOPY errors are encountered.
Job Statement Information
ISPF allows you to submit Batch jobs for printing and language processing.
However, before submitting a Batch job, you must supply job statement
information. For this purpose, four lines are provided on each job submission
panel.
You can use the lines that contain //*:
v As continuation lines by removing the asterisk (*)
v To enter other JCL statements, such as JOBLIB DD.
If you do not need these lines, you can blank them out. Blank lines are not
submitted to the job stream.
Running a Sample ISPF Session
This section provides an example of an ISPF session. For new users, it is a quick
introduction to ISPF. For users with previous ISPF experience, it is a quick review.
It can also be used to demonstrate that ISPF has been properly installed and is
operational.
The scenario requires the installation of a data set named SYS1.SAMPLIB. This
data set is included on the ISPF basic distribution tape and should contain the
following four members:
ISRASM
Sample assembler source
ISRCOBOL
Sample COBOL source
ISRFORT
Sample FORTRAN source
ISRPLI
Sample PL/I source.
During this scenario, member ISRASM is copied from SYS1.SAMPLIB to a user
data set. The other three members are not used.
Chapter 5. Libraries and Data Sets
143
Running a Sample ISPF Session
For this scenario, the TSO Assembler Prompter, program number 5734-CP2, is
installed and available. If the Assembler Prompter is not available at your
installation, skip steps 35 through 48.
Action
Result
1. Log on to TSO.
A READY message appears on your screen.
2. Type ISPF (or the appropriate alias) and press Enter.
The ISPF Primary Option Menu appears.
3. On the Option line, type 3 to select the Utilities option.
Then press Enter.
The Utility Selection Panel appears.
4. On the Option line, type 2 to select the Data Set utility.
Then press Enter.
The Data Set Utility panel appears.
5. On the Option line, type A to allocate a new data set.
The Allocate New Data Set panel appears. Note: The
Specify an ISPF library by typing the following information, Project name must be defined as a valid high-level
but substitute your first name in the Group field:
identifier on your installation. Generally, user-ids are
defined as such. If this is not true for your installation,
Project . . your_user_id
contact your system programmer for information
Group . . . name
about what project names are valid for your system.
Type . . . . ASM
Now press Enter.
6. Type the following information:
Note: Leave ALL fields blank except the following.
Space units . . . .
Primary quantity. .
Secondary quantity.
Directory blocks. .
Record format . . .
Record length . . .
Block size . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Data set your_user_id.name.ASM is allocated on
scratch volume. The Data Set Utility panel reappears.
TRKS
2
1
1
FB
80
3120
Now press Enter.
7. Select option A again and specify the following ISPF
library, again substituting your first name in the Group
field:
The Allocate New Data Set panel reappears.
Project . . your_user_id
Group . . . name
Type . . . . OBJ
Press Enter.
8. Leave everything the same. Just press Enter.
Data set your_user_id.name.OBJ is allocated. The Data
Set Utility panel reappears.
9. Press F3.
The Utility Selection Panel reappears.
10. Press F3 again.
The ISPF Primary Option Menu reappears.
11. Type 3.3 to select the Move/Copy utility, bypassing the
Utility Selection Menu. Press Enter.
The Move/Copy Utility panel appears.
12. Now you will copy a data set. On the Option line, type
C to select Copy data set or member(s). Then, under From
Other Partitioned or Sequential Data Set:, enter the
following data set name:
A panel titled COPY FROM SYS1.SAMPLIB(ISRASM)
is displayed.
Data Set Name . . . ’SYS1.SAMPLIB(ISRASM)’
Press Enter.
144
z/OS V1R6.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol I
Running a Sample ISPF Session
Action
Result
13. Under To ISPF Library:, type the following values:
Member ISRASM is copied from data set
SYS1.SAMPLIB to ISPF library
your_user_id.name.ASM. Then, the Move/Copy Utility
panel reappears.
Project . . your_user_id
Group . . . name
Type . . . . ASM
Press Enter.
14. Press F3.
The ISPF Primary Option Menu appears.
15. Now you will browse member ISRASM. On the Option
line, type 1 to select View and press Enter.
The View Entry Panel appears. Select Browse Mode.
16. Type the following under ISPF LIBRARY:
A member list is displayed, showing ISRASM as the
only member in the your_user_id.name.ASM library.
Project . . your_user_id
Group . . . name
Type . . . . ASM
Note: Leave the Member field blank.
Press Enter.
17. Move the cursor to the left of ISRASM. Then type S to
select ISRASM and press Enter.
A panel titled BROWSE your_user_id.name.ASM
(ISRASM) appears. This is the first page of member
ISRASM.
18. Press F8 to scroll ahead one page.
The second page of ISRASM appears.
19. Press F7 to scroll backward one page.
The first page of ISRASM reappears.
20. Type FIND COMMENT on the Command line and press
Enter.
The cursor moves to the first occurrence of the
character string COMMENT and the string is intensified.
Also, the message CHARS ’COMMENT’ FOUND is displayed
in the upper-right corner of the screen.
21. To find the next occurrence of COMMENT, press F5, the
RFIND command.
The cursor moves to the second occurrence of COMMENT
and once again the string is intensified.
22. Press F3.
The member list reappears.
23. Press F3 again.
The View Entry Panel reappears.
24. Press F3 one more time.
The ISPF Primary Option Menu appears.
25. Now you will edit member ISRASM. On the Option
line, type 2 to select Edit and press Enter.
The Edit Entry Panel appears.
26. Type ISRASM in the Member field and press Enter.
A panel titled EDIT your_user_id.name.ASM(ISRASM)
appears. This is the first page of member ISRASM.
27. On the Command line, type FIND COMMENT and press
Enter to find the line containing the character string
COMMENT.
The cursor moves to the first occurrence of the
character string and the line number is intensified.
28. Delete COMMENT by pressing the Erase EOF key.
COMMENT is erased. Any characters to the right of
COMMENT are erased, also.
29. Press F5 to find the next occurrence of COMMENT.
The cursor moves to the second occurrence of COMMENT
and the line number is intensified.
30. Move the cursor to the sequence number of the line
below COMMENT, then move the cursor up one line. Repeat
the COMMENT line by typing R over the first digit of the line
number and pressing Enter.
The line is repeated.
31. On the Command line, type AUTOLIST ON, and press
Enter.
Sets autolist mode on for automatic source listings.
32. Try out more Edit commands if you like, but remember: HAVE FUN!
this program will be assembled later.
Chapter 5. Libraries and Data Sets
145
Running a Sample ISPF Session
Action
Result
33. Press F3.
Member ISRASM is saved in data set
your_user_id.name.ASM and a listing of the member is
placed in the ISPF list data set. The Edit Entry Panel
appears.
34. Press F3 again.
The ISPF Primary Option Menu appears.
35. Now you will assemble the program. On the Option
The Foreground Selection Panel appears.
line, type 4 and press Enter to select the Foreground option.
36. On the Option line, type 1 and press Enter to select
Assembler.
The Foreground Assembler panel appears.
37. Type the following values:
The Assembler Prompter is called. Terminal output is
written at the bottom of a blank screen. When *** is
displayed, press Enter to continue.
Note: The assembly may take a few minutes.
Project
Group .
Type .
Member
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.your_user_id
.name
.ASM
.ISRASM
List ID . . .ASMTEST1
The assembly listing is displayed in Browse mode.
Assembler Options:
===> TEST,RENT
Press Enter.
38. Browse the listing using the scroll commands. Then
press F3.
The Foreground Print Options panel appears.
39. On the Option line, type K to select Keep data set
(without printing) and press Enter.
The assembled program is saved in the list data set
and the Foreground Assembler panel reappears.
40. Press F3.
The Foreground Selection Panel reappears.
41. Press F3 again.
The ISPF Primary Option Menu appears.
42. On the Option line, type 5 to select the Batch option and The Batch Selection Panel appears.
press Enter.
43. On the Option line, type 1 to select Assembler, enter job
statement information as required by your installation, and
press Enter.
The Batch Assembler panel appears.
44. Type the following values:
JCL for assembling ISRASM is generated. The Batch
Selection Panel reappears. The message ″Job step
generated″ appears in the upper right corner of the
panel.
Project
Group .
Type .
Member
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
your_user_id
name
ASM
ISRASM
List ID . . . . . ASMTEST2
Assembler options:
Term . . . TERM
(TERM or NOTERM)
Other . . . OBJ,NODECK,LIST
Press Enter.
45. Press F3.
The job is submitted. The job name is displayed at the
bottom of the screen. When *** is displayed, press
Enter. The ISPF Primary Option Menu appears.
46. On the Option line, type 6 to select the Command
option. Press Enter.
The ISPF Command Shell panel appears.
47. Type the following command:
Press Enter.
The status of your job appears. When *** is displayed,
press Enter. The ISPF Command Shell panel is
displayed again with the previous command still
showing.
48. Press F3.
The ISPF Primary Option Menu reappears.
===> STATUS
146
z/OS V1R6.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol I
Running a Sample ISPF Session
Action
Result
49. Move the cursor to Help on the action bar. Press Enter.
On the resulting pop-up window, select 18.
The beginning of the ISPF tutorial appears. Follow the
directions to learn more about ISPF. When you have
finished, press F3 to return to the ISPF Primary
Option Menu.
If you have followed this scenario, you should have an Assembler listing in a data
set named either prefix.userid.ASMTEST1.LIST or userid.ASMTEST1.LIST. Also,
when the job that you submitted has finished, you will have another listing in a
data set named either prefix.userid.ASMTEST2.LIST or userid.ASMTEST2.LIST. Try
the Browse option to review the listings and try experimenting with other ISPF
options. When you have finished, return to the ISPF Primary Option Menu.
Action
Result
50. With the ISPF Primary Option Menu on the screen,
press F3.
The ISPF Specify Disposition of Log and List Data Sets
panel appears.
51. Select the process option to print and delete both the log Data sets will be printed, then deleted through batch
and list data sets, and fill in the job statement information
jobs submitted by ISPF. The job name is displayed at
as required by your installation. Press Enter.
the bottom of the screen.
52. You are now out of ISPF. To leave TSO, type LOGOFF and This is the end of this usage scenario.
press Enter.
Chapter 5. Libraries and Data Sets
147
Running a Sample ISPF Session
148
z/OS V1R6.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol I
Chapter 6. Getting Ready to Run on MVS
This chapter helps you prepare to use ISPF data-element libraries. ISPF data
elements include such things as panels and messages. Libraries to be accessed
during processing of a dialog must be defined to ISPF. This chapter describes the
kinds of data-element libraries required when ISPF is active. It also describes and
provides examples of how to define library data sets to ISPF, both before starting a
session, and dynamically during a session.
Setting Up ISPF Libraries
To set up libraries for developing and testing dialogs, follow these steps:
1. Set up the panel, message, skeleton, table, and program libraries for the
application. Allocate new partitioned data sets.
2. Create a CLIST or REXX command procedure that contains the necessary
ALLOCATE statements to allocate the libraries. Concatenate the application
libraries ahead of the libraries required by ISPF, as described in “Library
Concatenation” on page 114.
Note: You can use the LIBDEF service to dynamically allocate libraries instead
of allocating them before invoking ISPF. For more information see the
ISPF Services Guide.
3. Create the panels, messages, and skeletons by editing directly into the
application libraries.
4. Create the dialog functions and ensure that the load modules are in libraries
accessible to ISPF.
Functions coded as program modules must be link-edited. When a function is
link-edited, the ISPLINK subroutine must be included (explicitly or by
automatic call) in the load module. ISPLINK is distributed in load module
format and can be placed in a system library for automatic call during link-edit.
5. Invoke the application. To do this, add an ISPSTART command to the
command procedure created in step 2. The ISPSTART command should start
the application using the appropriate PANEL, CMD, or PGM parameter. Users
can start the application by using this command procedure or by selecting the
application from the master menu or another menu.
Allocating Required ISPF Libraries
The libraries described in Table 9 are partitioned data sets required for operation of
ISPF in the MVS/TSO environment:
Table 9. Required Partitioned Data Sets
DDNAME
Description
RECFM
LRECL
BLKSIZE
ISPPLIB
Panel Library
FB
80
3120
ISPMLIB
Message Library
FB
80
3120
ISPSLIB
Skeleton Library
FB
80
3120
ISPTLIB
Table Input Library
FB
80
3120
ISPPROF
User Profile Library
FB
80
(see note)
SYSPROC
Command Procedures Lib
FB
80
3120
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1980, 2004
149
Getting Ready to Run on MVS
Note: The block size can be established by the application. It must be a multiple of
80.
The panel, message, skeleton, and table input libraries are distributed with ISPF.
As distributed, the libraries have the characteristics listed above. These libraries
can be reblocked by the installation to a larger block size. In addition, the panel,
message, and skeleton libraries can be copied into a variable record format. The
maximum length records supported are 160 for panels, 80 for messages, and 255
for skeletons. If data sets having unequal record lengths are to be concatenated, the
record format must be variable. If you have preprocessed any panels in the panel
library, they must be reprocessed using the ISPPREP utility after changing the
panel library’s record size or record format. Preprocessed panels will not function
correctly if copied directly to a data set with a different record size or format.
Table 10 contains the LRECL limits which are enforced during ISPF initialization:
Table 10. LRECL Limits during ISPF Initialization
RECFM
Minimum
LRECL
Maximum
LRECL
Panel Library
FB VB
80 84
160 164
ISPMLIB
Message Library
FB VB
80 84
80 84
ISPSLIB
Skeleton Library
FB VB
80 84
255 259
DDNAME
Description
ISPPLIB
The VB libraries require the LRECL to contain 4 extra bytes for the record
descriptor word.
Note: Use of the BUFNO parameter on allocation of ISPF libraries is not
supported.
Problems can occur when using file tailoring services together with other services
(EDIT, COPY, ...) that result in modifying the data set members in the ISPSLIB
concatenation. ISPSLIB is the input skeleton library, and it is assumed to be a static
library. FTINCL obtains existing DCB/DEB information based on the last OPEN
done against ISPSLIB by ISPF.
It is recommended that applications that use file tailoring and that also modify
members of ISPSLIB use the LIBDEF service for ISPSLIB to point to the
application’s skeleton library. Additionally, the application should check for any
changes to the data set information (DCB/DEB) before invoking file tailoring
services. If there has been a change, then the application should issue a NULL
LIBDEF for ISPSLIB and then re-issue the original LIBDEF for ISPSLIB. This forces
the ISPSLIB library to close and then re-open.
ISPF assumes that ISPSLIB is a static library. When you make allocations, consider
limiting the possibility of extents by allocating the skeleton with the largest
optimal block size.
There is a separate profile library for each end user. Its contents are dynamically
generated and updated while ISPF is running. There is also a unique profile library
for each national language version.
150
z/OS V1R6.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol I
Getting Ready to Run on MVS
The recommended data set names for these libraries are shown below. Check with
your ISPF system administrator to determine if these are the actual data set names
used at your installation.
DDNAME
DSNAME
ISPPLIB
ISP.SISPPxxx
ISPMLIB
ISP.SISPMxxx
ISPSLIB
ISP.SISPSxxx ISP.SISPSLIB
ISPTLIB
ISP.SISPTxxx
ISPPROF
User-selected. Unique for each national language used.
SYSPROC
ISP.SISPEXEC ISP.SISPCLIB
xxx is a placeholder that represents the specific language you are using:
xxx
ENU
DES
DEU
JPN
ENP
Language
US English
Swiss German
German
Japanese
Uppercase English.
You should concatenate application libraries for panels, messages, skeletons, and
tables ahead of the corresponding ISPF libraries using the DDNAMEs shown
above. The application libraries must have the same data set characteristics as the
required libraries, as described above. For example, assume that application XYZ
uses the following partitioned data sets for panels, messages, skeletons, and tables:
XYZ.PANELS
XYZ.MSGS
XYZ.SKELS
XYZ.TABLES
You would issue the following allocations:
//ISPPLIB DD DSN=XYZ.PANELS,DISP=SHR
//
DD DSN=ISP.SISPPxxx,DISP=SHR
//ISPMLIB DD DSN=XYZ.MSGS,DISP=SHR
//
DD DSN=ISP.SISPMxxx,DISP=SHR
//ISPSLIB DD DSN=XYZ.SKELS,DISP=SHR
//
DD DSN=ISP.SISPSxxx,DISP=SHR
//
DD DSN=ISP.SISPSLIB,DISP=SHR
//ISPTLIB DD DSN=XYZ.TABLES,DISP=SHR
//
DD DSN=ISP.SISPTENU,DISP=SHR
//ISPPROF DD DSN=USERAA.ISPF.PROFILE,DISP=OLD
//SYSPROC DD DSN=ISP.SISPEXEC,DISP=SHR
//
DD DSN=ISP.SISPCLIB,DISP=SHR
These allocations must be performed before you start ISPF. They can be done in
the user’s TSO LOGON procedure by using DD statements, as shown above, or in
a CLIST or REXX command procedure by using the corresponding TSO
ALLOCATE commands.
Chapter 6. Getting Ready to Run on MVS
151
Getting Ready to Run on MVS
Allocating Optional Table and File Tailoring ISPF Libraries
The data sets described in Table 11 are optional. You must allocate them only if an
application uses table or file-tailoring services.
Table 11. Table and File-Tailoring Data Sets
DDNAME
Description
RECFM
LRECL
BLKSIZE
ISPTABL
Table Output Library
FB
80
(See note)
ISPFILE
File-Tailoring Output
FB/VB
255 max.
Note: The block size can be established by the application. It must be a multiple of
80.
The table output library must be a partitioned data set. The ISPTABL DDNAME
that defines the table output library can specify the same data set as the table input
library, DDNAME ISPTLIB. The output and input data sets must be the same if the
updated version of a table is to be reprocessed by the same dialog that updated it.
You must allocate the table output library to DDNAME ISPTABL before using table
services. ISPF includes ENQ logic to prevent simultaneous updates. ISPTABL must
not specify a concatenated sequence of data sets.
The dialog can dynamically allocate ISPTABL, and can free it upon completion of
its use. ISPTABL should be allocated with DISP=SHR, even though it specifies an
output data set. The TSO Programming Control Facility II (PCF) cannot protect the
table output library from unauthorized updating if the library is allocated
DISP=SHR. The library can be either protected by RAC or allocated with
DISP=OLD and protected by PCF.
File-tailoring output can be written to a temporary sequential data set provided by
ISPF. The temporary data set is allocated automatically, so there is no need for the
dialog to allocate a data set. The fully qualified name of the temporary data set is
available in system variable ZTEMPF. The DDNAME is available in ZTEMPN. This
temporary data set always uses 80-character fixed-length records.
If the temporary data set is not used, file-tailoring output can be written to either a
partitioned or a sequential data set. Both fixed-length and variable-length records
are permitted. The maximum logical record length is 255 bytes. A data set must be
allocated to DDNAME ISPFILE before starting file-tailoring services. The dialog
can dynamically allocate the output library, and can free it upon completion. For a
sequential data set, ISPFILE must be allocated with DISP=OLD. For a partitioned
data set, it can be allocated with DISP=SHR but cannot be protected by the
Program Control Facility II (PCF) unless it is allocated with DISP=OLD. ISPFILE
must not specify a concatenated sequence of data sets.
Allocating Optional Image ISPF Library
The data set described in Table 12 is not a required ISPF library. You must allocate
it only if an application in GUI mode uses images.
Table 12. Image Data Set
152
DDNAME
Description
RECFM
LRECL
BLKSIZE
ISPILIB
Image Input Library
FB
80
(See note)
z/OS V1R6.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol I
Getting Ready to Run on MVS
Note: The block size can be established by the application. It must be a multiple of
80.
If you plan to use ISPF’s image support, you must allocate the image input data
set to ddname ISPILIB before using the images. You can accomplish this by
allocating the image input data set before you invoke ISPF. Image files in Graphic
Interchange Format (GIF) should reside in this input data set. This data set must
be a partitioned data set. It can be allocated with DISP=SHR.
Note: The LIBDEF service does not result in the allocation of ISPILIB.
ISPF ships sample image files in the sample library SISPSAMP. The ISPF panel
ISR@PRIM uses three of the sample image files: ISPFGIFL, ISPFGIFS, and ISPEXIT.
You can copy the sample image files to your own image input data set allocated to
ddname ISPILIB.
Allocating CLIST, REXX, and Program Libraries
Dialog functions that are coded as CLIST or REXX command procedures can be in
a procedure library that has been allocated to DDNAME SYSPROC prior to
starting ISPF. A REXX command procedure can also be allocated to the SYSEXEC
DDNAME. The SYSEXEC DDNAME is described in TSO/E Version 2 REXX User’s
Guide.
You must link-edit dialog functions that have been coded as programs. The load
module can reside in a step library, a system link library (such as SYS1.LINKLIB),
or the link pack area. Alternatively, it can be in a partitioned data set (RECFM=U)
allocated to DDNAME ISPLLIB(DISP=SHR). This library (the ISPF Link Library)
can be used for testing new dialogs that contain program-coded functions. If used,
it must be allocated prior to starting ISPF. ISPLLIB can specify a concatenated
sequence of partitioned data sets.
ISPLLIB is used as a task library when fetching load modules. It is searched before
the system link libraries and the link pack area. If ISPF product modules are kept
in a step library and a task library (ISPLLIB) is used, the data sets containing the
ISPF product modules should be included in the ISPLLIB concatenation sequence
as well as the step library concatenation. If a program is to be used in split-screen
mode it should be linked as reentrant or nonreusable.
The exception to this search order is the SISPSASC library. Modules in it are not
searched for using the ISPLLIB task library. SISPSASC must be in STEPLIB or
LNKLST if you are using the ISPF C/S feature. For more information about
SISPSASC, refer to ISPF Planning and Customizing.
Allocating DBCS Libraries
DBCS users can use alternate message, panel, and skeleton libraries. To do so, the
DBCS versions of the libraries must have been allocated using these DDNAMEs:
ISPMALT
Alternate message library
ISPPALT
Alternate panel library
ISPSALT
Alternate skeleton library.
Chapter 6. Getting Ready to Run on MVS
153
Getting Ready to Run on MVS
You can allocate these libraries when you allocate the distributed ISPF libraries. If
the alternate libraries are allocated and the terminal has DBCS capability, ISPF uses
the alternate libraries. If either of these two conditions is not satisfied, ISPF uses
the distributed libraries.
Selecting the National Language for ISPF Sessions
An ISPF session can be run in any installation-supported national language. Before
starting ISPF with the ISPSTART command, a user must perform the necessary
allocations. For example, command procedure ISPFE might be issued for an
English session or ISPFG for a German session.
The same set of DDNAMEs (ISPPLIB, ISPMLIB, ISPSLIB, ISPTLIB, and ISPPROF)
must be allocated regardless of the command procedure used. At logon time, the
necessary allocations for the national language at an installation can be performed
by a CLIST or REXX logon procedure.
The language in which a session runs reflects the value (not always the full
language name) in the read-only system variable ZLANG, which is available to
dialogs running under ISPF. The default value for session languages is specified
when ISPF is installed, and is discussed in ISPF Planning and Customizing. You can
override the default session language with an alternate language keyword on the
ISPSTART command. See the ISPF Dialog Developer’s Guide and Reference for the
exact syntax to use.
By specifying a default session language, the installation can ensure that both ISPF
initialization messages and the normal session messages are in the default
language. Even if you override the session default language with an alternate
language using an ISPSTART language keyword, some of the first initialization
messages, issued before the command scan, are in the default session language.
However, any messages issued after processing of the ISPSTART parameters are in
the language specified by the keyword.
If the terminal does not support DBCS, and the default language (or the alternate
language selected by the language keyword) requires DBCS, ISPF uses English as
the session language.
In cases where the session language requires DBCS, certain messages are always
issued in English. These messages are:
v ISPF Main task abend.
v ISPF Subtask abend.
v The following required module for the selected language could not be loaded.
v ISPF command not allowed. You are already under ISPF.
v Invalid environment; TSO/E version 2.1 or later required.
154
z/OS V1R6.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol I
Part 2. Appendixes
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1980, 2004
155
156
z/OS V1R6.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol I
Appendix A. Installing the Client/Server Component
The Client/Server component of ISPF takes the form of an application called the
ISPF Workstation Agent (WSA). The WSA runs on your local workstation and
maintains a connection between the workstation and the ISPF host. The WSA
provides:
v The ability to display the ISPF panels using the display function of your
workstation operating system (known as running in GUI mode).
v The ability to edit host data on your workstation and workstation data on the
host (known as distributed editing).
The WSA installation file is supplied with ISPF and must be downloaded from the
host to the local workstation and then installed and initialized before these
functions are available.
Installation Considerations for the Client/Server component
This section provides information on the following topics that you need to be
aware of before you install the WSA component on your workstation:
v Assumptions
v Required hardware and software
v Configuration parameters
Assumptions
The Workstation Agent assumes that you have already established either:
v An APPC connection between your workstation and the host, and your
workstation is running under OS/2;
OR
v A TCP/IP connection between your workstation and the host, and your
workstation is running under one of the following supported operating systems:
– IBM OS/2
– Microsoft Windows 2000
– AIX
– HP-UX
– Solaris (SUN).
All necessary APPC or TCP/IP communications software must be initialized fully
before starting the WSA. The WSA does not attempt to initialize the
communications protocol again after it receives the first initialization error.
for information about installation and customization of the APPC or TCP/IP
software used on your workstation, consult the documentation supplied by your
software vendor. Additional information can be found in Appendix B,
“Configuring Communications for the ISPF Client/Server,” on page 169.
The WSA installation file is downloaded using the ISPF C/S Component Install
Utility. This utility provides three ways of obtaining the file:
1. Using File Transfer Protocol (FTP): This option assumes that you have a
TCP/IP connection (not APPC), that the TCP/IP on your workstation supports
the File Transfer Protocol (FTP) and that FTP is operational at your workstation.
An operational FTP requires that:
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1980, 2004
157
Installing the Client/Server Component
v FTP be configured and started on the workstation.
v The workstation FTP server (FTPD), or “Daemon,” be active.
v The users have the authority to transfer files. Users are authorized through
entries in the FTP Daemon access protection file. See “Configuration
Parameters” for additional information.
2. Using an existing WSA connection to get a new or updated version: This option
assumes that you have already downloaded and installed a previous version of
the WSA and is suitable for use by those with TCP/IP or APPC connections.
3. Using a manual method: If your workstation does not support FTP, or you do
not have an established connection, it is assumed that you have a means of
transferring the ISPF C/S workstation programs down from the host files to the
workstation. Although the ISPF C/S Install Utility does not provide an
automated download procedure for all users, it does provide information that
can assist in the download process.
Required Hardware and Software
For the hardware and software requirements for ISPF, refer to z/OS Planning for
Installation, document number GA22–7504.
Configuration Parameters
Before you run the ISPF C/S Install Utility, gather the following installation-unique
parameters:
IP Address
The TCP/IP address, Internet address, workstation ID, or Internet
address alias. Required for download options 1 (FTP) or 2 (existing
WSA connection).
Note: for information about how to obtain your IP Address, see
“TCP/IP Requirements Detail” on page 169.
User ID
This is the FTP user name that must have write access to the
directory where the workstation ISPF Workstation Agent code is to
be installed. Required for download option 1 (FTP) only.
Note: The user authorization is granted through an entry in the
FTP Daemon access protection file. If you do not have an
entry in this file, you will need to create one. Refer to the
TCP/IP documentation for details on creating a user entry
in the FTPD Access Protection file.
Password
Password for the FTP User ID specified. Required for download
option 1 (FTP) only.
Directory
The workstation directory where you want the utility to install the
programmable workstation programs. The user must have write
access to this directory. Required for all download options.
Downloading the Workstation Agent
This section provides a step-by-step method for downloading and installing the
Workstation Agent for the first time. For additional information about the ISPF
panels used in the process, see the ’Download Data Set to Workstation Utility
(Option 3.7)’ section of the ISPF User’s Guide Volume II.
1. From the Primary Option Menu panel, enter 3.7 (Utilities/Download Data Set
to Workstation).
158
z/OS V1R6.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol I
Installing the Client/Server Component
2. On the Download Data Set to Workstation panel, enter option 1 (ISPF C/S
Download ISPF C/S component).
3. On the Client/Server Component Download panel, choose your download
method.
v 1. FTP (requires workstation FTP server).
Download using FTP. ISPF invokes the host FTP client to connect with the
FTP server on your workstation and transfer the WSA installation program.
v 2. ISPF C/S (requires workstation connection).
Download using ISPF Client/Server. If you already have a workstation agent
installed on your workstation, you can use the built-in file transfer services
to download a new WSA installation program. This process is described in
detail in the ’Download Data Set to Workstation Utility (Option 3.7)’ section
of the ISPF User’s Guide Volume II.
v 3. Manual.
ISPF tells you the name of the file you need to copy. You can copy it with
any method you prefer as long as you maintain the data integrity of the
WSA installation program. For example, you could use the File Transfer
facility in your terminal emulator software. The file must be downloaded as
″binary″.
4. Specify the type of workstation environment in which you want to use the
WSA.
You must indicate which workstation operating system you want the WSA to
run in, by typing the appropriate number in the Workstation Type entry field.
5. In the “Directory to copy file to:” field, specify a directory on your workstation
where you want to store the WSA installation program. You can specify a full
path name or a relative directory, or leave this field blank. If you leave it blank,
the download is made to your home directory (in the case of FTP downloads)
or the current directory (in the case of client/server downloads). If you specify
a relative directory (one that does not start with a drive letter or slash
character) the directory is relative to the FTP home directory or the
client/server current directory.
6. You can download into an existing directory, or you can have ISPF create the
directory you specify on the panel. If you want ISPF to create the directory on
your workstation before copying the WSA installation program, select the Create
directory to which the file is to be copied field.
7. By default, the Data set to copy file from: entry field displays the name of the
host data set that contains the WSA installation program. This field value varies
depending on the naming convention that was used when ISPF was installed. If
the WSA installation program has been moved or copied elsewhere, you can
change the name of this data set.
8. Press Enter. The remaining steps will differ according to the download method
selected.
File Transfer Protocol (FTP) Download
When you select choice 1 FTP (requires workstation FTP server) under Download
methods on the ISPF Client/Server Component Download panel, ISPF displays the
ISPF Client/Server Installation Notice panel shown in Figure 43 on page 160.
Appendix A. Installing the Client/Server Component
159
Installing the Client/Server Component
┌─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐
─ │
Client/Server Installation Notice
│
I │
│
│ For successful FTP download of the client server component:
│
1 │
│
2 │ o There must be TCP/IP connectivity between the z/OS host and the
│
│
workstation.
│
│
│
│ o An FTP server must be running on the workstation.
│
│
│
│ If either of these conditions does not exist, you must choose another │
│ method to download the installation program.
│
│
│
│ ENTER to continue, END or CANCEL to return to the previous screen.
│
│
│
│
│
│ Command ===>
│
│ F1=Help
F2=Split
F3=Exit
F9=Swap
F12=Cancel
│
└─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘
Option ===> 1
F1=Help
F2=Split
F10=Actions F12=Cancel
F3=Exit
F7=Backward F8=Forward
F9=Swap
Figure 43. ISPF Client/Server Installation Notice (ISPWSD02)
This panel is a reminder to you that certain conditions must be present for you to
use the FTP download method. Aside from the two specific conditions mentioned
on the panel, you must also ensure that:
v the path specified in step 5 on page 159 has write access (review your TRUSERS
file);
v you have read access to the MVS data base where the ISPF Client/Server
Component is stored; and
v the directory where you want to copy the component exists, OR you have
selected the Create directory option on the previous panel.
To complete the download:
1. Press Enter. ISPF displays the panel shown in Figure 44 on page 161.
160
z/OS V1R6.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol I
Installing the Client/Server Component
┌───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐
─ │
Client/Server Component Download
│ ──
I │
│
│ Enter the following information to download the ISPF Client/Server
│
1 │ Component via FTP:
│
2 │
│
│
│
│ IP Address or Host Name of workstation:
│
│
│
│ User to login: (Case sensitive)
│
│
│
│ Password for login: (Case sensitive)
│
│
│
│
│
│ Enter "/" to select option
│
│ / Browse FTP output only if an error occurs.
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│ Command ===>
│
O │ F1=Help
F2=Split
F3=Exit
F7=Backward F8=Forward │
│ F9=Swap
F12=Cancel
│
F └───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘
Figure 44. Second Client/Server Component Download Panel (ISPWSD04)
2. Complete the fields on this panel with the appropriate information:
IP Address or Host Name to OPEN
The dotted IP address or name of the workstation ID to which you
want to copy the ISPF Workstation Agent installation program.
User to login
The file transfer protocol (FTP) user name. This name must have write
access to the directory where the ISPF Workstation Agent code will be
installed and is case sensitive.
Password for login
The password for the user ID you want to use at the FTP server. You
can leave this field blank if the user id is ″anonymous″, but be aware
that most FTP servers expect a password, even if only an e-mail
address.
Browse FTP output only if an error occurs
You can choose to display FTP output only if something wrong
happens. Enter ″/″ in this field to have the option active. If you do not
choose this option, ISPF displays all output from the FTP transfer.
3. Press Enter to process this panel.
If you chose not to override the ISPF default concerning display of FTP output,
your screen will now show that output. Press Enter to proceed to the next
download panel.
If you chose to browse the FTP output only if an error occurs, and there is an
error, the error information is displayed. If no error occurred, you proceed to
the next download panel.
After a successful FTP download, the following panel appears on your screen,
telling you to complete the installation from your workstation.
Appendix A. Installing the Client/Server Component
161
Installing the Client/Server Component
┌───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐
─ │
│ ──
I │
│
│ The ISPF Client/Server Component workstation install program has been │
1 │ copied to workstation:
│
2 │
│
│
│
│
│
│ in directory:
│
│
│
│
C:\TEMP
│
│
│
│ Run the ISPFINST program to complete the install on your workstation │
│ in the directory specified. The program is a self extracting
│
│ executable that will result in additional files being generated on
│
│ your workstation.
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│ Command ===>
│
O │ F1=HELP
F2=
F3=END
F4=DATASETS F5=FIND
│
│ F6=CHANGE
F9=SWAP
F10=LEFT
F11=RIGHT
F12=SUBMIT
│
F └───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘
Figure 45. ISPF Client/Server Component Install Program Panel (ISPWSD07)
Manual Download
When you select choice 3 Manual under Download methods on the ISPF
Client/Server Component Download panel, you are choosing to use your own
preferred download method. ISPF displays a panel of instructions necessary for
you to do this, as shown in Figure 46.
┌─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐
─ │ ISPWSD05
Client/Server Component Download
│ ────────
I │
│
│ In order to install the ISPF Client/Server Component
│
1 │ workstation code you will need to download (Binary) from the
│
2 │ MVS data set where the ISPF Client/Server Component install
│ set
│ executable resides to a directory on your workstation.
│
│ Complete the install by running the install program on your
│
│ workstation. The program is a self extracting executable and
│
│ will result in files being generated on your workstation.
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│ Copy member . : ISPGUINX
│
│
│
│ From data set : ’ISP.SISPGUI’
│
│
│
│ To file . . . : ispfinst.exe
│
│
│
│
│
│ Command ===>
│
O │ F1=Help
F2=Split
F3=Exit
F7=Backward
│
│ F8=Forward
F9=Swap
F12=Cancel
│ wap
F └─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘
Figure 46. Client/Server Component Download Panel (ISPWSD05)
162
z/OS V1R6.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol I
Installing the Client/Server Component
The non-editable fields on this panel are:
Copy member
The name of the data set member that contains the appropriate installation
executable for the selected workstation type.
From data set
The name of the MVS data set in which the installation members reside.
To file The name of the file to be created on the selected workstation type.
Running the Installation Program
After you have downloaded the Workstation Agent Installation program, resume
the installation by running the program called ISPFINST.EXE (ispfinst on UNIX
platforms). This is a self-extracting executable program that generates additional
necessary files on your workstation. Follow this procedure:
1. Go to a command line.
2. Change to the directory to which you downloaded the ISPF C/S workstation
code. (For AIX, Solaris, and HP UX, use the chmod command to give the file
execute permission).
3. Enter ISPFINST.
4. A dialog box called Workstation Agent Install Program is displayed.
Figure 47. Workstation Agent Install Program
A Base Install Directory and a national language (such as English) are
displayed in this box. Be sure this is the Base Install Directory and the national
language that you want to use for the installation of ISPFINST. If the directory
is incorrect, type in the correct directory name. If the language is incorrect,
scroll down the list of languages and pick the one that is correct.
5. Press Enter or select the Install push button.
6. WSA.EXE, along with several other files, is created in the Base Install Directory
that you specified. (For AIX and HP UX, the executable file, called wsa, is
created.
7. A final dialog box will appear, instructing you to be sure that the name of the
Base Install Directory is in your libpath (or for AIX and HP UX, the PATH
environment variable). Select OK to close the dialog box.
Appendix A. Installing the Client/Server Component
163
Installing the Client/Server Component
8. If the Workstation Agent Install Program dialog box still appears on your
screen, select Quit to remove it from your display.
The Workstation Agent Window
The Workstation Agent (WSA) window is displayed when you have prepared your
workstation to make a connection to the host, by downloading and executing the
workstation portion of the Client/Server software.
Figure 48. The Workstation Agent window
The functions available from the Options pull-down menu on the Workstation
Agent window are:
Information
Displays the ISPF WSA Information dialog window. The Information
dialog shows you the number of active sessions. Each active session
represents a connection between the ISPF Client/Server workstation agent
and an ISPF host. The dialog also indicates which communications
interfaces (such as TCP/IP or APPC) have been initialized on the
workstation, and the TCP/IP Port Number, or APPC Transaction Program
(TP) Name. Additionally, the WINSOCK Path, if required, is shown in this
dialog. The WINSOCK Path is applicable to Windows environments only.
Enable TCP/IP
This selection toggles between active and inactive when you click it. The
change does not take affect until you restart the Workstation agent.
Enable APPC
This selection toggles between active and inactive when you click it. The
change does not take affect until you restart the Workstation agent.
Set TCP/IP Port
Displays the ISPF Client/Server Configuration dialog. The Configuration
dialog enables you to change the TCP/IP port number. From a TCP/IP
perspective, the port number represents the ISPF Client/Server
Workstation Agent. If a port number is not specified in the Configuration
dialog, the default ISPF Client/Server port number is used.
If you specify a port number, the change takes effect after the ISPF
Client/Server Workstation Agent is closed and restarted. The change
remains in effect for subsequent invocations of the ISPF Client/Server
Workstation Agent. If you later decide to change back to the ISPF
Client/Server default port number, delete the port number in the
Configuration dialog and restart the ISPF Client/Server Workstation Agent.
If you change the port number, you must also change the port number
specified in the ISPF GUI initialization.
Set SNA TP Name
Displays the ISPF Client/Server Configuration dialog. The Configuration
dialog enables you to change the SNA Transaction Program name. From an
SNA APPC perspective, the TP name represents the ISPF Client/Server
Workstation Agent.
164
z/OS V1R6.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol I
Installing the Client/Server Component
If specified, the name is used to construct the names of the two transaction
programs required to support an ISPF Client/Server connection. The ISPF
Client/Server function appends different single letters to the supplied
name to form the actual names of the two APPC transaction programs. The
letter S is appended to the name selected to indicate the send conversation
TP name used on the workstation and host. The letter R is appended to the
name to indicate the receive conversation TP name.
This option is available if your workstation operating system is OS/2 or
Windows APPC. For all other operating systems this option is disabled.
If a TP name is not specified in the Configuration dialog, the default ISPF
Client/Server TP name is used. If you specify a TP name, the change takes
effect after the ISPF Workstation Agent is closed and restarted. The change
remains in effect for subsequent invocations of the ISPF Workstation Agent.
If you later decide to change back to the ISPF Client/Server default TP
name, delete the TP name in the Configuration dialog and restart the ISPF
Workstation Agent.
If you change the TP name, you must also change the TP name specified in
the ISPF GUI initialization.
Set WINSOCK Path
This option enables you to specify an explicit path to the socket DLL used
by the active TCP/IP subsystem in a Microsoft Windows workstation
environment. The specification of an explicit path overrides the default
DLL search order for Windows.
For example, if the desired DLL is located in directory D:\TCPDOS\BIN
then the path would be specified as follows:
D:\TCPDOS\BIN
The setting takes effect after the ISPF Client/Server workstation agent is
closed and restarted. The setting remains in effect for subsequent
invocations of the ISPF workstation agent.
This option is only available in a Microsoft Windows environment. For
other operating systems this option is disabled.
Set Font
This option enables you to specify the font of your connection through the
Workstation Agent window. When you choose “Set font” from the Options
pull-down, the Font dialog window appears. Choose from one of the
available fonts and sizes that appear in the list. The list of fonts shows the
fonts that are registered with your operating system. The change takes
place after you re-start the agent, and affects all text in the interface
windows except the menu bar and title bar text.
Because the layout of the data in a workstation panel is based on row and
column positions, you should use a non-proportional (that is, fixed width
or monospaced) font. Using a non-proportional font ensures that the data
within the panels lines up correctly. If you use a proportional font, data
within columns might not align correctly.
Note: If you are using an AIX platform, you can change the font of the
Workstation Agent by entering the following in your .Xdefaults file:
DtProcess*dtFont: <font name>
For example:
Appendix A. Installing the Client/Server Component
165
Installing the Client/Server Component
DtProcess*dtFont: fixed
gives you a fixed font for the Workstation Agent application.
However, this setting is overridden when you use the Set Font
option on the Workstation Agent window.
System Register
This option enables you to bypass the Workstation Agent connection panel
when you make a client/server connection. Choosing this function on the
Options pull-down on the Workstation Agent window displays the System
Register panel.
The System Register Panel
Figure 49 shows the System Register panel, which is displayed when you select
System Register from the Options pull-down on the Workstation Agent panel. The
main panel is divided into four parts.
Figure 49. System Register Panel
The Systems section of the panel is where you name the system you want to
connect from. Click the Add pushbutton to add a new entry to the systems list. A
pop-up dialog box like the one shown in Figure 50 appears.
Figure 50. Add System Pop-up Dialog
There are entry fields for the system name and an IP or SNA address. If you do
not know the system address, you can get it from the WSA connection panel. Until
166
z/OS V1R6.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol I
Installing the Client/Server Component
you set up the system register to bypass that panel, it will show you the address of
the system that you are connecting from. Simply make your client/server
connection, and before accepting the connection, note the address of the system.
After filling in the appropriate information, click OK. After you finish your session
with the System Register panel, this system will be available to the users you select
without it being necessary for them to see the Workstation Agent connection panel.
You can update or delete system information in the same area of this panel. To
update a system, first highlight it in the list by clicking on it. Then click the
Update pushbutton. A Change System pop-up dialog box, similar to the Add
System window, appears on your screen with the system name and its IP or SNA
address already filled in. Modify the information, then click OK.
To delete a system from the System Register files, first highlight the desired system
in the list by clicking on it. Then, click the Delete pushbutton. The system and any
user IDs associated with it in the System Register files are deleted.
The Connections part of the panel enables you to define how to set the connections
that you want to make. The Connections choices are:
No Auto Connect
Selecting this choice means that no one connecting to the Workstation
Agent can bypass the WSA connection panel for the specified system. In
other words, everyone connecting to the WSA must use the connection
panel to accept the connection from that system before continuing.
Auto Connect All
Everyone connecting to the WSA from the specified system will bypass the
connection panel.
Auto Connect List
Selecting this choice activates the User IDs section of the System Register
panel. When you make this selection, you must enter the ID of at least one
user you want to be able to bypass the WSA connection panel when
connecting from the specified system. Enter user IDs by clicking on the
Add button in the User IDs section of the panel. A pop-up dialog like the
one shown here is displayed.
Figure 51. Add User Pop-up Dialog
Enter the user ID of each user you want to automatically connect from the
highlighted system. If you are entering only one user ID at this time, click
OK to update the list and return to the System Register panel. If you are
entering a list of IDs, click Apply after each entry, then click OK after the
last one. As you enter IDs, they are added to the list appearing in this
section of the System Register panel.
Appendix A. Installing the Client/Server Component
167
Installing the Client/Server Component
To delete IDs from the list, highlight the line in the list, then click on the
Delete button located next to the list.
The System Information section of the System Register panel shows the name of
the system highlighted in the Systems section of the panel, and its IP or SNA
address. This is the system that you are currently working with on the System
Register panel. You cannot change the information in the System Information
section.
When you are finished working with the System Register panel, you can dismiss it
by clicking the OK button at the bottom of the panel. During long sessions where
you are making many entries, it is recommended that you occasionally click Apply
to save your entries.
168
z/OS V1R6.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol I
Appendix B. Configuring Communications for the ISPF
Client/Server
Either a TCP/IP or an SNA APPC connection must be enabled to support ISPF
Client/Server (C/S) communication between an MVS host and a workstation. The
following sections describe what must be configured at the host and at a
workstation for both TCP/IP and SNA APPC connections. Configuration of 3270
terminal type connections that support user logon to MVS TSO is not described
here. A configuration fast path is provided at the beginning of the discussion of
each type of connection.
Although a few elements of ISPF C/S configuration must be coordinated between
a workstation and the MVS host, ISPF users will generally be more concerned with
workstation requirements. MVS system or network support personnel will
generally be more concerned with MVS host requirements.
Note: All necessary TCP/IP or APPC communications software must be initialized
fully before starting the ISPF Workstation Agent component. The WSA does
not attempt to initialize the communications protocol again after it receives
the first initialization error.
Configuring TCP/IP connections
The following table provides a fast path for configuring TCP/IP communications
to support ISPF C/S.
TCP/IP Requirements Fast Path
Workstation
MVS host
A numeric internet address must be The numeric internet address defined for TCP/IP on
defined for TCP/IP on the
the workstation must be specified on the ISPSTART
workstation (such as, 9.67.224.96).
command or from the GUI settings panel to invoke
ISPF WSA.
No workstation requirement
matching this host requirement →
It must be possible for ISPF to locate the TCP/IP
configuration data set containing the TCP/IP started
task name. Keywords SAS/C_TCPIP_DATA_VALUE
and SAS/C_TCPIP_PREFIX_VALUE in the ISPF
Configuration Table Keyword File can be used to
determine the appropriate data set.
TCP/IP Requirements Detail
An internet address is the 32-bit address assigned to a TCP/IP host and usually
represented in dotted decimal form. For example: 9.67.224.96. The address
identifies both a physical network within the internet and an individual host
within that network.
A TCP/IP host can be an MVS system or an OS/2, Windows, or UNIX
workstation. To configure ISPF C/S communications you need to know the dotted
decimal internet address associated with the workstation on which the ISPF WSA
graphical user interface is to be displayed. In many enterprises the workstation
internet address is obtained from a network administrator and assigned to the
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1980, 2004
169
workstation during installation and customization of the TCP/IP workstation
software. For information about installing and customizing the TCP/IP software
used on your workstation, consult the documentation supplied by your TCP/IP
software vendor. If you have already installed TCP/IP on your workstation and
you do not know your TCP/IP internet address, but you do know your TCP/IP
workstation host name (such as JSMITH, ACCT23), you can determine the internet
address as follows:
If you have this TCP/IP
workstation software
do this on the workstation
v IBM TCP/IP for OS/2
Select the Command Prompts folder after selecting the
OS/2 System icon. Select OS/2 Window from the
folder and at the displayed OS/2 command prompt
enter the command host <hostname>. The numeric
internet address of the workstation host identified by
<hostname> should appear in the reply.
v Windows TCP/IP
From an MS/DOS command prompt enter ipconfig
(or winipcfg in some systems). The numeric internet
address of the workstation should display in the IP
Configuration panel.
v AIX TCP/IP
From the AIX command prompt enter the command
host <hostname>. The numeric internet address of the
workstation identified by <hostname> should appear
in the reply.
v HP-UX TCP/IP
From the HP-UX command prompt enter the
command ping <hostname>. The numeric internet
address should appear in the output of the command.
Use <Ctrl-c> to end the command.
v Solaris TCP/IP
From the command prompt enter the command ping s <hostname>. The numeric internet address of the
workstation identified by <hostname> should appear
in the reply.
UNIX users might need to specify a unique port on the workstation to be used for
communication, in addition to the internet address. This is necessary because
multiple ISPF WSA components can run on any one UNIX workstation at the same
time. The port is specified by appending :<port#> to the end of the internet
address. By default, all of the TCP/IP protocols are defined in the /etc/services
file. This file can be viewed so you can choose a port that is not currently reserved
by another application. Ports 0 through 1024 are reserved for system use. The port
number must also be specified in the ISPF WSA graphical user interface. Do this
through the Options pull-down menu, Set TCP/IP Port choice. The port number
specified on the host must be the same as the port entered in the ISPF WSA
graphical user interface.
The ISPF C/S component uses the C-socket interface for TCP/IP communications.
C-sockets are enabled by the SAS/C runtime support code distributed with ISPF.
The SAS/C runtime library supports z/OS Communications Server: IP as well as
other common socket implementations.
Determining the TCP/IP sockets started task : procedure name
With the enablement of SAS/C socket support the TCP/IP started task procedure
name for TCP/IP sockets is determined by reading the TCP/IP configuration data
set. The default name for this data set is TCPIP.TCPIP.DATA.
170
z/OS V1R6.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol I
The SAS/C runtime code locates the configuration data set by testing for data set
access as determined by the elements of the following search order:
1. =TCPIP_DATA=style:any.dataset.name.or.ddname
=TCPIP_DATA is a SAS/C environment variable. The parameter
SAS/C_TCPIP_DATA_VALUE in the ISPF Configuration table can be used to
set the value of this variable. The value DEFAULT indicates that no value is set
by ISPF.
Options for setting the value are:
v DDN:ddname - indicates that SAS/C will search for the data set identified
by ″ddname″. If the SAS/C style prefix is omitted the style prefix value is
assumed to be ″DDN:″. For example,
SAS/C_TCPIP_DATA_VALUE=DDN:MYTCPDD
SAS/C_TCPIP_DATA_VALUE=MYTCPDD
(if the TSO logon procedure contains this JCL statement:
//MYTCPDD DD DSN=MYTCPIP.CONFIG ...
SAS/C will search for the data set MYTCPIP.CONFIG)
v TSO:dataset - indicates that SAS/C will search for the data set
″userid.dataset″ where userid is the TSO userid. For example,
SAS/C_TCPIP_DATA_VALUE=TSO:MYTCPIP.CONFIG
(if the TSO userid is SMITHJ, SAS/C will search for the data set
SMITHJ.MYTCPIP.CONFIG)
v DSN:dataset - indicates that SAS/C will search for the data set ″dataset″.
SAS/C_TCPIP_DATA_VALUE=DSN:MYTCPIP.CONFIG
(SAS/C will search for the data set MYTCPIP.CONFIG)
2. //SYSTCPD DD or TSO ALLOC F(SYSTCPD)
//SYSTCPD DD or TSO ALLOC FI(SYSTCPD) indicates that SAS/C will search
for the data set associated with the ddname ″//SYSTCPD″. For example,
//SYSTCPD DD DSN=TCPIP.TCPIP.DATA ...
(if the TSO logon procedure contains the //SYSTCPD DD JCL statement, then
SAS/C will search for the data set TCPIP.TCPIP.DATA)
3. userid.TCPIP.DATA
userid.TCPIP.DATA indicates that SAS/C will search for the data set identified
by concatenating the TSO userid to the character string ″.TCPIP.DATA″. If the
prefix value set in the user’s TSO profile differs from the TSO userid the prefix
value will be used instead of the TSO userid. Some examples follow:
SMITHJ.TCPIP.DATA
(if the TSO userid is ″SMITHJ″ SAS/C will search for the data set
SMITHJ.TCPIP.DATA)
JONESB.TCPIP.DATA
(if the TSO userid is ″SMITHJ″ and the TSO prefix is set to ″JONESB″, SAS/C
will search for the data set JONESB.TCPIP.DATA)
4. SYS1.TCPPARMS(TCPDATA)
SYS1.TCPPARMS(TCPDATA) indicates SAS/C will search for the data set
SYS1.TCPPARMS and the member TCPDATA.
5. =TCPIP_PREFIX=prefix
Appendix B. Configuring Communications for the ISPF Client/Server
171
=TCPIP_PREFIX is a SAS/C environment variable. The parameter
SAS/C_TCPIP_PREFIX_VALUE in the ISPF Configuration table can be used to
set the value of the variable. The value ″DEFAULT″ indicates that no value will
be set by ISPF. If a string other than ″DEFAULT″ is specified for
SAS/C_TCPIP_PREFIX_VALUE, SAS/C will concatenate the string to the
characters ″.TCPIP.DATA″.
SAS/C_TCPIP_PREFIX_VALUE=TCPIP
(SAS/C will search for the data set TCPIP.TCPIP.DATA)
6. zap_prefix.TCPIP.DATA
zap_prefix.TCPIP.DATA - indicates that SAS/C will search for the data set
identified by concatenating the SAS/C runtime internal prefix string to the
string ″.TCPIP.DATA″. The default value for the prefix string is ″TCPIP″ which
implies the data set name TCPIP.TCPIP.DATA. Information on applying a zap
to change the prefix to a string other than ″TCPIP″ is available with SAS/C
compiler documentation if the SAS/C compiler is installed on your MVS
system. If you simply use the SAS/C runtime support supplied with ISPF you
should control the search for the TCPIP.DATA set by using one of the other
search options.
The elements in the search order list are examined one by one. The search ends
when an element in the list enables a data set to be located. That data set is
considered to be the TCP/IP configuration data set. The content of the data set is
not validated. If the selected data set does not contain valid configuration data for
the installed TCP/IP subsystem, TCP/IP socket calls made from the ISPF
Client/Server component to the SAS/C runtime might fail and an ISPF
Client/Server connection to a workstation might not be possible for TCP/IP.
Search order specification for the TCPIP.DATA data set is currently not required for
the ISPF interface to z/OS Communications Server: IP sockets.
Selecting the z/OS Communications Server: IP socket
implementation
If you want to use the z/OS Communications Server: IP socket implementation, set
the ISPF Configuration table keyword USE_MVS_OPEN_EDITION_SOCKETS to
YES. The default value NO indicates that the common TCP/IP socket
implementation will be used.
Changing ISPF defaults
The ISPF Configuration table must be modified if the value of either of the ISPF
defaults keywords is to be changed to a value other than the default value shipped
by ISPF. For information about customizing the ISPF Configuration table, see ISPF
Planning and Customizing.
TCP/IP additional tips
The ISPF Workstation Agent is not linked with the application programming
interface (API) modules provided by any specific communications software vendor.
The default behavior for accessing a TCP/IP subsystem in IBM OS/2 environments
is for the ISPF WSA to try to locate tcpipdll.dll which contains the IBM TCP/IP
API modules. If that dynamic link library can be located, then no attempt is made
to locate any other TCP/IP dynamic link library.
If the IBM TCP/IP library cannot be located then the workstation agent will try to
locate rcb43.dll which contains the Novell TCP/IP API modules. If neither dynamic
172
z/OS V1R6.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol I
link library can be located or if the TCP/IP API modules cannot be loaded
successfully from a selected library then TCP/IP communication will be
inoperative.
The default behavior for accessing a TCP/IP subsystem in Microsoft Windows
environments is for the ISPF WSA to try to locate WINSOCK.DLL. In the Microsoft
Windows environment, many different vendors supply a winsock.dll so it is critical
that the first winsock.dll located by the ISPF WSA contains the TCP/IP API
modules actually used by the active TCP/IP subsystem on the workstation. The
difficulty of managing multiple winsock.dll files in a given workstation
environment is compounded by the fact that the search order used by Windows to
locate a dynamic link library is not constrained by a CONFIG.SYS LIBPATH
statement as it is in OS/2 environments. The Windows search order is as follows:
1. current directory
2. WINDOWS directory
3. WINDOWS\SYSTEM directory
4. directory containing the executable file for the current task
5. directories listed in the PATH environment variable
6. list of directories mapped in a network
If the dynamic link library cannot be located or if the TCP/IP API modules cannot
be loaded successfully from the selected library then TCP/IP communication will
be inoperative.
You can specify an explicit path to the socket DLL used by the active TCP/IP
subsystem in a Microsoft Windows workstation environment. Specifying an explicit
path overrides the default DLL search order for Windows. The directory defined
by the explicit path is searched for WINSOCK.DLL. The explicit path to the
TCP/IP socket DLL is specified by using the Set WINSOCK Path function available
from the Options pull-down found on the Client/Server Agent Window (see “The
Workstation Agent Window” on page 164). This function is useful in environments
such as those using LAN operating systems, in which the directories containing
software from several TCP/IP vendors can be accessed by a workstation.
The Client/Server feature of ISPF (ISPF WSA) takes advantage of the TCP/IP
keepalive socket option to enable ISPF on the host to detect an abnormal end to a
session with the ISPF Workstation Agent on the workstation. Abnormal endings
include such events as powering off or rebooting the workstation before closing the
session with the ISPF WSA agent. The behavior of the keepalive facility differs for
each workstation platform and TCP/IP product supported by ISPF:
Workstation Platform
Keepalive behavior
OS/2
Reboot (CTRL-ALT-DELETE), power off, and
Workplace Shell shutdown are detected.
Windows
Reboot (CTRL-ALT-DELETE), power off, and
Program Manager close are detected.
AIX
Reboot, power off, and shutdown of an AIX host
are detected. Reboot (CTRL-ALT-BACKSPACE) of
an X-station client is detected, but power off of an
X-station client is detected only when the X-station
is powered on again.
HP-UX
Reboot, power off, and shutdown of an HP-UX
host are detected.
Appendix B. Configuring Communications for the ISPF Client/Server
173
Solaris
Reboot, power off, and shutdown of a Solaris host
are detected.
If no transmissions have been received over a socket connection to the workstation
during the specified timer interval, TCP/IP sends a keepalive packet to the
workstation. If there is no response on the socket connection or if the socket
connection has been reset, an error is returned and the ISPF C/S session ends on
MVS.
The keepalive timer value for z/OS Communications Server: IP is controlled by the
KEEPALIVEOPTIONS statement in the TCP/IP configuration data set. The
INTERVAL parameter specifies the number of minutes that TCP/IP waits after the
last transmission from the workstation before sending a keepalive packet. The
SENDGARBAGE parameter specifies whether the packet contains any data. ISPF
C/S was tested with the INTERVAL value set to 1 and the SENDGARBAGE value
set to TRUE.
Enabling the z/OS Communications Server: IP socket
implementation
The TCP/IP started task must be active in order to use ISPF Client/Server with the
z/OS UNIX System Services (z/OS UNIX) socket implementation. Failure to start
z/OS UNIX will result in a SAS/C runtime message such as the following when
an ISPF Client/Server session is started from MVS:
LSCX902 **** WARNING **** ERRNO = EMVSNOTUP
Generated in SOCKET called from line 9512 of @@671470(NF6),
offset 00020A
C++ name: DtTCPCLIENT::BeginOperation
socket failed because the OpenEdition kernel is not running,
reason code 0000004E.
The TSO/ISPF userid must be authorized to use z/OS UNIX services if the z/OS
UNIX socket implementation is selected. Failure to obtain proper authorization will
result in an MVS abend code ″EC6″ when an ISPF Client/Server connection is
attempted. The ″EC6″ abend code indicates a failure of the z/OS Communications
Server: IP interface. Authorization status for basic z/OS UNIX services can be
determined by entering the OMVS command from the TSO READY prompt. The
following example indicates that the TSO user is not authorized to use z/OS UNIX
services:
READY
omvs
FSUM2057I No session was started. This TSO/E user ID does not have
access to OpenMVS.+
READY
It is not necessary to run the z/OS UNIX shell to use the z/OS UNIX socket
implementation with ISPF.
Understanding SAS/C socket TCP/IP error codes
ISPF continues to return a TCP/IP error code in the ″network data″ portion of ISPF
messages indicating a TCP/IP communication failure. The TCP/IP error codes
returned for failing socket calls are not defined in the z/OS Communications
Server documentation. Instead, the error codes are those used by the SAS/C socket
implementation. The codes are found in the SAS/C file errno.h. Refer to ISPF
Messages and Codes for more information.
174
z/OS V1R6.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol I
Configuring APPC connections
The following table provides a fast path for configuring APPC communications to
support ISPF C/S.
APPC Requirements Fast Path
Workstation
MVS host
A fully-qualified network name
must be defined for an
SNA-independent LU type 6.2 on
the workstation (for example,
USIBMNR.NRI41G00).
The fully-qualified network name defined for an
SNA-independent LU type 6.2 on the workstation
must be included in an MVS VTAM® definition for
the workstation node and must be specified on the
ISPSTART command or from the GUI settings panel to
invoke ISPF WSA.
No workstation requirement
matching this host requirement →
Either a NOSCHED LU defined with the BASE option
or a LU defined with the BASE and SCHED(ASCH)
options in the MVS parmlib member APPCPMxx is
required to support outbound conversation requests
from ISPF to the workstation.
No workstation requirement
matching this host requirement →
A VTAM application LU must be defined such that
the label of the APPL definition statement and its
ACBNAME parameter value match the ACBNAME of
the APPC LU defined in MVS parmlib member
APPCPMxx.
The mode #INTER must be defined
on the workstation.
The mode #INTER must be defined as an entry in a
MVS VTAM mode table associated with the VTAM
definition of the workstation node.
No workstation requirement
matching this host requirement →
The SYS1.CSSLIB data set containing the APPC
callable system services modules must be accessible
by ISPF.
APPC Requirements Detail
A fully-qualified SNA network name is an identifier up to 17 bytes in length
assigned to a SNA logical unit (LU) and represented as two symbols, each up to 8
bytes in length, separated by a period. For example:
USIBMNR.NRI41G00
The symbol preceding the period specifies the name of an SNA network and the
symbol following the period specifies the name of an LU within that network. For
ISPF C/S communications you need to know the fully-qualified network name of
an independent SNA LU type 6.2 associated with the workstation on which the
ISPF WSA graphical user interface is to be displayed. The LU type 6.2 is required
by the SNA communications software to support APPC connections to the
workstation. for information about installation and customization of the SNA
APPC software used on your workstation consult the documentation supplied by
your software vendor. If you have already installed SNA APPC communications
software on your workstation and you do not know the fully-qualified network
name of an independent SNA LU type 6.2 you can identify a candidate name as
follows:
Appendix B. Configuring Communications for the ISPF Client/Server
175
If you have this SNA APPC
workstation software
do this on the workstation
Select the Command Prompts folder after selecting the
v OS/2 Access Feature of IBM
Communications Server for OS/2 OS/2 System icon. Select OS/2 Window from the
folder and at the OS/2 command prompt enter the
Warp, Version 4
command pmdsplay. Select Display from the Display
Active Configuration menu followed by the General
SNA option on the pull-down menu. From the list box
select Logical unit 6.2 to display a list of independent
SNA type 6.2 logical units, each with its associated
fully-qualified network name.
v IBM APPC Networking Services
for Windows 1.00.02 (base
product with CSD #2).
From the ″IBM APPC Networking Services″ program
group select the icon for the Configure program item.
Select the Step 1 pushbutton from the Networking
Services Configuration window. The fully-qualified
local LU name for APPC communications will appear
in the General Configuration window.
The fully-qualified name of the independent LU selected for the ISPF WSA
connection on the workstation must also be identified to VTAM on the MVS
system on which the ISPF C/S host agent will be invoked. The workstation
independent LU can be identified to VTAM by one of the following methods:
v by dynamic definition by VTAM during session establishment
v by CDRSC definition statements
v by standard LU definition statements with LOCADDR=0 coded
The VTAM Network Implementation Guide and the VTAM Resource Definition
Reference provide details on each method.
An LU definition must also be associated with the ISPF C/S agent on the MVS
host to enable the connection to an ISPF WSA agent on a workstation. This LU
must be made available to ISPF C/S by an APPC/MVS definition of a base LU to
handle outbound connection requests from MVS to the workstation. The LU can be
defined in one of two ways in the APPCPMxx member of the MVS parmlib data
set by using a LUADD statement that includes one of the following combinations
of parameters:
v the NOSCHED and BASE parameters
v the SCHED(ASCH) and BASE parameters
If neither LU option is defined outbound session requests from the ISPF C/S agent
on the MVS host will be rejected.
A VTAM application LU must be defined in VTAMLST to match the definition in
APPCPMxx. Both the label of the APPL statement and the ACBNAME= parameter
value must be identical to the value specified for the ACBNAME parameter on the
LUADD statement for the APPC/MVS LU defined in MVS parmlib member
APPCPMxx.
A logical connection called a session must exist between the LU associated with the
ISPF C/S agent on the MVS host and the LU associated with the ISPF WSA agent
on the workstation to support APPC communication. To establish a session the LU
on the MVS host must send a set of session control parameters called a bind to the
LU on the workstation. The parameters are selected based on a mode definition.
The ISPF C/S agent on MVS uses the #INTER definition, which is located in the
IBM-supplied default VTAM mode table ISTINCLM. The #INTER mode definition
176
z/OS V1R6.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol I
is also included among the default definitions supplied by the supported APPC
communications software for workstations.
The VTAM node definition for the independent LU used by APPC Networking
services for Windows cannot be the same VTAM node definition used for your
native or emulated 3270 terminal support. A single node definition cannot be
shared by APPC Networking Services for Windows and your 3270 terminal
support. Likewise, if you are using a 3270 emulator on the Windows system on
which you intend to use APPC Networking Services for Windows you must ensure
that different local SNA service access point (SAP) addresses are used by the 3270
emulator and by APPC Networking Services for Windows.
To change the local SAP address for APPC Networking Services for Windows,
select the icon for the Configure program item from the IBM APPC Networking
Services program group. Select the Step 2 pushbutton from the Networking
Services Configuration window, then select Advanced from the LAN Configuration
window. The local SAP can be changed on the Advanced LAN Configuration
window.
APPC additional tips
To activate APPC Networking Services for Windows and Personal
Communications/3270 in any order in that environment it was necessary to
increase the values of the MINSAP and MINLINK parameters for the IEEE 802.2
protocol driver for NDIS in the CONFIG.SYS file as follows:
DEVICEHIGH = C:\LSP\DXME0MOD.SYS N ,,,2,2
where C:\LSP specifies the LAN Support Program directory in which the IEEE
802.2 protocol driver (DXME0MOD.SYS) was installed.
The final two positional parameters specify the minimum service access point and
minimum link station values required to support activation of an independent LU
6.2 for APPC Networking Services for Windows and activation of a dependent LU
2 for Personal Communications/3270. If additional LUs are required, for example
to support additional dependent LU 2 connections, the minimum service access
point and minimum link station values might need to be increased.
Configuration of network support for SNA APPC communications is somewhat
more complex than configuration for TCP/IP owing largely to the transition that
SNA has made from an essentially static hierarchical networking model to a
dynamic peer-to-peer networking model. Recognizing the difficulty that this
transition presents to customers trying to configure APPC application support and
APPN network support, networking specialists at IBM have produced the
Multi-platform APPC Configuration Guide (GG24-4485). This guide is a valuable aid
for anyone who wants to understand how to configure APPC and APPN
communications in any of the environments in which the ISPF C/S capability can
be enabled. It is available from the IBM Redbooks site: www.redbooks.ibm.com.
One way to simplify APPC configuration is to use the fully-qualified network
name of the SNA control point defined for your workstation as the independent
SNA LU type 6.2 that will support ISPF C/S connections. The control point for
your workstation represents various subsystem functions associated with your
communications software. The fully-qualified network name for the control point
can be used not only to identify that set of subsystem capabilities but also to
support applications such as the ISPF workstation agent that use an independent
SNA LU type 6.2. If you do not know, or cannot remember, the fully-qualified
Appendix B. Configuring Communications for the ISPF Client/Server
177
name associated with your workstation control point you can determine the name
as follows:
If you have this SNA APPC
workstation software
do this on the workstation
Select the Command Prompts folder after selecting the
v OS/2 Access Feature of IBM
Communications Server for OS/2 OS/2 System icon. Select OS/2 Window from the
folder and at the displayed OS/2 command prompt
Warp, Version 4
enter the command pmdsplay. Select Display from the
Display Active Configuration menu followed by the
General SNA option on the pull-down menu. From
the displayed list box select Global SNA and an
information window will be displayed. Together, the
Network name and Control point (CP) name constitute
the fully-qualified control point name associated with
your workstation.
v IBM APPC Networking Services
for Windows 1.00.02 (base
product with CSD #2).
178
z/OS V1R6.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol I
From the ″IBM APPC Networking Services″ program
group select the icon for the Configure program item.
Select the Step 1 pushbutton from the Networking
Services Configuration window. The fully-qualified
local LU name for APPC communications will appear
in the General Configuration window.
Appendix C. Listing Formats
This appendix describes and displays the kinds of listings you can produce using
ISPF. The sample listings shown on the following pages are for illustration
purposes only. They are not intended to be exact replicas, because printouts of
ISPF listings vary according to the kind of printer you are using.
Source and Index Listings
If autolist mode is on, the ISPF editor automatically generates a source listing
when you finish editing. You can also get source listings and index listings by
using the following utility options:
Library (3.1)
Move/Copy (3.3)
P - Print member
CP - Copy and print
MP - Move and print
Data Set List (3.4)
P - Print data set list
PV - Print VTOC entries
Hardcopy (3.6)
PK - Print and keep data set
PD - Print and delete data set
Outlist (3.8)
P - Print job output
Source Listings
Figure 52 on page 180 shows a sample source listing.
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1980, 2004
179
Source and Index Listings
Figure 52. Sample Source Listing
Information at the top of the page includes project, group, type, and member
name, current version and modification level, user ID, date and time that the
listing was produced, and page number.
A column-positioning line is printed following the heading and preceding the
actual data. The start column is printed to the left of each line, indicating the
position of the first character in each line that is not a blank.
For ISPF library members with statistics, asterisks are either printed or not printed
to the right of each line according to the setting of the modification flag, as follows:
v If the modification flag (columns 79-80) in the line is 00, no asterisks are printed.
v If the modification flag is nonzero but differs from the current modification level
of the member, a single asterisk (*) is printed.
v If the modification flag is nonzero and has the same value as the current
modification level of the member, two asterisks (**) are printed.
The asterisks allow you to scan the listing quickly for lines that were added or
changed since the version was created (*) and for lines that were added or changed
during the last update (**).
Index Listings
ISPF provides index listings at your request through the X (Print index listing)
option of the Library utility (3.1), or the X or PX options of the Data Set List utility
(3.4).
Index Listings for Source Libraries
Figure 53 on page 181 shows a sample index listing for an ISPF library.
180
z/OS V1R6.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol I
Source and Index Listings
Figure 53. Sample Index Listing - Managed Source Library
The sample index listing shown here is for a source library that is managed by the
Storage Management Subsystem.
Note: This index listing format is available only when Data Facility Product (DFP)
Version 3 Release 1 is installed and available, and when Storage
Management Subsystem is active.
The heading information includes:
v Project, group (library), and type
v Date and time the listing was produced
v Page number.
This is followed by general information about the data set, including current space
allocation and utilization. The only differences between this index listing and one
for a non-managed source library are the following:
v Management, storage, and data classes are shown under the GENERAL DATA
heading.
v The 1st extent size, secondary quantity, current allocation, and current utilization
sizes can be shown in bytes, kilobytes, or megabytes, in addition to tracks,
blocks, or cylinders.
The 1st extent quantity, secondary quantity, current allocation, and current
utilization sizes are shown in tracks for data sets that are allocated in bytes,
kilobytes, or megabytes on a non-managed volume. Following this, the member
name and statistics are printed for each member in the data set, arranged in
alphabetical order. For sequential data sets, the index listing contains only the
general information.
Appendix C. Listing Formats
181
Source and Index Listings
Index Listings for Load Libraries
An index listing for an OBJ library is similar to an index listing for a source library,
except that no statistics are maintained. A sample index listing for a LOAD library
that is managed by the Storage Management Subsystem is shown in Figure 54.
Note: This index listing format is available only when Data Facility Product (DFP)
Version 3 Release 1 is installed and available, and when Storage
Management Subsystem is active. See ISPF User’s Guide for more
information.
Here, the module attributes are printed to the right of each member name.
Figure 54. Sample Index Listing - Managed Load Library
The only differences between this index listing and one for a non-managed LOAD
library are the following:
v Management, storage, and data classes are shown under the GENERAL DATA
heading.
v The 1st extent size, secondary quantity, current allocation, and current utilization
sizes can be shown in bytes, kilobytes, or megabytes, in addition to tracks,
blocks, or cylinders.
As in the source library index listing, the 1st extent quantity, secondary quantity,
current allocation, and current utilization sizes are shown in tracks for data sets
that are allocated in bytes, kilobytes, or megabytes on a non-managed volume.
182
z/OS V1R6.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol I
ISPF Log Listings
ISPF Log Listings
Figure 55 shows a sample ISPF log listing. The log contains a message for each
significant user action, such as saving edited data, moving members from one data
set to another, or submitting a batch job.
Figure 55. Sample ISPF Log Listing
Member List Listings
This section shows samples of member list listings created by the SAVE command.
With this command, you can create listings for both source and load libraries.
The following sample listings show the format used when you do not specify a list
ID.
Member List Listings for Source Libraries
Figure 56 on page 184 shows a sample member list listing for a source library.
These listings contain the relative block address of each member, shown in
hexadecimal format, and other characteristics when available.
Appendix C. Listing Formats
183
Member List Listings
Figure 56. Sample Member List Listing for a Source Library
Member List Listings for Load Libraries
Figure 57 shows a sample member list listing for a source library. These listings
contain the size of each load module, shown in hexadecimal format, and other
characteristics when available.
Figure 57. Sample Member List Listing for a Load Library
184
z/OS V1R6.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol I
Member List Listings
Formats for Member List Listings
The following is the format used by the SAVE command to create a member list
listing for a source library. The members of a source library have formatted records
(RECFM≠U).
Table 13. Format of Source Library Member List Listing
Starting Column
Length in Characters
Description
4
8
Member name
19
6
Relative block address in hexadecimal format
25
2
Version number
28
2
Modification level
31
8
Creation date
40
8
Date last modified
49
5
Time last modified
55
5
Current number of lines
61
5
Initial number of lines
67
5
Number of modified lines
73
7
User ID
The following is the format used by the SAVE command to create a member list
listing for a load library. The members of a load library have unformatted records
(RECFM=U).
Table 14. Format of Load Library Member List Listing
Starting Column
Length in Characters
Description
4
8
Member name
24
6
Load module size in hexadecimal format
33
6
Load module relative block address in
hexadecimal format
40
8
Alias
49
2
Authorization code
53
3
Addressing mode
56
3
Residency mode
61
18
Load module attributes
Data Set List Listings
The sample listing in Figure 58 on page 186 shows the format used when you do
not specify a data set list ID.
Appendix C. Listing Formats
185
Data Set List Listings
Figure 58. Sample Data Set List Listing
Format for Data Set List Listings
Table 15 shows the format of the data set list written by the SAVE command when
a data set list ID is specified.
Table 15. Format of Data Set List Listing
Starting Column
186
Length in Characters
Description
1
44
Data set name
46
7
Volume and volume indicator
53
4
Data set organization
58
5
Data set record format
64
5
Data set logical record length
70
5
Data set block size
76
6
Data set size in tracks
83
3
Percentage of used tracks or pages (PDSE)
87
3
Number of extents used
91
8
Device type
100
10
Creation date
111
10
Expiration date
122
10
Last reference date
z/OS V1R6.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol I
Appendix D. APL and TEXT Character Conversion
You can use APL keyboards for all models of 3270 terminals, and TEXT keyboards
for 3278 and 3279 terminals with ISPF. Figure 59 and Figure 60 on page 188 show
that the 2-byte transmission codes for APL and TEXT characters are converted by
ISPF into 1-byte codes for internal storage.
3278 only; character
is not valid on 3277
National use character.
Graphics shown are for U.S. Keyboards;
graphics differ in other countries.
00
10
20
30
40
sp
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
¢
.
50
&
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
!
$
*
/
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
,
%
#
@
60
70
:
v
80
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
90
j
k
l
m
n
o
p
q
r
s
t
u
v
w
x
y
z
A0
(
+
)
;
=
o
B0
C0
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
D0
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
E0
F0
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
Figure 59. Internal Character Representations for APL Keyboards
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1980, 2004
187
3278 only; character
is not valid on 3277
00
10
20
30
40
sp
50
&
60
70
1
2
3
.
!
$
*
,
%
#
@
/
n
:
o
80
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
90
j
k
l
m
n
o
p
q
r
s
t
u
v
w
x
y
z
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
C0
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
D0
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A0
B0
¢
0
E0
F0
0
z/OS V1R6.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol I
+
)
;
=
(
)
A
Figure 60. Internal Character Representations for Text Keyboards
188
(
B
C
D
E
F
Appendix E. Abbreviations for Commands and Other Values
The following list includes the commands, field values, keywords/operands, and
scroll amounts that can be abbreviated, followed by the allowable abbreviations. To
improve readability, you should avoid using abbreviations in edit macros.
Command Abbreviations
BACK
BROWSE
CANCEL
COLUMNS
CONFIRM
B
BRO
CAN
COLS
CON
DISPLAY
FIND
INDEX
LOCATE
RESUME
DISPL
F
I
LOC
RES
DISP
SELECT
SHOWCMD
SKIP
TOP
UP
SEL
SHOW
S
T
U
S
COL
C
DIS
L
Field Value Abbreviations
%USED
AFTER
ALIAS-OF
ATTRIBUTES
BEFORE
%
AFT
ALIAS
ATTR
BEF
BLOCK
BOTTOM
CHANGED
CREATED
CYLINDER
BLKS
BOT
CHA
CRE
CYLS
DEVICE
EXPIRES
GET
MESSAGE
NO
DEV
EXP
G
MES
N
PUT
REFERRED
TOP
TRACK
VOLUME
YES
P
REF
T
TRKS
VOL
Y
A
B
B
CHG
C
0
Keyword/Operand, Scroll Amount, and Programming Language
Abbreviations
CHANGE
CHARS
COBOL
DISPLAY
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1980, 2004
CHA
CHAR
COB
DISPL
CHG
C
DIS
189
Keyword/Operand Abbreviations
ERROR
LABELS
PREFIX
SPECIAL
ERR
LABEL
PRE
SPE
STANDARD
SUFFIX
VERTICAL
VOLUME
STD
SUF
VERT
VOL
LAB
Scroll Amount Abbreviations
CUR
DATA
HALF
MAX
PAGE
CSR
D
H
M
P
C
Programming Language Abbreviations
ASSEMBLER
COBOL
FORTRAN
PASCAL
PLI
SCRIPT
190
ASSEMBLE
COB
FORT
PAS
PLIOPT
SCR
z/OS V1R6.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol I
ASSEM
ASM
FOR
FTN
PL1
TEXT
Appendix F. Allocation Data Sets
ISPF issues ALLOC commands based on the ISPF libraries, data set names,
list IDs, options, and additional input libraries you enter on the Foreground
Assembler H and Foreground VS COBOL II Compile panels. All allocations are
done before Assembler H and the VS COBOL II compiler are called.
Because Assembler H and VS COBOL II do not provide a language prompter, ISPF
allocates the required data sets for you. The following sections describe the data
sets ISPF allocates when you use Assembler H or the VS COBOL II compiler.
SYSIN Data Set
The SYSIN data set is the main input into Assembler H and VS COBOL II. It
contains the ISPF libraries or other partitioned or sequential data sets that you
enter on the Foreground Assembler H and VS COBOL II Compile panels. This data
set is used to find the member that contains the program to be assembled or
compiled. For a PDS, the ALLOC command would be:
ALLOC FI(SYSIN) DA(’proj.lib.type(mem)’)
For a sequential data set, the ALLOC command would be:
ALLOC FI(SYSIN) DA(’proj.lib.type’)
In both commands, lib is the library in which the member or data set was found.
SYSLIB Data Set
The SYSLIB data set contains the ISPF library concatenation sequence used to
resolve any copy statements specified in your program. It contains the ISPF
libraries or other partitioned or sequential data sets and the additional input
libraries you specify on the Foreground Assembler H and VS COBOL II Compile
panels. For example:
ALLOC FI(SYSLIB) DA(’SYS1.MACLIB’,’proj.lib1.type’,...,
’proj.lib4.type’,’additional lib1’,’additional lib2’)
SYSPRINT Data Set
The SYSPRINT data set contains the generated output listing. The entry in the List
ID field determines the destination of the output listing. If you enter a name in the
List ID field, the output listing is stored in a sequential data set:
ALLOC FI(SYSPRINT) DA(’prefix.listid.LIST’)
where listid is the name entered in the List ID field. However, if you leave the
List ID field blank, ISPF uses the name of the member being assembled or
compiled instead of the list ID:
ALLOC FI(SYSPRINT) DA(’prefix.member.LIST’)
If you enter an asterisk (*) in the List ID field, ISPF displays the output listing at
your terminal, using the following command:
ALLOC FI(SYSPRINT) DA(*)
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1980, 2004
191
SYSPRINT Data Set
See the List Data Sets section of the Foreground (Option 4) chapter of the ISPF
User’s Guide Volume II for more information.
SYSTERM Data Set
The SYSTERM data set contains a summary of the information in the listing data
set (SYSPRINT). It is displayed at the terminal if the TERM option is used:
ALLOC FI(SYSTERM) DA(*)
SYSLIN Data Set
The SYSLIN data set must be preallocated before running Foreground (option 4) or
Batch (option 5). The SYSLIN data set contains the object module. This object
module will be the input when you link-edit. For a PDS, the ALLOC command
would be:
ALLOC FI(SYSLIN) DA(’proj.lib1.OBJ(mem)’)
For a sequential data set, the ALLOC command would be:
ALLOC FI(SYSLIN) DA(’proj.lib1.OBJ’)
SYSPUNCH Data Set
The SYSPUNCH data set is the same as the SYSLIN data set. ISPF does not use
this data set. The DUMMY parameter on the ALLOC statement means it should
not be used:
ALLOC FI(SYSPUNCH) DUMMY
SYSUT1 Data Set
The SYSUT1 data set is a temporary utility data set used during processing. It is
deleted after it is used.
For Assembler H, the format is:
ALLOC FI(SYSUT1) UNIT(SYSDA) NEW DELETE
For VS COBOL II, the format is:
ALLOC FI(SYSUT1) UNIT(SYSDA) NEW DELETE SPACE(1,1) CYLINDER
SYSUT2—SYSUT7 Data Sets
The SYSUT2, SYSUT3, ..., SYSUT7 data sets are temporary utility data sets used by
VS COBOL II only during processing. They are deleted after they are used:
ALLOC
ALLOC
ALLOC
ALLOC
ALLOC
ALLOC
FI(SYSUT2)
FI(SYSUT3)
FI(SYSUT4)
FI(SYSUT5)
FI(SYSUT6)
FI(SYSUT7)
UNIT(SYSDA)
UNIT(SYSDA)
UNIT(SYSDA)
UNIT(SYSDA)
UNIT(SYSDA)
UNIT(SYSDA)
NEW
NEW
NEW
NEW
NEW
NEW
DELETE
DELETE
DELETE
DELETE
DELETE
DELETE
SPACE(1,1)
SPACE(1,1)
SPACE(1,1)
SPACE(1,1)
SPACE(1,1)
SPACE(1,1)
CYLINDER
CYLINDER
CYLINDER
CYLINDER
CYLINDER
CYLINDER
Note: SYSUT6 and SYSUT7 are required only if VS COBOL II Version 1, Release 3
is being used.
192
z/OS V1R6.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol I
Appendix G. ISRDDN Diagnostic Utility
ISRDDN is a utility that assists IBM support in evaluating and solving problems. It
provides a list of allocated DD names, a list of system ENQs, a list of data sets
causing system ENQ contention, and a means of viewing storage within a TSO
user’s address space. ISRDDN also provides some facilities for gathering
information about your system environment.
You can start ISRDDN by issuing the commands TSO ISRDDN or DDLIST from
any ISPF command line.
The allocated DD name list shows you all of the DD names allocated to your TSO
session. From the list you can perform functions such as Edit or Compress against
individual data sets, DD names, or sets of DD names. You can also perform actions
against the entire list of displayed DD names.
The ENQ list, available by typing ENQ on the allocation list command line, shows
you ENQs on your system. You can limit the size of the list by specifying the
QNAME, RNAME, job, user or address space name, and system name.
The ENQ contention list, available by typing CON on the allocation list command
line, shows you ENQ contentions on your system for data sets (QNAME SYSDSN).
You can Browse storage using the BROWSE primary command from the allocation
list. You can only browse storage which an unauthorized program can see (private
and common).
ISRDDN can be used to manipulate the data sets that are allocated, but it also
provides the ability to answer questions like:
v Where did a module the user has loaded come from?
v What data sets contain a specific member?
v Are the I/O errors and ABENDs the user is getting due to mixed record format
allocations?
v Who is currently allocated to ″SYS1.BRODCAST″?
v What member names or LPA load modules are duplicated in the user’s current
allocations?
v How many members are in the allocated libraries and which libraries are
empty?
v Is the user running ISPF out of LPA or from STEPLIB?
To invoke the ISRDDN program, type TSO ISRDDN on any ISPF command line.
The Current Data Set Allocations List
When you start ISRDDN, the Current Data Set Allocations list displays, as shown
in Figure 61 on page 194.
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1980, 2004
193
Current Data Set Allocations
Row 1 of 197
Volume Disposition Act DDname Data Set Name Actions: B E V M F C I Q
D$SY01 SHR,KEEP > _ ALLOCPDS SYS2.SYSPLEXD.ALLOCLIB
D$IS02 SHR,KEEP > _ ASMLANGX PDFTDEV.COMMON.WDBLANGX
D1SY01 SHR,KEEP > _ HASPINDX SYS2.ISD1.HASPINDX
D$IS04 SHR,KEEP > _ ISPILIB PDFTDEV.STG.GIF
D$IS03 SHR,KEEP > _
PDFTDEV.INT.GIF
D$IS03 SHR,KEEP > _
PDFTDEV.FVT.GIF
D$IS04 SHR,KEEP > _
PDFTDEV.SVT.GIF
D$PP02 SHR,KEEP > _ ISPLLIB WDB.WDBDEV.LOAD
D$IS04 SHR,KEEP > _
PDFTDEV.USERID.LOAD
D$IS03 SHR,KEEP > _
PDFTOOL.COMMON.LOAD
D$IS04 SHR,KEEP > _
PDFTDEV.STG.LOAD
D$IS02 SHR,KEEP > _
PDFTDEV.INT.LOAD
D$IS02 SHR,KEEP > _
PDFTDEV.FVT.LOAD
D$IS04 SHR,KEEP > _
PDFTDEV.SVT.LOAD
D$IS03 SHR,KEEP > _
[email protected]
D$IS05 SHR,KEEP > _
ISPFTEST.LOAD
$$SR40 SHR,KEEP > _
SYS1.DFQLLIB
$$SR40 SHR,KEEP > _
SYS1.DGTLLIB
Command ===>
Scroll ===> PAGE
F1=Help
F2=Split F3=Exit
F5=Rfind F7=Up
F8=Down
F9=Swap
F10=Left F11=Right F12=Cancel
Figure 61. Current Data Set Allocations List panel
On the right side of the display is a list of DD names and their associated data
sets. The list of data sets can also contain indicators of DUMMY allocations,
subsystem files, or allocations to the terminal. The DD name is shown in white,
unless the first data set in the concatenation is scrolled off the top of the screen. If
the first data set in a concatenation is not on the screen, the DD name is shown in
yellow.
In the center of the display is a column of 1-character input fields, preceded by
greater-than signs (>). These input fields are used for line commands such as E for
Edit or I for Information.
The left side of the display contains columns of information about individual data
sets. When you scroll right or left, the left side of the screen changes. Initially, the
left side of the screen contains the volume name and disposition. If the disposition
is red, there are other jobs waiting to use this data set as shown. You can use the Q
line command to see what jobs are waiting. You can view the VTOC information
for a volume by placing the cursor on the volume name and pressing the Enter
key.
ISRDDN automatically checks for mixed concatenations when it is started. If you
have concatenations of mixed data set types or formats, you are shown a message
to that effect when you press the Enter key or scroll the first time. ISRDDN also
checks for mixed concatenations when you use the RESET command.
If you scroll right once, you see the attributes of each data set, as shown in
Figure 62 on page 195.
194
z/OS V1R6.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol I
Current Data Set Allocations
Blksz Lrecl RCFM Org
27920
80 FB PO
27998 1017 VB PO
4096 4096 F
PS
27920
80 FB LIB
27920
80 FB LIB
27920
80 FB LIB
27920
80 FB PO
6144
** U
PO
6144
** U
PO
6144
** U
PO
6144
** U
LIB
6144
** U
LIB
6144
** U
LIB
6144
** U
PO
6144
** U
PO
6144
** U
LIB
32760
** U
PO
32760
** U
PO
Command ===>
F1=Help
F2=Split
F10=Left F11=Right
Act
> _
> _
> _
> _
> _
> _
> _
> _
> _
> _
> _
> _
> _
> _
> _
> _
> _
> _
Row 1 of 197
DDname
ALLOCPDS
ASMLANGX
HASPINDX
ISPILIB
Data Set Name Actions: B E V M F C I Q
SYS2.SYSPLEXD.ALLOCLIB
PDFTDEV.COMMON.WDBLANGX
SYS2.ISD1.HASPINDX
PDFTDEV.STG.GIF
PDFTDEV.INT.GIF
PDFTDEV.FVT.GIF
PDFTDEV.SVT.GIF
ISPLLIB WDB.WDBDEV.LOAD
PDFTDEV.USERID.LOAD
PDFTOOL.COMMON.LOAD
PDFTDEV.STG.LOAD
PDFTDEV.INT.LOAD
PDFTDEV.FVT.LOAD
PDFTDEV.SVT.LOAD
[email protected]
ISPFTEST.LOAD
SYS1.DFQLLIB
SYS1.DGTLLIB
Scroll ===> PAGE
F3=Exit
F5=Rfind F7=Up
F8=Down
F9=Swap
F12=Cancel
Figure 62. Data Set Attributes in ISRDDN
For some types of allocations, such as subsystem allocations, you might see
different information. If you have mixed concatenations, a message with this
information appears when you press the Enter key or scroll the first time. You can
suppress this message for future innovations of ISRDDN by using the CHECK OFF
command.
If you scroll right a second time, you see information that includes whether the DD
name is open and if so, by how many active DCBs, as shown in Figure 63 on page
196.
Appendix G. ISRDDN Diagnostic Utility
195
Current Data Set Allocations
Row 1 of 197
Open
SMS ENQWait Act DDname Data Set Name Actions: B E V M F C I Q
> _ ALLOCPDS SYS2.SYSPLEXD.ALLOCLIB
SMS
> _ ASMLANGX PDFTDEV.COMMON.WDBLANGX
> _ HASPINDX SYS2.ISD1.HASPINDX
SMS
> _ ISPILIB PDFTDEV.STG.GIF
SMS
> _
PDFTDEV.INT.GIF
SMS
> _
PDFTDEV.FVT.GIF
SMS
> _
PDFTDEV.SVT.GIF
Open(2)
> _ ISPLLIB WDB.WDBDEV.LOAD
Open(2) SMS
> _
PDFTDEV.USERID.LOAD
Open(2) SMS
> _
PDFTOOL.COMMON.LOAD
Open(2) SMS
> _
PDFTDEV.STG.LOAD
Open(2) SMS
> _
PDFTDEV.INT.LOAD
Open(2) SMS
> _
PDFTDEV.FVT.LOAD
Open(2) SMS
> _
PDFTDEV.SVT.LOAD
Open(2) SMS
> _
[email protected]
Open(2) SMS
> _
ISPFTEST.LOAD
Open(2)
> _
SYS1.DFQLLIB
Open(2)
> _
SYS1.DGTLLIB
Command ===>
Scroll ===> PAGE
F1=Help
F2=Split F3=Exit
F5=Rfind F7=Up
F8=Down
F9=Swap
F10=Left F11=Right F12=Cancel
Figure 63. Additional DD Information
You also see the indicator *SMS* if the data set is SMS-managed, and information
about jobs waiting on the resource. For JES files you might see additional
information such as the class and the writer name.
Some primary commands, MEMBER and COUNT, for example, put messages in a
fourth status screen (Figure 64.
Current Data Set Allocations
Message
Members: 10
Members: 0
Act
> _
> _
> _
> _
> _
> _
> _
> _
> _
> _
> _
> _
> _
> _
> _
> _
> _
> _
DDname
ALLOCPDS
ASMLANGX
HASPINDX
ISPILIB
Row 1 of 197
Data Set Name Actions: B E V M F C I Q
SYS2.SYSPLEXD.ALLOCLIB
PDFTDEV.COMMON.WDBLANGX
SYS2.ISD1.HASPINDX
Members: 0
PDFTDEV.STG.GIF
Members: 0
PDFTDEV.INT.GIF
Members: 0
PDFTDEV.FVT.GIF
Members: 26
PDFTDEV.SVT.GIF
Members: 2
ISPLLIB WDB.WDBDEV.LOAD
Members: 1
PDFTDEV.USERID.LOAD
Members: 138
PDFTOOL.COMMON.LOAD
Members: 5
PDFTDEV.STG.LOAD
Members: 0
PDFTDEV.INT.LOAD
Members: 0
PDFTDEV.FVT.LOAD
Members: 480
PDFTDEV.SVT.LOAD
Members: 1
[email protected]
Members: 5
ISPFTEST.LOAD
Members: 13
SYS1.DFQLLIB
Members: 568
SYS1.DGTLLIB
Command ===>
Scroll ===> PAGE
F1=Help
F2=Split F3=Exit
F5=Rfind F7=Up
F8=Down
F9=Swap
F10=Left F11=Right F12=Cancel
Figure 64. Additional DD Information
196
z/OS V1R6.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol I
If messages exist and you scroll right again, you see the messages. The message
screen is only shown if messages exist. If messages do not exist, a third scroll to the
right returns you to the initial screen.
Using Commands on the Displayed List
The Current Data Set Allocations list supports both primary commands and line
commands. The displayed list is the list of DD names that you can see by scrolling
up and down. You can use primary commands to limit what is displayed in the
list. Many of the primary commands work only on the contents of the displayed
list.
ISRDDN can also create pseudo-DD names that show useful data set names. For
example, the LPA command adds two pseudo-DD names, LINKLIST and LPALIB,
which contain lists of the current link list and LPA libraries.
Allocation List Primary Commands
Primary commands are used to limit the contents of the displayed list, to add
pseudo-DD names, to operate on all the contents of the displayed list and to
invoke other ISRDDN options.
All primary commands can be invoked with their minimum unique names. For
example, MEMBER can be abbreviated as M, while CLIST can be abbreviated as
CL. The allocation list primary commands follow.
You can specify an initial primary command when you start ISRDDN. For
example, if you enter DDLISTB 10.??? on an ISPF command line, you will
immediately browse the storage containing the TCB control block. When you exit
the Browse screen, you are not returned to the DD allocation list. This feature is
useful for calling ISRDDN from within a program when, for example, you want to
limit the list to specific dd names, view ENQs, save the current allocations, or
browse storage.
Only (O) and Exclude (EX, X)
ONLY and EXCLUDE are used to limit the DD names in the displayed list. They
take one operand—a whole or partial DD name. For example, the command O PLI
causes the list to contain only DD names that contain the string ″PLI″, such as
STEPLIB and ISPPLIB.
The ONLY and EXCLUDE commands are useful when you want to limit the DD
names or pseudo-DD names that are operated on by commands like MEMBER and
DUPLICATES. They are also helpful in reducing the size of the displayed list for
easier viewing.
Find (F) and Locate (L)
FIND and LOCATE search the list for a string. LOCATE looks only at DD names
and always locates the first matching DD name. FIND looks at everything
currently in the displayed list and finds the next occurrance of the string following
the current cursor position. You can repeat a FIND opeartion by pressing the
RFIND key.
Appendix G. ISRDDN Diagnostic Utility
197
When a string is found by FIND, the string is highlighted and the cursor is placed
on the string. When a string is found by LOCATE, the string is highlighted and the
cursor is placed in the line command area next to the located DD name.
Reset (R)
The RESET command rebuilds the list. In most screen formats the list is
automatically rebuilt when you press Enter. However, if you have used the
COUNT command or the MEMBER command and have messages showing in the
list, you might need to use the RESET command to refresh the list.
Short (S) and Long (LON)
The SHORT and LONG commands alter the format of the list. The SHORT
command places the DD name of a concatenation next to the first data set (as
shown in Figure 61 on page 194). The LONG command formats the list with DD
names of concatenations placed on a separate line before the data set names (as
shown in Figure 65).
Current Data Set Allocations
Row 1 of 206
Volume
D$SY01
D$IS02
D1SY01
Disposition Act DDname Data Set Name Actions: B E V M F C I Q
SHR,KEEP > _ ALLOCPDS SYS2.SYSPLEXD.ALLOCLIB
SHR,KEEP > _ ASMLANGX PDFTDEV.COMMON.WDBLANGX
SHR,KEEP > _ HASPINDX SYS2.ISD1.HASPINDX
> _ ISPILIB
D$IS04 SHR,KEEP > _
PDFTDEV.STG.GIF
D$IS03 SHR,KEEP > _
PDFTDEV.INT.GIF
D$IS03 SHR,KEEP > _
PDFTDEV.FVT.GIF
D$IS04 SHR,KEEP > _
PDFTDEV.SVT.GIF
> _ ISPLLIB
D$PP02 SHR,KEEP > _
WDB.WDBDEV.LOAD
D$IS04 SHR,KEEP > _
PDFTDEV.USERID.LOAD
D$IS03 SHR,KEEP > _
PDFTOOL.COMMON.LOAD
D$IS04 SHR,KEEP > _
PDFTDEV.STG.LOAD
D$IS02 SHR,KEEP > _
PDFTDEV.INT.LOAD
D$IS02 SHR,KEEP > _
PDFTDEV.FVT.LOAD
D$IS04 SHR,KEEP > _
PDFTDEV.SVT.LOAD
D$IS03 SHR,KEEP > _
[email protected]
D$IS05 SHR,KEEP > _
ISPFTEST.LOAD
Command ===>
Scroll ===> PAGE
F1=Help
F2=Split F3=Exit
F5=Rfind F7=Up
F8=Down
F9=Swap
F10=Left F11=Right F12=Cancel
Figure 65. Current Data Set Allocations List in LONG Format
The SHORT format shows more information on one screen. Use the LONG format
when you want to use line commands that operate on whole concatenations, such
as E and V, on only the first data set in a concatenation.
Member (M)
The MEMBER command is a very useful command in ISRDDN. MEMBER searches
the displayed list (or just DD names containing a given string) for a member
whose name matches a pattern. For example, the command M ISRSUBS searches
the data sets in the displayed list, the job pack area, and the link pack directory for
members named ISRSUBS. Data sets that contain the member are flagged with a
message on the left side of the list, as shown in Figure 66 on page 199.
198
z/OS V1R6.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol I
Current Data Set Allocation
Message
Act
> _
> _
> _
> _
> _
> _
> _
> _
> _
> _
> _
> _
> _
> _
> _
> _
> _
> _
Member was found
DDname
ALLOCPDS
ASMLANGX
HASPINDX
ISPILIB
Data Set Name Actions: B E V M F C I Q
SYS2.SYSPLEXD.ALLOCLIB
PDFTDEV.COMMON.WDBLANGX
SYS2.ISD1.HASPINDX
PDFTDEV.STG.GIF
PDFTDEV.INT.GIF
PDFTDEV.FVT.GIF
PDFTDEV.SVT.GIF
ISPLLIB WDB.WDBDEV.LOAD
PDFTDEV.USERID.LOAD
PDFTOOL.COMMON.LOAD
Member: ISRSUBS
PDFTDEV.STG.LOAD
PDFTDEV.INT.LOAD
PDFTDEV.FVT.LOAD
Member: ISRSUBS
PDFTDEV.SVT.LOAD
[email protected]
ISPFTEST.LOAD
SYS1.DFQLLIB
SYS1.DGTLLIB
Command ===>
Scroll ===> PAGE
F1=Help
F2=Split F3=Exit
F5=Rfind F7=Up
F8=Down
F9=Swap
F10=Left F11=Right F12=Cancel
Figure 66. Results of the MEMBER Command
If the name is the name of a loaded module in the job pack area or LPA, you also
see a panel similar to the one in Figure 69 on page 202.
When a member name is used on the MEMBER command (such as, M ISRSUBS)
and an E, V, or B line command is used next to a data set in which that member is
found, ONLY that member is Edited, Viewed, or Browsed. When the M line
command is used, the member list is shown with the selected member at the top of
the list.
When a member name pattern is used on the member command (such as, M ISR*),
the E, V, B, and M line commands display member lists with members that match
the given pattern.
Use the MEMBER command in situations when you do not know from where a
member is coming or when you suspect that you might be accessing the wrong
copy of a member. For example, if you are developing ISPF panels and you do not
see your version of the panel being displayed, you can issue the MEMBER
command to search for other copies of the panel.
Usually the MEMBER command operates on the entire displayed list. You can add
a second operand that is a partial DD name. For example, the command M
ISRSUBS PL searches only DD names with the string PL in it such as ISPLLIB or
STEPLIB. This avoids having to use the ONLY command to limit the search.
Clist (CL) or Save (SA)
The CLIST command creates a CLIST that contains TSO ALLOCATE statements to
reproduce the allocations in the displayed list. The CLIST name is
’userid.ISRDDN.CLIST’ or ’prefix.userid.ISRDDN.CLIST’. You can use the
command name SAVE instead of CLIST.
Appendix G. ISRDDN Diagnostic Utility
199
Use this command when you want to change allocations for testing purposes. For
example, to add a panel library to your ISPPLIB concatenation:
v Enter ISRDDN
v Type O ISPPLIB to limit the displayed list to DD name ISPPLIB
v
v
v
v
Type CLIST to create and edit the ISRDDN.CLIST data set
Change the ALLOCATE statement to add your data set
Exit ISPF
Execute the CLIST (that is, EX ISRDDN)
Like the MEMBER command, you can add a whole or partial DD name to limit the
number of DD names that are included in the generated CLIST. For example, to
create a CLIST that only contains allocation statements for DD names containing
the string ISP, type CLIST ISP or SAVE ISP.
Check (CH)
The CHECK command turns on or off automatic checking for mixed
concatenations. CHECK or CHECK ON enables automatic checking, and CHECK
OFF disables it. When checking for mixed concatenations is enabled, ISRDDN
checks for concatenations with mixed record formats, mixed fixed record lengths,
and mixed data set organizations. Because there are times when these
concatenations are intended, you might want to turn off the warning generated by
ISRDDN.
Count (C)
The COUNT command displays the number of members in a partitioned data set.
The number of members is shown in the message area on the left side of the list.
COUNT can be used to find out if you have empty data sets in your
concatenations. For example, if you want to find out if all members of an
SCLM-controlled library system were successfully promoted, you can edit the
hierarchy, invoke ISRDDN, and use the COUNT command to verify that all of the
expected libraries in the concatenation are empty.
Like the MEMBER command, you can add a whole or partial DD name to limit the
number of DD names that are searched.
Duplicates (DUP)
The DUPLICATES command searches all of the partitioned data sets in the
displayed list and the LPA and displays a list of duplicate names. From the
duplicates list, you can use the E (edit), B (browse), and V (view) line commands
to view the PDS member or LPA storage. Use the DUPLICATES command to see
where you might have potential conflicts with old or modified versions of load
modules, REXX or CLIST programs, ISPF panels, or other PDS members.
For module names found in the Link Pack directory, the address of the module
and its size are shown on the left side of the screen. If the name is an alias of a
different module, the real name (major name) is shown instead of the size.
The duplicates list is shown in Figure 67 on page 201. Like the MEMBER
command, you can add a whole or partial DD name to limit the number of DD
200
z/OS V1R6.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol I
names that are searched. For example, to search only DD names that contain the
string LLIB, enter DUP LLIB.
Duplicate members list
Address Siz/Maj DDname Act Member
ISPLLIB > _ FLM$CP
00D8A5F8 FLMIO24 --LPA--- > _
Row 1 of 562
Data set name
Actions: B, E, V
PDFTDEV.SVT.LOAD
ISPLLIB > _ FLM$CPI PDFTDEV.SVT.LOAD
04668F20 000000E0 --LPA--- > _
ISPLLIB > _ FLM$DE
00D8B218 FLMIO24 --LPA--- > _
PDFTDEV.SVT.LOAD
ISPLLIB > _ FLM$DT
00D8B9D8 FLMIO24 --LPA--- > _
PDFTDEV.SVT.LOAD
ISPLLIB > _ FLM$99
00D88DF8 FLMIO24 --LPA--- > _
PDFTDEV.SVT.LOAD
ISPLLIB > _ FLM@SCAN PDFTOOL.COMMON.LOAD
ISPLLIB > _
[email protected]
Command ===>
F1=Help
F2=Split F3=Exit
F5=Rfind
F10=Left F11=Right F12=Cancel
F7=Up
Scroll ===> PAGE
F8=Down
F9=Swap
Figure 67. The Duplicates List Display
Apf, Linklist (LI), Parmlib, and Lpa (LP)
The APF, LINKLIST, PARMLIB, and LPA commands add and remove pseudo-DD
names that show the defined APF libraries, link list libraries, PARMLIB libraries,
and LPA libraries respectively. These pseudo-DD names are shown as if they are
allocated DD names, but no actual allocation to the libraries is made. You can use
most of the primary and line commands with these names, just as you would with
real DD names.
In the confirmation panel, you can type YES to process the libraries, or SKIP to
process the libraries and avoid the confirmation panel in the future. Dynamic LPA,
Link lists, PARMLIB, and APF lists are all supported.
The LINKLIST and LPA commands add both the LINKLIST and LPALIB
pseudo-DD names. To delete any pseudo-DD name, enter the appropriate
command a second time. For example, to add APF libraries to the list, use the APF
commmand. To remove the APF libraries from the list, enter the APF command a
second time.
Select (S) and Load (L)
The SELECT command searches the job pack area (JPA) and link pack area (LPA)
to see if a module is loaded. If the module is found, you see the CSVQUERY
Results panel shown in Figure 69 on page 202.
Appendix G. ISRDDN Diagnostic Utility
201
┌─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐ 197
│
CSVQUERY Results
│
│
More:
+ │ Q
│ Module ISRSUBS was found to be already loaded. Note that
│
│ invocations of this program name may pick up another copy from
│
│ STEPLIB or a LIBDEF’ed data set or from a tasklib such as ISPLLIB. │
│ Tab to a box and press enter to view the module in storage.
│
│
+-------------------------+
+-------------------------+ │
│
| Job pack area resident |
| PLPA resident
| │
│
| Resident above 16 Meg |
| Resident above 16 Meg | │
│
| Loaded by program fetch |
| Module address:05437000 | │
│
| from ISPLLIB (Lib 4) |
| Module size: 000D03C0 | │
│
| PDFTDEV.STG.LOAD
|
| Reentrant
| │
│
| Module address:15EC6000 |
| Serially reusable
| │
│
| Module size: 000D3000 |
| Not loadable only
| │
│
| Reentrant
|
| AMODE 31
| │
│
| Serially reusable
|
| Authorized library
| │
│
| Not loadable only
|
| Not Authorized program | │
│
| AMODE 31
|
+-------------------------+ │
│
| Not Authorized program |
│
│
+-------------------------+
│
C │ Command ===>
│ PAGE
│ F1=Help
F2=Split F3=Exit
F9=Swap F12=Cancel
│
F └─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘
Figure 69. The CSVQUERY Results Panel
The information shown in the CSVQUERY Results panel is mostly derived by
issuing a CSVQUERY macro. The data set name from which the module was
loaded is shown if it can be determined. However, because of the way this
information is gathered, the data set name can be incorrect if the original DD name
from which the data set was loaded has been reallocated since the module was
loaded.
On the CSVQUERY Results panel, you can use the TAB key to place the cursor
inside the boxes describing the load module. If you then press Enter, you can
browse the load module in storage.
The SELECT command is useful in situations where you need to know where a
loaded program came from, for example, when you think you might be running
mixed levels of ISPF or of an application under ISPF.
If a module is not loaded but you want to see its attibutes, you can use the LOAD
command instead of the SELECT command. LOAD uses the current tasklib such as
ISPLLIB, but you should verify that the loaded module came from the source you
were expecting it to come from. LOAD automatically browses the load module
storage.
Custom (CU)
The CUSTOM command shows several settings about your ISPF installation. It
shows the values that used to be set in the ISPDFLTS CSECT but are now in the
ISPF Configuration table, and it shows the values configurerd in module ISPTCM.
This command is helpful when you are having trouble with the way certain
programs are invoked. For more information about ISPTCM, refer to ISPF Planning
and Customizing.
MList (ML)
202
z/OS V1R6.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol I
The MLIST command displays the eyecatchers for some of the ISPF CSECTs
contained in modules ISPSUBS and ISRSUBS. This command can sometimes be
used to verify that you are running with a particular level of maintenance because
the eyecatchers in most ISPF modules contain a release number or a PTF level.
Browse (B)
ISRDDN provides a method of browsing storage using ISPF BROWSE. The storage
can be browsed as unformatted data, as minimally formatted data, or as a
side-by-side hexadecimal and EBCDIC dump format. ISRDDN also enables you to
automatically chain lists, view arrays, and view the data pointed to by control
blocks that are mainly lists of pointers (such as CVT).
The BROWSE primary command accepts a storage address, module name, or TSO
TEST address locator string. Some examples invoking BROWSE are:
B ISRSUBS
Browse the already loaded module named ISRSUBS.
B 10.
Browse storage at hexadecimal location 10. In order to
distinguish hexadecimal addresses from module names,
absolute addresses must end with a period.
B 0.+21c?+b4?+108?+8
Browse storage based on a TSO TEST style string. In this case,
the control block called the Protected Step Control Block or
PSCB is shown.
B ISRSUBS+60?
Browse the address pointed to by the 4 bytes at offset
hexadecimal 60 into module ISRSUBS.
B ? or B +0?
When executed from within the storage browser, this command
uses the address 0 bytes from the beginning of the displayed
storage as a pointer and starts a new browse session to show
that storage.
Enq (E)
You can view ENQs on the system using the ENQ command. A display similar to
the one shown in Figure 70 on page 204 appears. You can reduce the size of the list
by specifying a QNAME, RNAME, address space name, and a system name. All
entries are treated as prefixes, so you might not need to specify complete names.
Appendix G. ISRDDN Diagnostic Utility
203
System ENQ Status
Row 1 of 183
Scroll LEFT or RIGHT to see type or system name.
Major name prefix . . . SYSDSN
(SYSDSN, SPFEDIT, etc)
Minor name prefix . . .
(dsn etc)
Address id prefix . . . USERID
(Job name, User id, etc)
System prefix . . . . .
(System name)
Major
Minor
Job Name
┌──────────┬──────────────────────────────────────────────────────┬──────────┐
│ SYSDSN │ AOP.SAOPEXEC
│ USERID │
│ SYSDSN │ AOP.SAOPMENU
│ USERID │
│ SYSDSN │ AOP.SAOPPENU
│ USERID │
│ SYSDSN │ AZZ.V1R1.SAZZCLIB
│ USERID │
│ SYSDSN │ AZZ.V1R1.SAZZMENU
│ USERID │
│ SYSDSN │ AZZ.V1R1.SAZZPENU
│ USERID │
│ SYSDSN │ AZZ.V1R1.SAZZSENU
│ USERID │
│ SYSDSN │ BZZ.SBZZCLIB
│ USERID │
│ SYSDSN │ BZZ.SBZZMENU
│ USERID │
│ SYSDSN │ BZZ.SBZZPENU
│ USERID │
│ SYSDSN │ BZZ.SBZZSENU
│ USERID │
Command ===>
Scroll ===> PAGE
F1=Help
F2=Split F3=Exit
F5=Rfind F7=Up
F8=Down
F9=Swap
F10=Left F11=Right F12=Cancel
Figure 70. The System ENQ Status List Panel
The Major column shows the QNAME. The Minor field shows the RNAME and if
the RNAME is 8 bytes or less, it shows the hexadecimal representation of the
RNAME next to the EBCDIC representation.
In the System ENQ Status list, the Job Name field is color-coded to indicate the
type of ENQ that the address space holds or is waiting for. Green indicates a
shared ENQ. Red indicates an exclusive ENQ.
If an address space does not hold the ENQ but is waiting for it, the job name is
shown highlighted in reverse video.
On narrow screens, you can scroll right or left for more information. By scrolling
left and right you see the system name and ENQ options (SYS (system), SYSS
(systems), STEP, G (global), and R (reserve)). On wide screens you see all of the
information on one screen without scrolling left or right.
On the System ENQ Status display, press END to return to the Current Data Set
Allocations list, or enter CON to view the System ENQ Contention display. You
can also use the ALL command to view all ENQs or use the RESET command to
see only the data set ENQs (QNAME SYSDSN) for your TSO user id.
Con (C)
You can view ENQ contention on the system by using the CON command. When
ENQ contention exists, you see a screen similar to the one in Figure 70, but
without the input fields. When no contention exists, a message displays instead of
the list.
Allocation List Line Commands
Allocation list line commands are entered next to a DD name or data set. By
default the allocation list is in short format. This means that for concatenations, the
DD name is next to the first data set name in the concatenation.
204
z/OS V1R6.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol I
When a line command is entered next to a DD name, the command is intended to
work on the DD allocation rather than the data set name on that line. For example,
an E command next to the DD name that refers to a concatenation edits the whole
concatenation. If you want to edit just the first data set in a concatenation, use the
LONG command to place the list in long format. In long format, the DD name for
a concatenation is on a separate line so that you can place line commands next to
the first data set name in the concatenation.
The Edit, Browse, View, and Member list commands are sensitive to the results of
the MEMBER primary command. When the MEMBER primary command searches
the displayed list for a member or members matching a name pattern, the member
or pattern is shown in the list. Placing an E, B, V, or M next to a name in which
the member or pattern was found displays either a member list with member
names matching the pattern or the specific found member.
E - Edit
The E line command edits a data set or concatenation. It can be used on any data
set or any DD name allocated to a data set (real or VIO). You might want to use
the E line command for editing temporary files such as JCL that was created by file
tailoring and written to the ISPCTLn DD name.
B - Browse
The B line command browses a data set or concatenation. It can be used on any
data set or any DD name allocated to a data set (real or VIO). You can use the B
line command for browsing allocated files. For example, the compress option in the
PDF utilities, option 3.1, creates a listing data set that is sometimes allocated to the
ISPCTL1. When you press the HELP key after compressing a data set in option 3.1,
you might see that the listing was saved in a temporary data set. The B line
command in ISRDDN is an easy way to browse that data set.
V - View
Use the V line command to view a data set or concatenation. This is similar to E
(Edit) but there is no SAVE command. Use this when you want to view a data set
and modify it for easier viewing without risking changes to the data set.
M - Member list
The M command displays an enhanced member list for a data set or concatenation.
This gives you greater flexibility in working with allocated data sets. You might
use this command when you have several different operations to perform on
members.
F - Free
Use the FREE command to free an allocation. The Free command must be specified
next to a DD name. F commands next to data sets in a concatenation with an F
next to the DD name are ignored because those data sets are removed from the list
before the F commands are processed.
The F command uses SVC 99 (dynamic allocation) to free the DD name. However,
if SVC 99 cannot free the data set, ISRDDN invokes TSO’s FREE command. The
TSO FREE command might write a message to the screen with information on why
Appendix G. ISRDDN Diagnostic Utility
205
the free failed. This command is useful when you need to free allocations such as
those left by prematurely terminated or poorly behaved programs.
C or Z - Compress
Use the COMPRESS command to compress partitioned data sets. The COMPRESS
command can be used with data sets that are allocated as shared and can be used
next to data set names or DD names.
I - Information
The I command attempts to invoke the PDF data set information utility to display
information about a data set. It can be used next to any real data set name. VIO
data sets are not supported. This command can provide information such as the
number of allocated directory blocks or a data set’s SMS management class, or
other information that is not shown by scrolling the Current Data Set Allocations
list left or right.
Q - Query ENQs
The Q command shows all SYSDSN and SPFEDIT ENQs that exist for a data set.
This command is useful when you want to see what other users or jobs are using a
data set you have allocated. Using the Q command provides the same information
as using the ENQ primary command and selecting an RNAME of the data set
name.
T - Test Directory
The T line command reads the directory of a PDS directly, and performs a BLDL
command on each member to see if the BLDL service returns accurate information
for the directory. The results are displayed in a separate Browse session. The T
command can be used to debug problems such as I/O errors or the need to refresh
LLA or other directory caching systems.
K- VTOC Information
The K line command displays VTOC information for the first volume on which the
data set resides. The information returned is the same as in the Data Set List utility
(option 3.4, command V). You can also view VTOC information by placing the
cursor on the volume name and pressing Enter. If the data set is not on a physical
volume, the K command does not provide any information.
Browsing Storage
You can use the BROWSE command within ISRDDN to view the contents of
storage within your address space. When you are browsing storage, you can use
any of the standard ISPF Browse primary commands. In addition, there are several
primary commands you can use to format and move around in the storage list.
If you are not using one of the special display formats (CHAIN, ARRAY, or
ARRAYP), you can scroll UP even when the ″Top of Data″ line is displayed so that
you can see what data exists before your requested storage location. After you
scroll up once, you can scroll up or down to the limits of the contiguous
addressable storage.
BROWSE
206
z/OS V1R6.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol I
When the BROWSE command is invoked within an existing browse session, a new
browse session is started. The END command returns you to the previous Browse
session. To end all of the sessions and return to the Current Data Set Allocations
list, use the CANCEL command.
Browse can also be used with point and shoot. Place the cursor over an address
within the display and press Enter. A new browse session is started to view the
storage pointed to by the cursor. If the cursor is not on a valid, accessible address,
an error message displays.
RAW
Display storage data as unformatted text. Storage is shown on the screen without
any formatting. The data on a line is the data that immediately follows the data on
the previous line. Because the FIND command is actually searching the screen
image and not storage itself, it is best to search storage while in the RAW display
format. Note that even in unformatted displays, if your search string would span
lines, FIND does not locate the string. To avoid this, search for the string in RAW
format, then enter the command B +20 to find the string again. This shifts the
display by 32 bytes (hexadecimal 20) and the line breaks occur in different places.
DATA
Display the storage as an unformatted string of data with offsets shown on the left
side of the screen. Use this format to give you a better context of the storage you
are browsing.
FORMAT
Display the storage in both hexadecimal and EBCDIC, the way you might see the
format in a data dump (see Figure 71 on page 208). On wide screens such as a 3278
Mod 5, the format includes 16 bytes per line (8 sets of 4 bytes). On narrower
screens, the format contains 8 bytes per line (4 sets of 4 bytes). FORMAT is the
default format that appears whenever a storage browse session is started.
Appendix G. ISRDDN Diagnostic Utility
207
BROWSE
ISPSUBS JPA Start:15D8C890 Size:000E5770 Line 00000000 Col 001 080
********************************* Top of Data **********************************
+0 (15D8C890) C9E2D7E3 E2C3F040 000003BC 15E03450 * ISPTSC0 ...!.\.& *
+10 (15D8C8A0) 15DCE850 15DB0C48 15E1EDB0 15DE49A0 * .³Y&.¹.þ.qÊ^.·±Á *
+20 (15D8C8B0) 15DE7BF8 15E21780 15E00E48 15E71848 * .·#8.S.Ï.\.þ.X.þ *
+30 (15D8C8C0) 15E1E1A0 15DCEA40 15E1F400 15E1FEE0 * .qqÁ.³. .q4..q┌\ *
+40 (15D8C8D0) 15E0D540 15E0E148 15E20038 15E6BE98 * .\N .\qþ.S...W┤q *
+50 (15D8C8E0) 15E106D0 15E202B8 15E0E950 15DDD380 * .q.}.S.¢.\Z&.}LÏ *
+60 (15D8C8F0) 15D8DC30 15E0F7C0 15E10308 15E0F1A0 * .Q³..\7{.q...\1Á *
+70 (15D8C900) 15E1EB98 15E20700 15DBA490 15E0B518 * .qÈq.S...¹u..\º. *
+80 (15D8C910) 15E6D018 15DA8AC0 15DA5D58 15E20AE0 * .W}...½{..)ý.S.\ *
+90 (15D8C920) 15E25D20 15DA9A30 15E6D3D0 15E6DB98 * .S)...¬..WL}.W¹q *
+A0 (15D8C930) 15E212C0 15E21540 15DFFB08 15E6F128 * .S.{.S. .....W1. *
+B0 (15D8C940) 15DAE7D8 15E083C8 15DB0428 15E0EFB0 * ..XQ.\cH.¹...\ı^ *
+C0 (15D8C950) 15E0F628 15E0F290 15E0AB60 15E209D8 * .\6..\2..\┐-.S.Q *
+D0 (15D8C960) 15E224F0 15DFDBE0 15E0D050 15DCD0B0 * .S.0..¹\.\}&.³}^ *
+E0 (15D8C970) 15DCD3D0 15DCD190 15E23A80 15E6F480 * .³L}.³J..S.Ï.W4Ï *
+F0 (15D8C980) 15E23B58 15E24BE8 15D8D630 15E24E40 * .S.ý.S.Y.QO..S+ *
+100 (15D8C990) 15D8CC50 15E252A8 15E25468 15E25B20 * .Q÷&.SÛy.SÞÃ.S$. *
+110 (15D8C9A0) 15E29E30 15E6FDA8 15E2B778 15E0D358 * .Sã..W┘y.S...\Lý *
+120 (15D8C9B0) 15E70AC8 15DCEB10 15E2B998 15DFF458 * .X.H.³È..S¥q..4ý *
Command ===> ________________________________________________ Scroll ===> PAGE
F1=HELP
F2=
F3=END
F4=DATASETS F5=FIND
F6=CHANGE
F9=SWAP
F10=LEFT
F11=RIGHT
F12=SUBMIT
Figure 71. Storage Viewed in FORMAT Mode
WIDE and NARROW
The WIDE and NARROW commands switch the display between wide and narrow
formats regardless of the type of terminal you are using. If the screen is too narrow
to handle the wide format, you must scroll right and left to see all of the data.
REFRESH (REF)
Use the REFRESH command to scroll the display back to the +0 offset. REFRESH
is useful if you have scrolled up past the initial ″Top of Data″ line and want to
return to your original referenced storage location.
REFRESH is not available in CHAIN, ARRAY, or ARRAYP formatted displays.
CHAIN
When you are viewing a linked list, you can use the CHAIN command to view
more than one link at a time. The syntax for CHAIN is
CHAIN [offset [length]]
The offset is a hexadecimal offset of the 4–byte pointer to the next link. The length is
a hexadecimal minimum length to show for each link. The default for offset is
zero. The default for length is whatever fits on one line in the current display
format. The chain is considered terminated when a pointer of zero is found, a
pointer to the first node is found, or a pointer to unavailable storage is found.
Entering the CHAIN command a second time turns the CHAIN formatting off.
For example, to see the current ASCB chain, enter ISRDDN and type
B 10.??+C?
CHAIN 4 20
208
z/OS V1R6.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol I
You see a screen similar to Figure 72.
BROWSE
STORAGE Start:00F90100
Line 00000001 Col 001 080
+0 (00F90100) C1E2C3C2 00F92B80 00F90280 00000000 * ASCB.9.Ï.9.Ï.... *
+10 (00F90110) 008FD788 00029982 00000000 00000000 * ..Ph..rb........ *
+30 (00F92B80)
+40 (00F92B90)
C1E2C3C2 00F98500 00F90100 00000000 * ASCB.9e..9...... *
008FD880 000005B4 00000000 00000000 * ..QÏ...®........ *
+60 (00F98500)
+70 (00F98510)
C1E2C3C2 00F90700 00F92B80 00000000 * ASCB.9...9.Ï.... *
008FD598 0000E527 00000000 00000000 * ..Nq..V......... *
+90 (00F90700)
+A0 (00F90710)
C1E2C3C2 00F90580 00F98500 00000000 * ASCB.9.Ï.9e..... *
008FD690 00009130 00000000 00000000 * ..O...j......... *
+C0 (00F90580)
+D0 (00F90590)
C1E2C3C2 00000000 00F90700 00000000 * ASCB.....9...... *
008FD788 00007EC0 00000000 00000000 * ..Ph..={........ *
******************************** Bottom of Data ********************************
Command ===> ________________________________________________ Scroll ===> PAGE
F1=HELP
F2=
F3=END
F4=DATASETS F5=FIND
F6=CHANGE
F9=SWAP
F10=LEFT
F11=RIGHT
F12=SUBMIT
Figure 72. CHAIN Storage Format
In the CHAIN format display, the offsets on the left are the offsets within a
particular link followed by the actual address of the start of the line.
ARRAY
When you are viewing that is an array, you can show the array elements as
separate blocks of storage. The syntax for ARRAY is
ARRAY [dimension [length]]
The dimension is the number of array elements in decimal. The length is the length
of each element in hexadecimal. The default for length is 4.
For example, the static link list table is an array. Assuming that each element is 45
bytes (hexadecimal 2D) and that you want the first 30 entries, enter ISRDDN and
type:
B 10.?+4DC?+8
ARRAY 30 2D
You see a screen similar to Figure 73 on page 210.
Appendix G. ISRDDN Diagnostic Utility
209
BROWSE
STORAGE Start:00F3E6C0
Line 00000001 Col 001 080
+1 (00F3E6C0) 0CE2E8E2 F14BD3C9 D5D2D3C9 C2404040 * .SYS1.LINKLIB
*
(00F3E6D0) 40404040 40404040 40404040 40404040 *
*
(00F3E6E0) 40404040 40404040 40404040 40
*
*
+2 (00F3E6ED)
(00F3E6FD)
(00F3E70D)
0BE2E8E2 F14BD4C9 C7D3C9C2 40404040 * .SYS1.MIGLIB
40404040 40404040 40404040 40404040 *
40404040 40404040 40404040 40
*
*
*
*
+3 (00F3E71A)
(00F3E72A)
(00F3E73A)
0BE2E8E2 F14BC3E2 E2D3C9C2 40404040 * .SYS1.CSSLIB
40404040 40404040 40404040 40404040 *
40404040 40404040 40404040 40
*
*
*
*
+4 (00F3E747)
(00F3E757)
(00F3E767)
11E2E8E2 E74BC9E2 C4F14BD3 C9D5D2D3 * .SYSX.ISD1.LINKL *
C9C24040 40404040 40404040 40404040 * IB
*
40404040 40404040 40404040 40
*
*
+5 (00F3E774)
(00F3E784)
(00F3E794)
15E2E8E2 E74BE2E8 E2D7D3C5 E7C44BD3 * .SYSX.SYSPLEXD.L *
C9D5D2D3 C9C24040 40404040 40404040 * INKLIB
*
40404040 40404040 40404040 40
*
*
Command ===>
F1=HELP
F2=
F9=SWAP
F10=LEFT
F3=END
F11=RIGHT
F4=DATASETS F5=FIND
F12=SUBMIT
Scroll ===> PAGE
F6=CHANGE
Figure 73. ARRAY Storage Format
In the ARRAY format display, the offsets on the left are the array element number
followed by the address of the displayed line.
ARRAYP
Many control blocks are mainly list of pointers. For example, the Communications
Vector Table (CVT) is an MVS control block that points to many other control
blocks. The ARRAYP command shows the data pointed to by the pointers in a
control block. Use the ARRAYP command when you are looking for the offset of a
pointer to a particular storage location. The syntax for ARRAYP is
ARRAYP [dim [length]]
The dim is the decimal number of pointers in the array. The length is a hexadecimal
length of each element pointed to by the pointer. The default for length is
whatever fits on one line in the current display format.
For example, to see what is pointed to by the elements of CVT, enter ISRDDN and
type
B 10.?
ARRAYP
You see a screen similar to Figure 74 on page 211.
In the ARRAYP format display, the offsets on the left are the offsets within the
array of pointers followed by the pointer itself. This is followed by the data to
which the pointer refers.
210
z/OS V1R6.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol I
BROWSE
STORAGE Start:00FC6CB8
Line 00000001 Col 001 080
+0 (00000218) 00889E88 00889E88 00FC4D80 00F90100 * .hãh.hãh..(Ï.9.. *
+4 (00FDEFC4) 0DA01211 A7240008 10114111 00001111 * .Á..x.....á..... *
+8 (00FC6C34) 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 * ................ *
+C (00FC72A0) C1E4E2C3 C2010000 00FCA440 40404040 * AUSCB.....u
*
+10 (00000000) 000A0000 000130E1 00000000 00000000 * .......q........ *
+14 (00FEB70C) 00FEB63C 00FEB63C 00FEB63C 00FEB63C * .┌Â..┌Â..┌Â..┌Â. *
+18 (00FE7096) 58F00224 58F0F06C 58F0F070 58F0F004 * ý0..ý00%ý00°ý00. *
+1C (00FDA0E8) 47F0F028 47F0F034 47F0F020 47F0F018 * Õ00.Õ00.Õ00.Õ00. *
+20 (00FD9F1C) 47F0F028 47F0F0E6 47F0F020 47F0F018 * Õ00.Õ00WÕ00.Õ00. *
+24 (0181B7F8) D3D3C3C2 04820000 00000000 00F8BB00 * LLCB.b.......8]. *
+28 (0126F150) 47F0F01C 16C3E2E5 D3D3E3D9 D440F0F2 * Õ00..CSVLLTRM 02 *
+2C (00FD8C50) 05F047F0 F00600E6 05A04AF0 F00407FF * .0Õ00..W.Áó00... *
+30 (00F29C70) 0088FF8E FA0E0000 00000000 00E4C3C2 * .h.u│........UCB *
+34 (00FDC2F0) 0DF058F0 F2020BEF 00FDC34C 00FDC360 * .0ý02..ı.┘C<.┘C- *
+38 (0103034F) 0C4104A0 045000E1 08961060 7E584000 * .á.Á.&.q.o.-=ý . *
+3C (00FC72C8) 15C7A300 D4E2C5D9 15CD6B40 000000FF * .Gt.MSER.‗, .... *
+40 (00F16000) 02000000 52000000 00000000 1000263C * ....Û........... *
+44 (00FEDE78) 47F0F008 41EE0002 1FCC43CE 00009110 * Õ00.áË...÷õ¾..j. *
+48 (00FDEFE8) 0DF04111 00000BE0 58F0F00E 0BEF0000 * .0á....\ý00..ı.. *
+4C (00000000) 000A0000 000130E1 00000000 00000000 * .......q........ *
Command ===> ________________________________________________ Scroll ===> PAGE
F1=HELP
F2=
F3=END
F4=DATASETS F5=FIND
F6=CHANGE
F9=SWAP
F10=LEFT
F11=RIGHT
F12=SUBMIT
Figure 74. ARRAYP Storage Format
Defining Named Storage Locations
If you browse the same storage locations or control blocks frequently, you might
want to set up a file that names those storage locations so that you can use a name
in the BROWSE command.
To enable the BROWSE command to use a named reference to storage, you must
allocate a sequential file to the DD name ISRDDN. Within that file each line is
either a comment or a named storage location. Comments start with a semi-colon
(;).
Location definitions have a name as the first word, followed by a TSO TEST style
locator string. Anything after the locator string is ignored. The TSO TEST locator
string can use another defined name as a starting point. If the locator string cannot
be resolved because of syntax or other errors, the line is ignored.
For example, if you allocate a sequential file like the one shown in Figure 75 to DD
name ISRDDN, you could then browse your User Profile Table, which stores your
TSO PROFILE settings, by typing B UPT on the command line.
CVT
PSCB
JSCB
TCB
UPT
10.?
JSCB+108?
TCB+B4?
CVT??
PSCB+34?
Communications Vector Table
TSO Protected Step Control Block
Job/Step Control Block
Task Control Block
User Profile Table
Figure 75. Sample ISRDDN Named Storage File
Appendix G. ISRDDN Diagnostic Utility
211
212
z/OS V1R6.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol I
Notices
This information was developed for products and services offered in the U.S.A.
IBM may not offer the products, services, or features discussed in this document in
other countries. Consult your local IBM representative for information on the
products and services currently available in your area. Any reference to an IBM
product, program, or service is not intended to state or imply that only that IBM
product, program, or service may be used. Any functionally equivalent product,
program, or service that does not infringe any IBM intellectual property right may
be used instead. However, it is the user’s responsibility to evaluate and verify the
operation of any non-IBM product, program, or service.
IBM may have patents or pending patent applications covering subject matter
described in this document. The furnishing of this document does not give you
any license to these patents. You can send license inquiries, in writing, to the IBM
Director of Licensing, IBM Corporation, North Castle Drive, Armonk, NY
10504–1785, USA.
For license inquiries regarding double-byte (DBCS) information, contact the IBM
Intellectual Property Department in your country or send inquiries in writing to
IBM World Trade Asia Corporation
Licensing
2-31 Roppongi 3-chome, Minato-ku
Tokyo 106–0032, Japan
The following paragraph does not apply to the United Kingdom or any other
country where such provisions are inconsistent with local law:
INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS MACHINES CORPORATION PROVIDES THIS
PUBLICATION ″AS IS″ WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OR NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some states do not allow disclaimer of express or
implied warranties in certain transactions, therefore, this statement may not apply
to you.
This information could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors.
Changes are periodically made to the information herein; these changes will be
incorporated in new editions of the publication. IBM may make improvements
and/or changes in the product(s) and/or the program(s) described in this
publication at any time without notice.
Any references in this information to non-IBM Web sites are provided for
convenience only and do not in any manner serve as an endorsement of those Web
sites. The materials at those Web sites are not part of the materials for this IBM
product and use of those Web sites is at your own risk.
IBM may use or distribute any of the information you supply in any way it
believes appropriate without incurring any obligation to you.
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1980, 2004
213
Licensees of this program who wish to have information about it for the purpose
of enabling: (i) the exchange of information between independently created
programs and other programs (including this one) and (ii) the mutual use of the
information which has been exchanged, should contact:
IBM Corporation,
Mail Station P300
2455 South Road
Poughkeepsie New York 12601–5400
U.S.A.
Such information may be available, subject to appropriate terms and conditions,
including in some cases, payment of a fee.
The licensed program described in this document and all licensed material
available for it are provided by IBM under terms of the IBM Customer Agreement,
IBM International Program License Agreement or any equivalent agreement
between us.
Information concerning non-IBM products was obtained from the suppliers of
those products, their published announcements or other publicly available sources.
IBM has not tested those products and cannot confirm the accuracy of
performance, compatibility or any other claims related to non-IBM products.
Questions on the capabilities of non-IBM products should be addressed to the
suppliers of those products.
If you are viewing this information softcopy, the photographs and color
illustrations may not appear.
Programming Interface Information
This publication primarily documents information that is NOT intended to be used
as Programming Interfaces of ISPF.
This publication also documents intended Programming Interfaces that allow the
customer to write programs to obtain the services of ISPF. This information is
identified where it occurs, either by an introductory statement to a chapter or
section or by the following marking:
+---------------------Programming Interface information----------------------+
+------------------End of Programming Interface information------------------+
214
z/OS V1R6.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol I
Trademarks
The following terms are trademarks of International Business Machines
Corporation in the United States, other countries, or both:
AD/Cycle
APL2
BookManager
BookMaster
C++/MVS
COBOL/370
Common User Access
CUA
DFSMSrmm
DFSMS/MVS
DFSORT
FFST
GDDM
IBM
Language Environment
MVS
MVS/XA
OS/390
RACF
SAA
Systems Application Architecture
Tivoli
VTAM
z/OS
Microsoft, Windows, and Windows NT are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in
the United States, other countries, or both.
UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group in the United States and other
countries.
Linux is a trademark of Linus Torvalds in the United States, other countries, or
both.
Other company, product, and service names may be trademarks or service marks
of others.
Notices
215
216
z/OS V1R6.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol I
Index
Special characters
? (invalid load module directory
fields) 124
//* lines, job statement information 143
* (in source listing) 180
> (greater than)
using to pass a command to a dialog
function 98
| (OR symbol) 23
= (equal sign), used to initiate jump
function 90
= (jump function) 12
{ } (one operand required) 23
Numerics
1 to 9999 parameter, Scroll field 15
3850 virtual volumes
accessing 113
A
abbreviations for commands and other
values
commands 189
field values 189
keywords/operands 189
programming languages 190
scroll amounts 190
AC field, load module library
display 124
accelerator 31
ACCOUNT command, TSO 113
ACTIONS system command 72
activities
nesting 25
ALIAS command action, specified by
ZCTACT 94, 96
Alias-of field, load module library
display 124
alias, as substitute for ISPF 17
aliases for commands 96
aliases for scrolling commands 97
allocating ISPF libraries 151
allocating libraries, defined 111
Allocation List Line Commands 204
Browse 205
Compress 206
Edit 205
Free 205
Information 206
Member list 205
Query ENQs 206
Test Directory 206
View 205
VTOC Information 206
Allocation List Primary Commands 197
APF 201
Browse 203
Check 200
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1980, 2004
Allocation List Primary Commands
(continued)
Clist 199
Con 204
Count 200
Custom 202
Duplicates 200
Enq 203
Exclude 197
Find 197
Linklist 201
Load 201
Locate 197
Long 198
LPA 201
Member 198
Mlist 202
Only 197
Parmlib 201
Reset 198
Save 199
Select 201
Short 198
Allocations List, Current Data Set 193
alternate DBCS libraries 154
APPC connections 175
APPC requirements detail 175
APPC requirements fast path 175
application commands description 71
Arabic language support 42
Assembler H (option 4.1) allocation data
sets
SYSIN 191
SYSLIB 191
SYSLIN 192
SYSPRINT 191
SYSPUNCH 192
SYSTERM 192
SYSUT1 192
asterisk (*) parameter, SELECT
command 127
attention field
command entry 98, 104
selection 104
attention key (PA1) 105
ATTN keyword, defining attention
fields 104
Attributes field, load module library
display 124
automatic completion
data set and member names 106
AUTOTYPE 72
automatic completion
data set name 106
member name 106
cursor position sensitivity 108
enabling applications to use 108
function key for 106
restrictions 108
B
B (browse) line command
Data Set List utility (option 3.4) 130
Library utility (option 3.1) 130
Move/Copy utility (option 3.3) 130
BACKWARD
scrolling command 72, 97
system command 72
Batch (option 5)
output listings 142
overview 9
Bi-directional file transfer limitations 43
Bi-directional language support 42
blank options 15
block line command, defined 25
BOTTOM scrolling command 97
BOTTOM system command 72
Browse Mode
browsing DBCS data as EBCDIC
data 135
mixed mode 135
overview 9
bypassing display using jump
function 90
bypassing menus 17
bypassing the WSA connection
panel 166
C
CANCEL system command 72
Changed field, member list display 122
Changing Member List Field
Attributes 130
Changing the Default Sort Order for
Member Lists 130
character conversion for APL and TEXT
keyboards 187
Character sets, in a GUI display 33
check boxes, GUI mode 30
client/server communications,
configuring 169
CLIST
allocating library 153
restrictions 106
CMDE system command 72
Codepages, in a GUI display 33
COLOR
system command 72
combination box 31
Command (option 6)
overview 9
command abbreviations 189
command alias 96
command error processing 24
command field
entering commands 71
use with jump function 90
Command field, ISPF panels 15
command line 24
217
command notation 23
command retrieving 82
command stacking
restriction with HELP command 72
restriction with RETRIEVE
command 72
command tables
action commands 93
dynamically specified command
actions 99
format of 93
ISPCMDS system command table 93
used for assigning command
aliases 96
used for overriding system
commands 97
used for passing commands to a
dialog function 71, 98
Command, SWITCH 48
commands
aliases 96
application 71
entering 15
error processing 24
function 71
how to enter 71
interception by ISPF 71
ISPF notation 23
levels 71
line 9, 23
nesting 25
passing to a dialog function 98
PDF command
using an alias 17
using option parameter 17
primary 9, 23
processing, by ISPF 71
specifying action dynamically 99
stacking for execution 71
stacking with delimiter 24
system 72
commands, entering 24
command error processing 24
ISPF command notation 23
commands, member selection list 124
communications, configuring for
client/server 169
concatenation
during editing 115
during language processing 115
of function key-entered value with
command entry, restrict 100
conditional retrieve 73
Configuring APPC connections 175
Configuring Communications for ISPF
C/S 169
Configuring TCP/IP connections 169
CONFIRM command
Data Set List utility (option 3.4) 125
parameters
OFF 125
ON 125
Control TSOGUI Query 41
copy commmand 130
Created field
member list display 122
CRETRIEV system command 73
218
CSR (cursor) scrolling amount 92
CUAATTR system command 73
Current Data Set Allocations List 193
line commands 204
primary commands 197
using commands 197
current lists
definition 51
cursor control of scrolling 92
CURSOR parameter, Scroll field 15
Cursor position sensitivity,
AUTOTYPE 108
CURSOR system command 73
cursor-select key
processing of selected fields 104
selection of attention field 104
D
D (delete lines)
Data Set List utility (option 3.4) 130
Library utility (option 3.1) 130
data entry panels 16
DATA parameter
Scroll field 15
DATA scrolling amount 91
Data Set Allocations List, Current 193
Data Set List utility (option 3.4)
data set list listings 185
member list line commands 130
primary commands
CONFIRM 125
source and index listings 179
data set lists
personal 51, 53
reference 51
Data Set Name field
data entry panels 113
Data Set Password field, library/data set
entry panels 134
DBCS
allocating alternate libraries 154
session messages in English 154
default function key assignments 100
default function key settings
ending ISPF or an ISPF function 11
getting help 11
default mode, defined 14
default operands 23
Default Sort Order for Member Lists,
Changing 130
DELETE command, TSO 125
delimiters, used to stack commands 24
Diagnostic Utility, ISRDDN 193
dialog
development of 149
nested 89
recursive entry into 96
Dialog Test (option 7)
exiting with jump function (=) 12
overview 9
dialog, defined 3
direct access storage device, using with
packed data 136
display format 14
z/OS V1R6.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol I
double-byte character set (DBCS)
Browse or Edit DBCS data as EBCDIC
data 135
Edit and Browse 135
format definition 134
Format Specification utility (option
3.11) 134
formatted data, View, Edit, and
Browse 134
hexadecimal format 135
invalid mixed data 135
Mixed Mode field 135
DOWN system command 73, 91
drop-down list 31
DSLIST displays 56
DSLIST system command 73
DTEST system command 73
dual command processing 24
E
Edit (option 2)
editing DBCS data as EBCDIC 135
mixed mode 135
overview 9
EDIT command 131
END
system command 74
END command
ISPF 12
ending
a function or a dialog
END system command 74
RETURN system command 82
display, END system command 74
ending ISPF or an ISPF function, Exit
option (X) 12
ending member lists 118
entering a command 71
entering a command, defined 21
ENVIRON system command 74
EPDF system command 74
equal sign used to initiate jump
function 90
EXHELP system command 74
Exit (option X)
ending ISPF from the ISPF Primary
Option Menu 12
overview 10
use of log/list defaults 12
used with jump function (=) 12
EXIT system command 75
EXPAND system command 75, 92
extended binary coded decimal
interchange code (EBCDIC)
Browse or Edit DBCS data as
EBCDIC 135
format definition 134
hexadecimal format 135
invalid mixed data 135
Mixed Mode field 135
F
field selection
using cursor position 104
field selection (continued)
using light pen 104
field value abbreviations 189
field1 parameter, SORT command 128
field2 parameter, SORT command 128
file tailoring
allocating 152
image library 152
output libraries 152
FKA system command 75
Fonts, in a GUI display 32
fonts, setting for WSA 165
Foreground (option 4)
output listings 142
overview 9
format definition 134
Format Name field
Edit Entry Panel 134
effect on Mixed Mode field 134
View Entry Panel 134
Format Selection List panel 134
Format Specification utility (option 3.11)
IBM 5550 terminal support 134
format, panel 14
FORWARD
scrolling command 97
system command 75
FORWARD system command 75
FTP download 159
fullscreen TSO data 41
function (F) keys
See function keys
function commands 71
function key
AUTOTYPE 106
function keys 100
changing content and format
(TAILOR) 79, 101
command entry 99
defining functions 101
PFSHOW system command 79
providing default settings 104
saving definitions 104
used for command entry 71, 99
G
generation data sets 113
Group field, data entry panels
111
H
HALF parameter, Scroll field 15
HALF scrolling amount 91
Hardcopy utility (option 3.6)
source and index listings 179
Hebrew language support 42
HELP command
ISPF 11
HELP system command 72, 75
horizontal split-screen mode 44
I
IBM Products (option 9)
overview 9
ID field, member list display 122
IKJEFT1I 40
image library, allocating 152
Images, in a GUI display 33
index listings
for load libraries 182
for source libraries 180
Init field, member list display 122
Installation
ISPF Client/Server (ISPF C/S)
configuration parameters 158
ISPF Workstation Agent (ISPF WSA)
assumptions 157
Installation program
Workstation agent 163
INT system command 75
interactive application, defined 3
internal character representations
for APL keyboards 187
for TEXT keyboards 188
ISPCMDS system command table 93, 97
ISPDTLC system command 76
ISPF
command notation 23
command types 22
ending 11
entering commands 21
functions 3
getting help 11
interacting with 7
member name conventions 6
option selection 16
overview 3
primary options, option selection 16
starting 7
supported data types 5
understanding panels 14
user profiles 10
ISPF C/S download 162
ISPF C/S Download Utility
FTP method 159
Manual method 162
ISPF C/S Install Utility
ISPFINST.EXE 163
the C/S agent window 164
ISPF C/S installation, prerequisites
configuration parameters 158
ISPF client/server 173
ISPF Client/Server Component
check boxes
fonts 32
panel display CUA mode 31
PRINT command 32
WS command 32
GUI mode, how it looks
action bars 29
APL/TEXT character sets 32
color, intensity, and
highlighting 32
cursor movement 30
Enter key 31
Function keys 31
graphic areas 32
input fields 32
long messages 30
mnemonics 30
pull-down menus 29
ISPF Client/Server Component
(continued)
GUI mode, how it looks (continued)
push buttons 30
sample screens 33
short messages 30
split screen 32
title bars 29
WINDOW command 32
Restrictions
closing the ISPF C/S
component 44
ISPF commands
END 12
HELP 11
taking a screen snapshot 136
ISPF library names 111
ISPF library setup 149
ISPF library, defined 111
ISPF log listings 183
ISPF member statistics 118
ISPF Settings (option 0 ), overview 9
ISPF Workstation Agent installation,
prerequisites
assumptions 157
ISPFILE file tailoring output library 152
ISPFINST.EXE 163
ISPFVAR system command 76
ISPFWORK system command 76
ISPILIB image input library 152
ISPLIBD system command 76
ISPLLIB link library 153
ISPMALT alternate message library 153
ISPMLIB message library 149
ISPPALT alternate panel library 153
ISPPLIB panel library 149
ISPPREP system command 76
ISPPROF default application profile
pool 149
ISPSALT alternate skeleton library 153
ISPSLIB skeleton library 149
ISPSTART command, session language
override 154
ISPTABL table output library 152
ISPTLIB table input library 149, 152
ISRDDN Diagnostic Utility 193
Browsing storage 206
Browsing storage commands
ARRAY 209
ARRAYP 210
BROWSE 206
CHAIN 208
DATA 207
FORMAT 207
NARROW 208
RAW 207
REFRESH 208
WIDE 208
ISRRLIST system command 76
ISRROUTE system command 76
J
JCL for allocating libraries for MVS 151
job statement information
parameters
//* lines 143
Index
219
jump function 25, 90
jump function (=), ISPF
12
K
keepalive socket option 173
KEYLIST system command 77
KEYS system command 77
KEYS system command, defining
function key functions 101
KEYSHELP system command 77
keyword/operand abbreviations 189
L
language for ISPF session,
specifying 154
lcmd parameter, SELECT command 127
LEFT system command 77, 91
levels of ISPF commands 71
LIB field
load module library display 123
member list display 122
libraries and data sets
data set passwords 134
format definitions 134
list and log data sets 136
member selection lists 116
mixed mode 135
naming ISPF libraries and data
sets 111
packed data sets 136
partitioned data set extended
(PDSE) 135
sample ISPF session 143
library concatenation
during editing 115
during language processing 115
functions that use concatenation 114
Group field 114
overview 114
library lists
personal 51
library member
definition of 111
Library utility (option 3.1)
member list line commands 130
Library utility (option 3.1), source and
index listings 179
light pen
processing of selected fields 104
sample panel 105
selection of attention field 104
using 104
limitations, bi-directional files 43
line command fields 24
line commands
defined 9, 23
definition of 124
member selection list 125
Line Commands, Allocation List 204
linking requirement for split-screen
mode 153
list and log data sets
foreground and batch output listings
list-id parameter 142
220
list and log data sets (continued)
foreground and batch output listings
(continued)
prefix parameter 142
userid parameter 142
job statement information 143
list data set 136
log data set 137
other temporary data sets 142
prefix parameter 136
printing list/log data sets 140
taking a screen snapshot 136
temporary names 136
userid parameter 136
list box 30
list data set
list-id 127
prefix 127
processing 137
list modes 52
LIST system command 77
list-id parameter
Foreground and Batch output
listings 142
SAVE command 126
List, Current Data Set Allocations 193
LIST, system command
conditions for using 139
description 137
using 137
listing formats
data set list listings 186
ISPF log listings 183
member list listings 185
source and index listings 179
load module library
invalid directory fields (?) 124
member statistics 123
load module library display
example 123
LOCATE command
member selection list 126
parameters
string 126
log data set
processing 137
LOG system command
conditions for using 139
description 77, 137
Log/List (option 0)
changing defaults 10
effect on Exit (X) option 12
logical screens (split-screen mode) 44
Long Message field, ISPF panels 15
LookAt message retrieval tool xii
M
managed data set
defined 135
Manual download 162
MAX parameter, Scroll field 15
MAX scrolling amount 91
Member field, data entry panels 112
member list display
example 119
z/OS V1R6.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol I
Member List Field Attributes,
Changing 130
member list listings
formats 185
load libraries 184
source libraries 183
member list lists 183
Member List Positioning 133
member list primary commands
SRCHFOR 129
Member Lists, Refreshing 130
member name conventions 6
member selection list
defined 116
displaying member lists 117
ending member lists 118
fields
load module library 123
source library 122
ISPF member statistics 118
line commands
B (browse) 130
D (delete) 130
E (edit) 131
P (print) 131
R (rename) 131
S (select) 128, 130
V (view) 131
list data set 127
load module library member
statistics 123
primary commands
LOCATE 126
RESET 126
SAVE 126
SELECT 127
SORT 128
table of differences 116
updating a member list 132
Member selection list commands 124
Member Selection List Primary
Commands
MLC 130
MLS 130
Refresh 130
menu 15
message retrieval tool, LookAt xii
messages
as means of communication 7
conditions for display 24
displayed by HELP command 11
English for DBCS session 154
failure to enter required value 16
inconsistent values 16
Long Message field 15
Short Message field 15
mixed data
assumed 135
format definition 134
invalid, examples of 135
Mixed Mode field 135
non-mixed mode 135
unformatted 135
Mixed Mode field
Edit Entry Panel 135
View Entry Panel 135
MLC Command 130
MLS Command 130
mnemonics, GUI mode 30
Mod field, member list display 122
MOUNT authority 113
move members 115
move the member 131
Move/Copy utility (option 3.3)
member list line commands 130
Move/Copy utility (option 3.3), source
and index listings 179
MSGID system command 78
multiple, defined for line commands 116
N
Name field
load module library display 123
member list display 122
naming ISPF libraries and data sets
ISPF library names 111
Other Partitioned or Sequential Data
Set Names 112
volume serials 113
national language for ISPF session 154
National Language Support (NLS) 23
native mode, defined 14
nested commands 25
nested dialogs 89
NLS
See National Language Support
non-ISPF displays, using REFRESH 89
NOP action, specified using ZCTACT 94
NOP system command 78
notation conventions 23
NRETRIEV command 63
SCLM considerations 64
NRETRIEV key 51
NRETRIEV system command 78
NX parameter, Attributes field 124
O
OFF parameter
CONFIRM command 125
OL parameter, Attributes field 124
ON parameter
CONFIRM command 125
operand notation
lowercase 23
one required({ }) 23
optional([ ]) 23
OR symbol (|) 23
stacked 23
underscored defaults 23
uppercase 23
operating system, passing commands
Option field, ISPF panels 15
option selection
0 - ISPF Settings 9
1 - View 9
10 - SCLM 10
2 - Edit 9
3 - Utilities 9
4 - Foreground 9
5 - Batch 9
6 - Command 9
71
option selection (continued)
7 - Dialog Test 9
9 - IBM Products 9
X - Exit 10
optional ISPF libraries 152
Other Partitioned or Sequential Data Set
Names 112
other temporary data sets 142
OUTLINE keyword
fields affected by 79
on PRINT system command 79
Outlist utility (option 3.8), source and
index listings 179
OV parameter, Attributes field 124
overriding, system commands 97
overview of ISPF
commands, entering 21
interacting with ISPF 7
ISPF primary options 9
starting ISPF 7
understanding ISPF panels 14
user profiles 10
P
P (print) line command
Data Set List utility (option 3.4) 131
Library utility (option 3.1) 131
PA keys
definition 105
PA1 105
PA2 105
packed data
format defined 136
requirements for using 136
PAGE parameter, Scroll field 15
PAGE scrolling amount 91
panel format 14
panel types
data entry panels 16
menus 15
overview 15
PANELID system command 78
panels
as means of communication 7
basic types 15
default mode 14
defined 14
load module library display
example 123
member list display
example 119
menus 15
native mode 14
panel format 14
retaining previous values 16
what they display 7
parameter
parenthesis added to 95
parenthesis, added to command
parameter 95
partitioned data set extended
(PDSE) 135
partitioning the display, screen-split
screen mode 44
passing commands
to a dialog function 98
passing commands (continued)
to the operating system 71
PASSTHRU action
specified using ZCTACT 94, 97
pattern parameter, SELECT
command 127
pattern, defined 112
PCF (TSO Programming Control
Facility) 152
PDSE 135
personal data set list 53
action bar choices 57
how to create 55
how to display the list of lists 55
personal data set list panel
fields 59
personal data set lists 51, 59
personal data set lists panel
action bar choices 60
fields 61
personal library list 54
personal library lists 51
personal list commands
command line 65
function keys 66
personal lists 52, 55, 56
command interface (fast path) 65
example of ISPF panel using
NRETRIEV 69
function keys 66
library 54
NRETRIEV command 63
personal data set list 53
private lists 62
reference data set list 54
reference library list 54
retrieving names from 56
shared lists 62
PFSHOW system command
changing content and format
(TAILOR) 79, 101
ZPFCTL system variable 103
ZPFFMT system variable 102
ZPFSET system variable 102
ZPRIKEYS system variable 102
positioning, member list 133
prefix parameter
Foreground and Batch output
listings 142
list and log data sets 136
primary commands
defined 9, 23, 124
member selection list 124
Primary Commands, Allocation List 197
PRINT command, in GUI mode 32
PRINT system command 79
PRINT-HI system command 80
PRINTDS
editing the command 141
printing the Log and List data
sets 140
PRINTG system command 80
PRINTL system command 80
PRINTLHI system command 80
profiles, user 10
program access (PA) keys 105
program library, allocating 153
Index
221
program linking requirement for
split-screen mode 153
Programming Control Facility (PCF)
programming language
abbreviations 190
Project field, data entry panels 111
PSCOLOR system command 81
S
134
Q
Query ENQs
206
R
R (rename) line command
Data Set List utility (option 3.4) 131
Library utility (option 3.1) 131
RACF (Resource Access Control
Facility) 134
radio button 31
RCHANGE system command 81
recursive entry into dialog functions 96
redisplaying contents of a screen using
PA key 105
REFACTD system command 81
REFACTL system command 81
REFADDD system command 81
REFADDL system command 81
reference data set list 54
reference data set lists 51
reference library list 54
reference library lists 51
referral lists 51
example of ISPF panel using referral
list 66
REFLISTD system command 81
REFLISTL system command 81
RefMode 52
REFOPEND system command 81
REFOPENL system command 81
Refresh Command 130
Refreshing Member Lists 130
Rename field on member list
display 122, 123
repeating, commands (RETRIEVE) 82
required ISPF libraries 149
RESET command
member selection list 126
RESET key
description 106
reset the member 131
reshow key (PA2) 105
RESIZE system command 81
Resource Access Control Facility
(RACF) 134
RETF system command 81, 88
RETP system command 82, 88
RETRIEVE system command 82, 86
RETURN system command 82, 89
REXX - allocating library 153
RF parameter, Attributes field 124
RFIND system command 82
RIGHT system command 77, 82, 91
RN parameter, Attributes field 124
RU parameter, Attributes field 124
rules for AUTOTYPE 107
222
S (select) line command
member selection list 128
Move/Copy utility (option 3.3) 130
sample ISPF session 143
SAREA system command 82
SAS/C 170
SAVE command
Data Set List utility (option 3.4) 183
member selection list 126
parameters
asterisk (*) 127
lcmd 127
list-id 126
pattern 127
saving function key definitions 104
SCLM (option 10)
exiting with jump function (=) 12
overview 10
SCRNAME system command 82
scroll amount abbreviations 190
Scroll field, ISPF panels 15
scrolling
command aliases 97
commands to control 91
scroll amount 91
tutorial panels 91
SELECT action
command 95
specified by ZCTACT 94
SELECT command
member selection list 127
separator bar 31
Settings (option 0)
changing default delimiter 24
overriding mode switching 14
SETTINGS system command 82
SETVERB action
specified by ZCTACT 94
shared personal lists 62
shift-in characters
DBCS character strings 135
formatted data, Edit, View and
Browse 134
invalid mixed data, examples of 135
treatment in non-mixed mode 135
shift-out characters
DBCS character strings 135
formatted data Edit and Browse 134
invalid mixed data, examples of 135
treatment in non-mixed mode 135
Short Message field, ISPF panels 15
single selection, defined for line
commands 116
Size field
load module library display 124
member list display 122
skipping panel display using jump
function 90
snapshot of a screen 136
sockets 170
SORT command
member selection list 128
parameters
field1 128
field2 128
z/OS V1R6.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol I
Sort Order for Member Lists, Changing
the Default 130
source listings 179
source segments 115
specifying action dynamically 99
SPLIT command 45
SPLIT system command 83
split-screen mode
entering 45
logical screens 44
maximum number 44
partitioning display screen 44
program linking requirement 153
RETRIEVE function 87
terminating 45
VSAM restrictions 50
split-screen mode, maximum number 44
SPLITV system command 49, 83
SRCHFOR command, Member List
utility 129
stack - (RETRIEVE command) 86
stacked operands 23
stacking commands
for execution 71
restrictions 72
start column, defined 180
Start GUI Session 26
START system command 83
statistics
ISPF members 118
load module libraries 123
string parameter
LOCATE command 126
submit the member 131
SuperC listing title lines
index listings 180
source listings 179
suspending an activity 25
SWAP system command 84
SWITCH
system command 84
SWITCH Command 48
3270 screens 48
GUI screens 48
restrictions 48
rules for splitting and swapping 48
SWITCH system command 84
SYSIN data set
Assembler H 191
VS COBOL II 191
SYSLIB data set
Assembler H 191
VS COBOL II 191
SYSLIN data set
Assembler H 192
VS COBOL II 192
SYSPRINT data set
Assembler H 191
VS COBOL II 191
SYSPUNCH data set
Assembler H 192
VS COBOL II 192
system commands
description 71
overriding by use of command
tables 97
System commands
function key defaults 72
list of 72
System Commands
ACTIONS 72
BACKWARD 72
BOTTOM 72
CANCEL 72
CMDE 72
COLOR 72
CRETRIEV 73
CUAATTR 73
CURSOR 73
DOWN 73
DSLIST 73
DTEST 73
ENVIRON 74
EPDF 74
EXHELP 74
EXIT 75
EXPAND 75, 92
FKA 75
FORWARD 75
HELP 75
INT 75
ISPDTLC 76
ISPFVAR 76
ISPFWORK 76
ISPLIBD 76
ISPPREP 76
ISRRLIST 76
ISRROUTE 76
KEYLIST 77
KEYS 77
KEYSHELP 77
LEFT 77
LIST 77
LOG 77
MSGID 78
NOP 78
NRETRIEV 78
PANELID 78
PFSHOW 79
PRINT 79
PRINT-HI 80
PRINTG 80
PRINTL 80
PRINTLHI 80
PSCOLOR 81
RCHANGE 81
REFACTD 81
REFACTL 81
REFADDD 81
REFADDL 81
REFLISTD 81
REFLISTL 81
REFOPEND 81
REFOPENL 81
RESIZE 81
RETF 81
RETP 82
RETRIEVE 82
RETURN 82
RFIND 82
RIGHT 77, 82
SAREA 82
SCRNAME 82
System Commands (continued)
SETTINGS 82
SPLIT 83
SPLITV 83
START 83
SWAP 84
SWITCH 84
TOP 84
TSO 84
TSOCMD 85
TSOGUI 85
TUTOR 85
UP 85
WINDOW 85
WS 85
WSCON 85
WSDISCON 86
ZKEYS 86
system register for WSA 166
system variables, saving function key
definitions 104
SYSTERM data set
Assembler H 192
VS COBOL II 192
SYSUT1 data set
Assembler H 192
VS COBOL II 192
SYSUT2 - SYSUT7 data sets, VS COBOL
II 192
T
table libraries, allocating 152
TAILOR operand on PFSHOW
command 79, 101
TCP/IP connections 169
TCP/IP requirements detail 169
TCP/IP requirements fast path 169
temporary data sets 142
terminating
a function or dialog
END system command 74
RETURN system command 82
display by using END system
command 74
TSO commands of CLIST by using PA
Key 105
Title field, ISPF panels 15
TOP
scrolling command 97
system command 84
TOP system command 84
transmission codes 187
TS parameter, Attributes field, load
module library 124
TSO
commands
ACCOUNT 113
DELETE 125
Programming Control Facility 152
TSO command 131
TSO line mode support
alternate entry point 40
fullscreen TSO data 41
general information 39
how to use 40
restrictions 40
TSO system command 84
TSOCMD system command 85
TSOGUI 85
TSOGUI system command 85
TTR field, load module library
display 124
TUTOR system command 85
Tutorial (Option T), finding ISPF
information 7
Type field, data entry panels 111
U
unavailable choices 31
underscored operands 23
understanding ISPF panels
overview 14
panel format 14
panel types 15
UP
scroll command 85, 91
system command 85, 91
updating a member list 132
user profiles 10
userid parameter
Foreground and Batch output
listings 142
list and log data sets 136
using AUTOTYPE 107
Utilities (option 3)
overview 9
V
V (view) line command
Data Set List utility (option 3.4) 131
Library utility (option 3.1) 131
vertical split-screen mode 49
VIO, allocating temporary data sets 142
Volume Serial field
data entry panels 113
VS COBOL II compiler (option 4.2)
allocation data sets
SYSIN 191
SYSLIB 191
SYSLIN 192
SYSPRINT 191
SYSPUNCH 192
SYSTERM 192
SYSUT1 192
SYSUT2 - SYSUT7 192
VSAM restrictions, split-screen mode 50
VTOC Information 206
VV.MM field, member list display 122
W
WINDOW system command 85
Workplace option description 10
workstation agent
setting fonts 165
system register 166
Workstation agent 163
installation program 163
workstation agent window 164
Index
223
writing a list to a list data set
member list 126
writing dialogs 149
WS command 131
WS system command 85
WSCON system command 85
WSCON System command 26
WSDISCON system command 86
Z
z/OS Communications Server: IP 170
z/OS UNIX sockets 170
ZCTACT
command table field 96
system variable 93
ZCTDESC system variable 93
ZCTTRUNC system variable 93
ZCTVERB
command table field (alias value) 96
system variable 93
ZKEYS system command 86
ZLANG system variable 154
ZPARM system variable 95
parenthesis added to 95
ZPF01, ZPF02, ... ZPF24 system
variables 104
ZPFCTL system variable, on
PFSHOW 103
ZPFFMT system variable on
PFSHOW 102
ZPFSET system variable, on
PFSHOW 102
ZPRIKEYS system variable on PFSHOW
system command 102
ZSCBR system variable 92
ZSCED system variable 92
ZSCML system variable 92
ZSCROLLAsystem variable 92
ZSCROLLD system variable 92
ZSCROLLN system variable 92
ZTEMPF system variable 152
ZTEMPN system variable 152
ZVERB system variable 98
224
z/OS V1R6.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol I
Readers’ Comments — We’d Like to Hear from You
Interactive System Productivity Facility (ISPF)
User’s Guide Volume I
z/OS Version 1 Release 6.0
Publication No. SC34-4822-03
Overall, how satisfied are you with the information in this book?
Overall satisfaction
Very Satisfied
Satisfied
Neutral
Dissatisfied
h
h
h
h
Very
Dissatisfied
h
How satisfied are you that the information in this book is:
Accurate
Complete
Easy to find
Easy to understand
Well organized
Applicable to your tasks
Very Satisfied
Satisfied
Neutral
Dissatisfied
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
Very
Dissatisfied
h
h
h
h
h
h
Please tell us how we can improve this book:
Thank you for your responses. May we contact you?
h Yes
h No
When you send comments to IBM, you grant IBM a nonexclusive right to use or distribute your comments in any
way it believes appropriate without incurring any obligation to you.
Name
Company or Organization
Phone No.
Address
SC34-4822-03
___________________________________________________________________________________________________
Readers’ Comments — We’d Like to Hear from You
Cut or Fold
Along Line
_ _ _ _ _ _ _Fold
_ _ _and
_ _ _Tape
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _Please
_ _ _ _ _do
_ _not
_ _ staple
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _Fold
_ _ _and
_ _ Tape
______
NO POSTAGE
NECESSARY
IF MAILED IN THE
UNITED STATES
BUSINESS REPLY MAIL
FIRST-CLASS MAIL
PERMIT NO. 40 ARMONK, NEW YORK
POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY ADDRESSEE
IBM Corporation
Department J87/D325
555 Bailey Avenue
San Jose, CA
U.S.A. 95141-9989
_________________________________________________________________________________________
Please do not staple
Fold and Tape
Fold and Tape
SC34-4822-03
Cut or Fold
Along Line
File Number: S370/4300-39
Program Number: 5694-A01
Printed in USA
SC34-4822-03